Home

QUANTUM User Manual V5.0

1. Recordclips Close Recordclips OO 00 24 03 13 03 19 Recordclips 00 00 03 01 15 02 49 November 13 2014 The Undo List shows a mixture of audio events automation data events and combined audio data events The Undo menu shows a list of undoable events with some detail about the type of event This will help you choose which event s you want to undo Red events are ones that you have already undone and can be redone The Time column shows the time of day that the event occurred You can undo to any point in the list in the following ways Step 1 Double click the event with the mouse OR Step 1 Jog down to the event using the Jog Wheel Step 2 Press the ENTER button this also closes the Undo List You can locate to the PlayHead timecode of any event by selecting it and pressing the Locate softkey Undo Follow When you undo or redo an event the system can help by restoring the conditions under which you first made the change This may include optionally the transport location Zoom level track selection and track display which tracks are displayed Each of these options is available in the Setup General Preferences Projects dialog as shown below Fairlight QUANTUM Page 139 EDITING November 13 2014 General Preferences Load Last Project on Startup C Profiles Delete Profiles after 14 dindo Redo Options Playhead follows Undo ack selection foll
2. Original Search Specific Folders for External Media Import Media Preview Media references the audio files from the omf this may cause slowdowns on large projects Note If the project is an MT project stuffing the fuffs will render all audio to the current project If the project is a DR2 project using the Localise command will place all the audio in a folder inside the project folder This brings all the audio used by the project into one place so that it can be easily backed up or copied Fully Import Media automatically places the audio from the omf in either your FUF or Media folder inside the folder of the current project Clip Naming Standard derives the names of clips from the omf Master Clip within the omf file Sub Composition OMF s created in AVID often derive clips from either the Master clip and the Sub Composition This option derives the names of clips from the Sub Composition Use this setting to give your clips more logical names if they are coming from an AVID and not displaying logical clip names Offset Entering a timecode offset moves the whole composition forwards on the timeline Entering a track offset moves the whole composition down in the track display Importing Individual Sound Files Sound files of various types can be imported directly into your Post V5 0 project These include the following MP2 MP3 WAV BWAV AAC and more
3. Range You can make a range that specifies exactly which part of the clip is affected The easiest way is like this more about ranges later Step 1 Move the transport where you d like to start the range Step 2 Press the from key Step 3 Move the transport where you d like to end the range Step 4 Press the to key Jump From key The From and To keys The range is marked in red Now we ll cut and paste the audio in the range Step 1 Choose the track and set the range we ve just done this Step 2 Press the cut key if not already selected Step 3 Press the cut range key Fairlight QUANTUM Page 106 EDITING November 13 2014 The audio in the range is moved to the clipboard We see the ghost Step 4 Select another track and or move to another location The ghost moves to the new track Step 5 Press the Enter key to paste the clipboard The clipboard former range is pasted The range persists after the edit Notes about Cut and Paste Cut Tail Works the same way aS cut head but cuts the later part of the clip Range and Head When a range is active pressing the cut head key cuts the audio from the start of the range to the cursor This will not work if the cursor is not in the range Range and cut tail work similarly together Multiple Clips and Tracks When there is no range the target for editing is all the clips on selected tracks that are touching the cursor It s eas
4. Pyxis Mixer Track Info Panel window Arm Solo Mute Select Fader Pan Automation Track and clip area Fairlight QUANTUM Page 7 QUANTUM OVERVIEW November 13 2014 Clip Track name Track Link indication Track bed 03 24 Martini_Asti_Balloons_30_vl0bb Clip Name ri _ dt Automation 2 curve 03 24 Martini Asti Balloons 30 vi0b R Track Meter Pan value Fader value MIDI Audio Indicator Track and Clip Names Normally clips and their names appear on top of track names You can reverse this so that the track names have display precedence by clicking Setup General Preferences Options and selecting or deselecting Display track names above clip display Smart Pane This area contains a number of different displays at different times It may show Meters Clip EQ parameters Fade parameters and so on Each editing mode automatically displays its appropriate Smart Pane You can also force the display of any pane or no Smart Pane at all by selecting View Smart Pane at the top of the Edit Screen Range Display This area contains three timecode values associated with Editing Ranges They are respectively the Range In time Range Out time and Range duration When Range is switched off these numbers show Fairlight QUANTUM Page 8 QUANTUM OVERVIEW November 13 2014 the last range that was created which can be restored by clicking the Range On key or selecting the Range On comma
5. To access tracks that are not currently shown in the Pad press the Bank button to move up in lots of 12 or 24 or hold down the Bank button and choose from the displayed buttons see below for more details Fairlight QUANTUM Page 15 CENTRAL TACTILE CONTROL November 13 2014 ALT i Tranas Tranas Tracl k mis w Each encoder controls two parameters the normal parameter and the ALT parameter To access the ALT parameter the ALT button must be engaged It can operate in momentary or latched modes Gain Band 1 00 In ee ee E Cre q ona pe 2k42 HI SH Range HF Normal Mode ALT Mode As shown above the Pad changes its lettering to show which parameters are active Use Touch for ALT Parameters Most ALT parameters are switches while most normal parameters are continuous controls For continuous controls turn the encoder clockwise to increase the value or anti clockwise to decrease it For switched parameters touch or tap the encoder lightly but firmly to change the switch state Some switches have only two values like OFF or ON but others have many values such as the Shape parameter shown above With these parameters tapping the encoder causes them to cycle around all their possible values then start again Bank The Bank button is used to page through groups of tracks and other paths in the Pad There are several ways to use it 1 Press and release Bank to advance the track
6. W Ay Y x Ma ka l MP3 mp3 AIF aif QTube QTube is a video database that Fairlight systems can access A licence is required from Fairlight and from QTube See your Fairlight dealer for details if you wish to purchase this option To set up QTube first click Setup General Preferences Media Libraries Enter the Server Name in the field provided for QTube When making your first QTube search for the session you will be asked to log in to your QTube account Searching Step 1 Display the QTube interface by clicking view gt Smart Pane QTube Gateway The interface is displayed Fairlight QUANTUM Page 177 AUDIOBASE CLIP SEARCH CLIPSTORES QTUBE November 13 2014 Title Category fl Cp 1 a ite L 10 00 po EE Geisa 20 14 10 29 09 57 43 000 0 1 Bee 00 55 00 00 ENEE EINSEXTRA z 3 2 Janer AANY Sategory O TUBE Get Audio ass ae eee 500000 m aed nooiens 120x1080 Frame Rate 00 01 09 21 00 01 08 00 SPORTS 2 Clip ID Title Created Duration Owner Category 17008 EINSEXTRA AKTUELL 06 00 2014 10 29 04 00 58 00 00 QUANTEL GER QTUBE 17013 EINSEXTRA AKTUELL 09 00 2014 10 29 08 00 58 00 00 QUANTEL GER QTUBE 17014 EINSEXTRA AKTUELL 10 00 _2014 10 29 09 00 58 00 00 QUANTEL GER QTUBE 17015 EINSEXTRA AKTUELL 11 00 2014 10 29 10 00 58 00 00 QUANTEL GER QTUBE 17016 EINSEXTRA AKTUELL 12 00 2014 10 29 11 00 58 00 00 QUANTEL GER QTUBE 17017 EI
7. Pyxis TRACK November 13 2014 Options Playback Display Options Display Mode Original aspect Ratio intelaced Display Mode Pysis Frol Original Size Use Two Monitors f Available E Bumt in Timecode xl BITC Transparent Avid OMF View Both Fields Small View Display Both Fields Field 1 Field 2 Either Large View Display Both Fields Field 1 Field 2 Either Pyxis Pro PAL NTSC Jog 2 Fields Field 1 Field 2 Either Compensate for Blackmagic 2 47 NTSC Driver Bug E Display Video Underun Message Show Special Video Into Auto Fades microseconds No Media Soft Edits 1900 Media Offline Tape Mode 1500 Video Playback Advance Delay Compensation Frames Vaa Video Window t Pyais Pro Decklink Output The control allows you to advance or retard playback by a number of frames While in stop or Jog the correct frame is output but in play the offset is activated You can have a separate setting for your Decklink output and your VGA output since they are likely to feed different monitors Loading Video into Pyxis Track There are two methods for loading video into Pyxis Track In both cases the video track must be visible on screen Fairlight QUANTUM Page 297 Pyxis TRACK November 13 2014 Importing a Video File Step 1 Make sure that a Pyxis track is displayed If not see above Step 2 Click gt gt Step 3 The following dialog box is displayed AVIVAVI_Bars_PAL_8 Bit avi rss M JPEG
8. True Rate True Sample Rate shows the speed at which QUANTUM is running It also shows the real frame rate after adjusting for Pull Up Down setting Video Detect The Video Clock Detected indicator is green when a valid Video Clock reference is detected and red when Video Clock is missing or invalid Seeking Lock The Seeking Lock indicator is green when seeking lock and red when not in use Fairlight QUANTUM Page 347 SYNC AND MACHINE CONTROL November 13 2014 Sync The Sync indicator is green when a valid Clock Sync Source reference is detected and red when the Clock Sync Source is missing or invalid Progressive Detect SX 20 supports both Progressive and Interlaced clocks If the Progressive Clock Detect indicator is green a Progressive Clock reference has been detected and is being used as the primary sync reference Clock In Range The Clock In Range indicator is green when the Clock reference is in range and red when the clock reference is out of range Position Sync When synchronising with an external machine such as a video machine audio recorder or digital audio workstation a positional source allows the machines to tell each other where they are The Position Sync Source indicator is green when a valid Position Sync Source reference is detected and red when the Position Sync Source is missing or invalid Synchronization Details QUANTUM can track the position and motion of external transports such
9. Band 1 2 Band 3 4 Page 1 Page 2 Page Selection Clip EQ Parameter The four bands of EQ are displayed on two pages Use the Pad buttons to choose a page 0 0 dB 10000 hz 1 0 Normal view ALT view Fairlight QUANTUM Page 100 EDITING November 13 2014 To gain access to the Shape parameter press or hold the ALT button and touch the Encoder to cycle through the possible shapes While changing EQ settings you can hear the changes by playing over the clip Hint while over the clip hold down BLUE and press the loop clip button At any time you may A B the changes you have made with the previous EQ setting for the clip being edited To do this press the 01d New soft key below For any clip whether or not it is being edited you can press the EQ In Out button to toggle its Clip EQ on and off Mame EQ In Out Copy Mudge Trim cll Old New Level Old hJ E When all parameters are set press Enter If you want to escape without changing the Clip EQ settings press Edit EQ again Clip EQ is explored in much more detail later in this chapter Razor Cuts Overview Normal non razor editing targets red clips but does not affect other clips This works well for video based editing where the sound is synchronised to fixed picture frames When working on radio spots interviews and music pieces we sometimes need to cut time as well as audio This is just like people used to do on ta
10. In this instance special channels are used to create the necessary timing changes to correctly compensate for latencies Notes Bus Balancing is enabled in the Audio Plugins General Preference Tab by selecting the Bus Balancing Enabled option Since this new mechanism uses system resources it is Disabled by default The new mechanism only works for Main Assign If a track is not assigned to the Main bus this mechanism is not invoked For this to work a track can only be assigned to one bus plus Main e g If Track1 is simultaneously assigned to Sub1 gt Main and Aux1 gt Main then the old priority mechanism is invoked and only the Sub1 correctly compensated If a bus feed is not also assigned to the Main bus then the mechanism is not invoked and the old bus priority mechanism used No more than 12 buses can be balanced in this way Each balanced bus uses special channels which copy the elements of the Main bus For a 5 1 Main bus 6 such channels are used stereo uses 2 There are a total of 24 special channels available for bus balancing Instantiation Inserting a Plug in on a Signal Path Method 1 via Plug in Config Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Select the path Press Pad Press Plug ins Press Config Plugs Press Add Plug Using the jog wheel scroll through the list of plug ins Alternatively you may use the mouse to select any plug in When the desired plug
11. Load Last Project on Startup D Set the desired interval for Auto Save or turn it off Note When the time for an Auto Save arrives it will wait until the transport is stationary then take control of the system While saving it will prevent the transport from starting and mute all audio at the outputs This is necessary to prevent unwanted interaction with the automation system Undo Files QUANTUM allows unlimited UNDOs for audio editing It does this by storing a copy of the Edit list each time an edit is made The undo files are stored in the folder C Program Files Fairlight Dream II Undo Each time a project is opened the system starts writing undo files for it starting with a file called UndoFile_00 1 This file name does not contain the project for which it was created because the system is designed only to work with the currently open project file Immediately after reopening any file the UNDO command cannot be issued it only works on edits made in the current sessions If there is an UndoFile_00 1 already in the folder which there almost certainly is it will be replaced with this one This means that undo files from older projects are difficult to identify But if you have wrongly and very recently saved a project and you wish to access a previous version of the edit list take the following steps Fairlight QUANTUM Page 322 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT November 13 2014 Step 1 Open the folder C Program Files
12. Render Bender Render Bender can provide time compression without pitch change or vice versa or a combination of the two It works on the current clip the red one under the cursor or the selected range of clips To use Render Bender click the menu item Process gt Render Bender The following dialog box appears General Purpose You may set a Time Factor affecting the length of the selected clip s and an independent Pitch Factor affecting the pitch If Varispeed is selected the Time Factor is automatically set inversely proportional to the Pitch Factor The result is similar to speeding up or slowing down a Tape Recorder a WHAT 7 The Formant Factor affects the frequency response of the result sounding a bit like a band pass filter on full spectrum audio Setting it to Auto will normally give neutral results where the spectrum of the audio is little changed Fairlight QUANTUM Page 160 TIME DOMAIN PROCESSING November 13 2014 Setting the Algorithm gives you options as to the parameters used in processing These are not directly visible but the choices in the menu allow you to try different settings There is no sure fire way of predicting what will work the best for any particular type of audio Quality determines how much time the system is allowed to spend on the process Better and best quality take more time than good ClipBender ClipBender provides real time non destructive processing of pitch and t
13. This consolidates your project into a file used by other manufacturers Step 1 Select the clip or clips to be exported Ranges of clips can also be selected Step 2 Click the File menu command above the Track display Step 3 Choose Export then Audio Tracks Clips Step 4 The following dialog box appears D Fairlight AUi Frojectsi Woumalize asa Ser onea sinalin Make your selections and click OK File Type Select Wav BWave or AIF files BWave files will be exported with the timecode stamp from the Post V5 0 timeline Export With Select Clip EQ Clip Level and or Clip Fades to render those modifications into the exported file s Normalize Normalize will examine the level in every clip you have selected find the maximum level of all the clips then show the gain increase needed to bring it up to 0 dB Then all the clips will be amplified by this amount giving you the loudest best quality signal possible while maintaining correct balance Audio Type Select bit depth and Sample Rate for exported file s Defaults to Project sample rate and bit depth Mixdown Fairlight QUANTUM Page 332 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT November 13 2014 Select Entire Project to export the entire project one file per track in Multiple Mono Mode Select Between Range to export all audio in the current range one file per track in Multiple Mono Mode Select Selected Clips to only export selected red c
14. ccccseeeeeees 284 TalkOaG K aiar baie nae Wea N 285 MET BRS ocras 286 LMOCUCHO NM riep 286 Master Screen Meters ccccccccseeseeeeeeees 286 Meter SCIS orn r 289 PAKS eono a a E 291 Stereo Compound Meters ccccseeeeeees 291 Parameter Setup ccccccssssseeeeeeeeseeeeeeees 292 PYXIS TRACK nsaasnnsnnennnnnnnennnnnnnennnnnnnan 294 MOQUCUON nien ident suet 294 Creating a Pyxis Track ccccccsssseseeeeeseeees 294 Adding a Second Pyxis Track 0 0000 295 Hiding and Showing the Video Track 295 Loading Video into Pyxis Track 000 297 Capturing Video into Pyxis Track 0 300 ENGDI OM aise sicct ict alan helvamecndutuicae Ua ednedeulinrad ys 302 The Pyxis Window ccccssceecsseeeeseeeeeeees 303 Using Pyxis Track as a Machine 305 The Pan Theatre ccccccccssseecseeeeseeeeeseeees 305 MIDI TRACKG cccscesccnscesscnseessenes 308 MOG UC HOM xcteitetee teenie weslnen ae 308 File Compatibility IMPORTANT 308 Convert Tracks to MIDI ccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 308 Patching to MIDI Tracks eeeeeeeeeeeees 309 Metronome erca A 309 Recording MIDI Clips ceeeecccceeeeseeeeeeees 310 Editing MIDI Clips eee eecceeeesseeeseeeeeeees 311 MIDI Note Editing ccccccssseeeesseeeeeeeeeees 311 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT 314 MrOdUCUOM aii tate se BN aoa mene mre 314 Basic
15. 2014 Advanced using Scripted Macros In QUANTUM a number of the HUI keys have been used to trigger scripted macros as follows CID_SW_MACKIE_BANK_DOWN decrement_fader_set CID_SW_MACKIE_BANK_UP increment_fader_set CID_SW_MACKIE_CHANNEL_DOWN decrement4_fader_set jump by four fader sets CID_SW_MACKIE_CHANNEL_UP increment4_fader_set jump by four fader sets CID_SW_MACKIE_UP EQUAL less_tracks show fewer tracks on the edit screen CID_SW_MACKIE_DOWN EQUAL more_tracks show more tracks on the edit screen If you wish to release one of the HUI keys for other functions you must edit the Events txt file in C Program Files Fairlight FMC Data User QUANTUM _ For example to liberate CID SW _MACKIE_BANK_DOWN add a hash in front of the line CONTROL CID_SW_MACKIE_ BANK DOWN EQUAL 1 decrement_fader_set like this CONTROL CID SW MACKIE BANK DOWN EQUAL 1 decrement_fader_set Then you can use CID_ SW_MACKIE_BANK_DOWN in your remap file or trigger a different scripted macro Fairlight QUANTUM Page 356
16. Commonly all tracks will be involved The Record Tracks correspond with the source tracks from the existing Source Project Select Edits to Reconform as for Capture Link Reels Each reel can come from a different project if required Use the Reel Linking dialog to choose the project for each reel select a reel then click the Project button and browse to the correct Project to be linked Fairlight QUANTUM Page 338 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT November 13 2014 Reel Linking Reel Project CTH Gi Fairlight AUi Projects DR_AMBIGIDR_AMBIG DRZ O3000 ia FairlightaU Projects MT_ForeigniMT_Foreign MT LIB 2 34000 Fairlight Projects 96Tracks 96Tracksy DRZ LIB 3 32000 Fairlight aU Projects ImportRobotsTestiImportRobotsTest DR LIB 4 10000 GFairlightaU Projects Wew Project O New Project o DR2 LIB 5 35000 a Fairlight Projects Wew Projecti4tiNew Projectl44 0Re2 LIB 6 16001 a Fairlight Projects New Project 44 New Projectl44 0Re2 LIB 6 PREREAD a Fairlight Projects Wew Projectl iNew Projectiz DRZ LIB 1 MAINRECO a Fairlight Projects New Projectl2 New Projectl DR LIB 1 31000 a Fairlight aU Projects New Projectl2 iNew Projectl DR LIB 1 36000 a Fairlight Projects Mew Projectl2 New Projectl DR LIB 1 03003 a Fairlight Projects New Project1z New Project1z2 DRZ LIB 1 37000 a Fairlight AUi Projects Wew Projecti iNew Projectiz DR LIB 1 ug a Fairlight Projects New Project1z New Projectl
17. DR LIB 1 Cog a Fairlight Projects New Projectl2 New Projectl BR LIB 1 Multiple reels can be selected at the same time and linked to a single project Step 6 Set up destination tracks If all tracks will be involved choose Track 1 as the destination Step 7 Click the Reconform button If one of the linked projects is not found an error message will be displayed and the reconform will stop If there is no audio between the source In and Out times for an event an error message will be displayed but the reconform will continue with the following events Additional Facilities Selecting a reel in the Reel Linking dialog also selects all of the EDL events associated with that reel Clicking the A button in the Sort group causes the EDL events to be sorted according to the EDL event numbers Clicking the C button in the Sort group causes the EDL events to be sorted according to source reel Fairlight QUANTUM Page 339 SYNC AND MACHINE CONTROL November 13 2014 Sync and Machine Control Introduction QUANTUM can communicate with industry standard Sony 9 pin serial controlled machines with a timecode reader installed providing control over external video or audio machines directly from the QUANTUM QUANTUM can control up to three machines M1 M2 and M3 Of these two can be physical VTRs and the third can be Linear Timecode or MIDI Timecode Setting up Machines To choose a machine type for M1 M2 or M3 Step 1
18. In the example shown above all the clips contain the letters bi Having chosen your clip press the Go To button again or ENTER to locate to the clip s start Layer Start Time ra Hm H Hekke j End Time 01 05 14 06 01 05 14 19 01 06 14 08 01 06 14 21 OL07 14 09 01 07 14 22 01 08 14 11 01 08 14 25 01 09 14 12 01 09 15 01 01 10 14 14 01 10 15 02 01 11 14 15 01 11 15 04 O1 14 14 16 01 12 15 05 00 52 09 06 00 52 09 10 00 52 10 00 00 52 10 12 00 52 12 10 00 52 13 10 00 52 13 20 00 52 14 16 00 53 09 07 00 53 09 11 00 53 10 01 00 53 10 15 00253212211 00 53 13 11 00 53 13 22 00 53 14 18 00 54 09 09 00 54 09 15 00 54 10 02 00 54 10 14 00 54 12 15 00 54 13 15 00 54 13 25 00254 14 19 Only Offline Clips Duration 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 04 00 00 00 12 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 20 00 00 00 04 00 00 00 12 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 20 00 00 00 04 00 00 00 12 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 20 fa ha Ra ha fa fo ho ha 00000000_00000000_656908E4_7F3465339 00000000_00000000_656908E4_7F345339 00000000_00000000_656908E4_7F345339 00000000_00000000_656908E4_7F345339 00000000_00000000_656908E4_7F345339 00000000_00000000_656908E4_7F345339 00000000_00000000_656908E4_7F345339 00000000_00000000_656908E4_7F345339 00000000_00000000_656908E4_7F35633E 00000000_00000000_656908E4_7F35633F 00000000_00000000_656908E4_7F356340 00000000_
19. MPJEG e Uncompressed Fairlight QUANTUM Page 301 Pyxis TRACK November 13 2014 e Huffman Lossless For Standard Definition systems DV25 is the recommended setting For High Definition systems Huffmann Lossless is a good reliable option Invoke Video Capture Mode Unlike an audio recorder digital video capturing equipment must be in a specific Video Capture Mode in order to record an incoming signal In Post V5 0 you can invoke this mode by navigating to Setup gt Video Capture Mode General Preferences Locked Playhead Bars and Beats Setup Media and Project Management Instruments Flip Decklink Field Order With Video Capture Mode ON your decklink card will act as a loopthough device and will display the incoming video signal This is in contrast to its normal mode where the Decklink card displays whatever video is already on the Pyxis track 00 00 00 00 Length 00 00 00 00 B a a har a a With Video Capture Mode ON you may ARM the Pyxis track and record the incoming video signal in the same way as you would record audio Encryption Video files can be encrypted as they are recorded This will prevent anyone from seeing the video without applying the password If you wish to capture to an encrypted format do the following Step 1 Open the dialog box at Setup System Preferences Video Capture Step 2 Enter an encryption password in the lower part of the page Confirm b
20. MSAT Shortly after starting it if FMC is running you ll see an error message about incompatible file versions which can be ignored x X Version Error FMC and MSAT have incompatible UICtriviewDefs Close MSAT and restart a compatible version Now start FMC using Start gt All Programs Fairlight gt FMC FMC Early in the boot process FMC will report on the MIDI devices When you see it click the red Stop button in the upper left of the MSAT screen to freeze the display It will look something like this Comms is ONLINE GDB 09 42 59 gt Physical Memory Available 705492K GDB 09 42 59 gt Mix Memory allocated 39062K GDB 09 42 59 gt FMC is ONLINE GDB 09 42 59 gt FMC re sync GDB 09 43 00 gt Disabling Ul Completed GDB 09 43 00 gt FaderCount 8 GDB 09 43 00 gt Midi IN 0 of 4 name USB Audio Device GDB 09 43 00 gt MIDI in device 0 GDB 09 43 00 gt manufacturer 65535 GDB 09 43 00 gt product 65535 GDB 09 43 00 gt version 1 1 GDB 09 43 00 gt name USB Audio Device GDB 09 43 00 gt Midi IN 1 of 4 name USB Audio Device 2 GDB 09 43 00 gt MIDI in device 1 GDB 09 43 00 gt manufacturer 65535 GDB 09 43 00 gt product 65535 GDB 09 43 00 gt version 1 1 GDB 09 43 00 gt name USB Audio Device 2 GDB 09 43 00 gt Midi IN 2 of 4 name USB Audio Device 3 GDB 09 43 00 gt MIDI in device 2 GDB 09 43 00 gt manufacturer 65535 GDB 09 43 00
21. Mute Arm Soloing muting or arming a succession of channels can be done quickly as follows Step 1 Click on the arm mute or solo button of the first channel Step 2 Drag the mouse to the right or left to toggle the other channels You do not need to do this accurately as the horizontal position is the only criterion for choosing Fairlight QUANTUM Page 201 MIXING November 13 2014 Bus Meters CR hon The Bus Meter section shows all buses with non zero format see Bus Format on page 190 to learn about changing this As you add buses to your project the meters become thinner to accommodate them Fairlight QUANTUM Page 202 Plug ins ____ gt FRR Single click bypasses plug Double click opens screen GUI Right click opens plug in Config window Insert Single click toggles insert Aux Sends Double click opens Aux Zoom page Dynamics n p Double click opens Dyn Zoom page Bus Assign Single click on Main or any Sub bus to toggle assignment Solo Single click toggles solo _ Channel Name Single click to select as current Double click opens Virtual Channel Channel System Name Shows the number of the track live bus or group Link group numbering is shown Fairlight QUANTUM MIXING Page 203 November 13 2014 Input Double click opens Patch I O EQ Single click toggles EQ in out Double click opens EQ Zoom page Pan Single click toggles Pan on off Double click opens Pan Zoo
22. Overview Every signal path in the QUANTUM system originates or terminates in the Patching system This is shown in the system flow diagram on page 4 Connecting any signal path to another is done in the Patch I O page which is the subject of this chapter Note there is one exception to this statement assigning to Buses For Tracks and Live Feeds this Is done in the Bus Assignment screen see page 194 For Talkback destinations it is done in the Talkback setup mode see page 285 The Patch I O Page To display the Patch I O Page e Hold down Mode and press the Patch button It is also available in the Mixer Megamode e Click Mixer gt Patching e Click the Patch icon on the Solo Toolbar Patch Icon Here the mouse is used to select sources and destinations then patch them together Note you can patch one source to many destinations but not vice versa Sources are shown on the left of the screen while Destinations are shown at the right Fairlight QUANTUM Page 55 PATCHING SIGNAL PATHS November 13 2014 Track 13 Track 14 Track 15 Track 16 Track 17 Track 18 Sources Destinations Track 31 Track 32 Track 35 Track 36 Track 37 Track 38 Track 39 Track 40 Track 41 Track 42 Comman d Buttons Track Track Track Live Live Aux Bus View Track Track Live Live Aux Bus Sub Bus Repro Send Direct Send Direct Send User Input Return Input Return Return Return Aux Bus Aux Bus Sub Bus Sub Bus Sub Bus CR Mon View Main CR Mon Talk An
23. Step 1 Hold down the Zoom button Step 2 Press the or key The Mouse wheel can also be used to zoom the display click on the Edit Screen first to put it in focus Float the mouse over the track display while turning the wheel Track display selection and zooming is possible whilst playing and recording Fairlight QUANTUM Page 44 CHANNELS November 13 2014 Timescale display Timecode positions can be displayed in whole frames frames with subframes frames with subframes and samples feet and frames in either film format or Bars and Beats For all timescale choices select View Timescale and choose one of the options View Display Layering Smart Pane i Pyxis Mix Panel Show Pyxis Track Multi Video Monitor Playback Video Source Edit Workspace Marks Sort Yideo Locators Tracks Clip Search Displayed Clip Information Orphaned Media Timescale mj Hours Min Sec Frame Background Tasks Hours MinfSec Frame SubFrame Performance Hours MinfSec Frame SubFrame Samples Statistics Feet Frames 35 mm Transport Window Feet Frames 16 mm Timecode Display Hours Feet Frames 35 mm Hours Feet Frames 16 mm Bars and Beats Bar Beat display Positions can be displayed in bars and beats To enable this use the Edit Screen menus and click view gt Timescale Bars and Beats The Edit Screen shows dark bar lines and light beat lines To set up parameters go to Setup Bars and Be
24. Step 2 Hold down Mode and press Insert Config Step 3 If there is more than one plug in and you need to select the right one press the Next Plugin Fairlight QUANTUM Page 268 PLUG INS REWIRE AND EXTERNAL PROCESSING November 13 2014 button until the desired plug in is shown on the screen Step4 Press the Remove Plugin soft key The LCD screen between the soft keys will now display the first of a list of plug ins that you have installed Selecting Plug ins For a channel with a single plug in Step 1 Select the channel Step 2 Press Pad if necessary to display the Pad Step 3 Press Plug ins if necessary to display the Pad This will cause the plug in GUI to become visible on the screen lf the channel has multiple plug ins press the Next Plugin button until the desired plug is selected then delete it as described above Controlling Plug ins on Screen Each Plug in comes with a graphical user interface GUI designed by its manufacturer To display the GUI do one of the following e Press the Plug ins button in the Mixer Megamode This will display the current plug in for the current channel e Double click a Plug in in the QUANTUM Mixer Screen Channel Double click to display Click an indvidual plug in once to bypass it Click to bypass all plug ins Fairlight QUANTUM Page 269 PLUG INS REWIRE AND EXTERNAL PROCESSING November 13 2014 Plug in GUI controls Each plug in GUI is contained in a window in
25. To import one use Windows Explorer or My Computer to locate the file then drag and drop it on to the Post V5 0 Edit Screen The file will be placed at the cursor position or in the range on the track where you drag it unless you use the options below Found at Setup General Preferences Options Place Files at Embedded Timecode Place Files on Embedded Track Bway MxF i Bway Mpeg Quicktime Place Files at Embedded Timecode Some audio files carry a timecode with them Checking this option for a particular file type causes it to be placed at that timecode no matter where you drag it with the mouse Fairlight QUANTUM Page 330 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT November 13 2014 Place Files on Embedded Track Some audio files carry a track number with them Checking this option for a particular file type causes it to be placed on that track no matter where you drag it with the mouse Importing Multiple Sound Files If you select multiple files in the Windows Explorer or My Computer dialog you can drag and drop them all to the timeline By default the files will be placed head to tail along the track where you drag them If you hold down the ctri key while dragging the files they will be placed on successive tracks at the same timecode point Individual Localisation Individual clips can be localised as follows Step 1 Select a range of clips on one or more tracks step 2 Hold down the BLUE key and press EN
26. Used for Fairlight Mic preamps Recording Section Available only when a track is the current channel Arm means ready to record press this button only if there is an audio source patched to the current track Thru means the track will monitor its input but will not respond to a record command The Thru state makes the track equivalent to a Live Feed Press the Thru button only if there is an audio source patched to the current track Rec Level controls the level going to the Disk before recording It does not affect the track when in Thru mode Trim controls the level as the channel enters the mixer For tracks this is after coming back from Disk and does not affect level being recorded Phase flips the audio phase at the input to the mixer It does not affect the signal being recorded on a track Direct Send and Insert Virtual Channel Direct In toggles the Direct Output on and off Pre toggles the Direct Output pre and post the main channel fader Level controls the level going from the channel to the Direct Output Note Direct outputs are only heard if patched to a physical output or to the input of another path This is done in the Patch I O screen press the Patch I O button Insert In controls the Insert Return only When In the channel listens to its Insert Return otherwise the Channel listens to the straight through path The Insert Send on the other hand is always active though it must be patched somewhere be
27. Varying X level changes the loudness at the Crossover shown for clarity in a crossfade this controls the percentage of the fade s duration when it reaches the Crossover Point First clip Second clip Second clip Second clip TY Varying X point moves the Crossover earlier or later in the fade shown for clarity in a crossfade the total length of the fade in frames Duration is not really part of the shape but its control is close by Example Percentage 30 Attenuation 3 dB Duration 20 Fairlight QUANTUM Page 96 EDITING November 13 2014 This means that the fade will last for 20 frames The crossover point will be 6 frames into the fade at which time the level will be 3 dB compared with full Level Setting Fade Curve Parameters Click in the x Level or X Point field in the Smart Pane Use the Jog Wheel or Numeric Keypad to set values Press Enter to accept those values or Fade Hade Fade Tail to create a new fade using those values You can also use the Mouse click on the red dot in the Fade Curve and drag it up down to change X Level or left right to change X Point Drag red point to change X Level and X point 0070070 1 00 Quick Fade To create a Fade and set its curve quickly do the following Locate to the point where you want your Fade In to end Hold down Fade Head Turn the Jog wheel until the Curve in the Smart Pane looks right Release Fade Head This method is not pre
28. and can be displayed at any time by clicking View Smart Pane Clip FX After a plug in has been rendered into a clip it appears in the Clip FX display when that clip is current Effect FLOORFISH BLOCKFISH The Clip FX Smart Pane can be used as follows Active Determines whether the associated plug in will be used in the next render Add Click to add a plug in to the current clip The Plug in List is displayed allowing you to browse and select plug ins Remove Removes the currently selected plug in from the Clip FX list Click Apply to render the clip again without that plug in Edit Opens the currently selected plug in from the Clip FX list You can edit the values using Preview as described above to hear the changes then click Apply to render the changes back into the clip Apply Renders the clip again You can choose whether each plug in is active before doing so Copy Allows you to copy the plug in s from the current clip then Apply render them into another clip To select more than one clip from the list hold down SHIFT and click on more plug ins Save Saves the current list item as a preset allowing you to recall and apply it at any time Type the name into the drop down list before clicking Save Load Loads the currently viewable preset into the current clip From there you can Preview it make changes then click Apply to render it Using VST Instruments in QUANTUM While Post V5 0 does not include a MIDI sequen
29. selecting channels assigns them to faders automatically If BLUE 5 is pressed again Mixer Set goes into hibernation meaning it no longer changes when channels are selected Mixer Set is exited completely when another fader set is selected Lock is not implemented in this version of software Fairlight QUANTUM Page 227 MIXING November 13 2014 Fader Sets A fader set is a group of channels mapped to the faders The system offers up to 12 fader sets each including as many channels as there are faders on the system Selecting Fader Sets To select a fader set Step 1 Press a Fader Set button 1 to 6 on the left side of the Fader Panel Step 2 Press or hold down the Bank button to access Fader Sets 7 to 12 You can also select Fader Sets on the QUANTUM Center Section Step 1 Hold down the Bank button Step 2 Press an F Set button from 1 to 11 Step 3 Release the Bank button Alternatively Step 1 Select the Mixer Megamode by holding down Mode and pressing Mixer Step 2 Hold down the Fader Set button Step 3 Press an F Set button from 1 to 11 Step 3 Release the Fader Set button The same thing can be done in latched mode Shortcut BLUE F Set Up or F Set Down Holding Faders To temporarily retain a selection of channels in their current fader positions when recalling a new fader set simply touch and hold the faders while pressing a fader set key The existing channels will temporari
30. 00246221 14 O02 SF 4 C Al BL O0 00 00 00 OO 00 00 0 E 4 D Al 2 SCP 33 00 14 56 12 00 16 55 7 E a E A 34 CLOSE 00 47 2k 12 OO 34687265 1 E 6 C Al S3EP33 00 16 55 23 00 16 55 UR 7 Al SP oo 00 1675522 00 16 55 22 Em Step 6 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT November 13 2014 following tracks to place audio for events requiring more tracks Click the Capture button The EDL Capture and Conform will now go ahead The software will request the first source reel to be loaded on to the source machine x P j Please load reel ANIMAL_L Is this reel loaded It will then capture all the audio needed from that reel optimizing to reduce the amount of shuttle time The software will then request the next reel and continue in this vein until the conform is complete Events that cannot be recorded are marked E Error Reasons for this can include Bad timecode causing lost sync before the end of a recording Tape machine not locating to the pre roll point The software will continue after errors of this type and complete as much of the conform as it can Reconform Reconform uses an existing project or more than one project as the source audio for a Conform There is no Capture process as the audio is already present on hard disk but otherwise the process is very similar to Conform Each reel in the EDL may be mapped to a different audio project Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Set up Track Mapping as for Capture
31. 12 tracks depending on circumstances Press a Track button to toggle it in and out of the Track Selection Use Bank to access blocks of tracks To select just one track double press its button To select a range of Tracks hold one Track button down and double press another Fairlight QUANTUM Page 94 EDITING November 13 2014 To slide the current track selection up and down hold the Track Up Down button and turn the Jog Wheel To move the current track selection to a specific starting track hold the Track Up Down button and type a number on the Numpad then release Track Up Down Nudge Clip Level Track Up Down Fade and Crossfade Overview In the fade menu we can place level ramps at the begining fade in and end fade out of each clip A fade in starts from silence and ends at the full level of the clip and a fade out does the opposite Crossfades between two clips are created by first layering one clip on top of another then putting a fade in the upper clip This induces a complementary fade in the lower clip For clarity while reading this Help item turn on Display Layering by clicking view Display Layering above the Edit Screen We can also control the fade profile i e its shape using the X Level and X Point parameters Get Ready Hold down Mode and press the green Edit Basic Megamode buiton Operation Press the fade button Locate the transport so that the cursor crosses the middle of at
32. 24 of them and their format is either mono or off This guide shows you how to set formats for your buses Note The total number of bus elements is finite Setting Bus Format Use the Bus Format Dialog to set all Bus Formats including Bus Reduction as explained below The Bus Format Dialog To display the Bus Format Dialog press Mode gt Bus Format Alternatively click Mixer Bus Format in the menus above the Edit Screen User Name Format Main Stereo Sub 1 Mono Sub 2 Mono Sub 3 Mona Sub 4 Mono Aux 1 Mono Aux 2 Mona Aux 3 Stereo Aux 4 Stereo ee Add ieee l Fairlight QUANTUM Page 190 MIXING November 13 2014 The Bus Format dialog lists only buses with non zero format i e buses in use You can add a Sub Bus or Aux bus by clicking in the Add group or by selecting an existing bus and clicking Duplicate this will create a new bus with the same format Format is set using a dropbox in the Format column the Width column is a read only indicator of how many elements are used by each bus Clicking in the Reduce column checkboxes will toggle a Sub Bus into and out of Reduction Mode as explained below Click the Bus Assign button to open the Bus Assign dialog Bus Reduction Bus Reduction is used when you need to mix to more than one format simultaneously Every channel that goes to the Main Bus can also be assigned manually or automatically to the Sub Bus that will be used for Reduction for
33. 3D footage NOTE BMD 7 8 drivers rc27 or later required Capturing importing and editing the second video track is done the same way as for the first see sections below To select one or both video tracks for these activities use the mouse to click the V1 or V2 button at the left of the tracks Startup with Dual Tracks To use the second video track the system must be started with the 3D option To do this edit the shortcut used to start the system lf you are using a desktop icon to start the system add the phrase 3D to the target field it will then look something like this C Program Files Fairlight Dream II Dream II exe 3D If you are using the QUANTUM X button to start the system you need to edit the file C Program Files Fairlight QUANTUM Layouts Dream II layout txt The first line should become APPLICATION app Fairlight Dream II Dream Il exe 3D If you are using a Decklink card you will also need to add the PRO2 to the startup string Hiding and Showing the Video Track To hide or show the video track on the Edit Screen Hold down Bank and press Pyxis Track Alternatively use the menu commands View gt Show Pyxis Track Show and View gt Show Pyxis Track Hide Fairlight QUANTUM Page 295 Pyxis TRACK November 13 2014 When shown the Video Track appears at the top of the track display It is not counted when choosing how many tracks to display There are two options for its appearanc
34. 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Open the Patch I O page this is covered in the Chapter called Patching Signal Paths Select Sub Bus Out at the lower left of the screen All the Sub Bus elements will be displayed in the upper left of the screen Select all the elements of Sub Bus 1 Select the right number of tracks in the upper right of the screen Click the Patch button Make sure the patched track are NOT assigned to Sub Bus 1 or you will hear feedback when monitoring the tracks Start playing your mix just before the beginning and put the transport into record before the sound starts Offline Rendering For machines equipped with CC 2 processing cards offline render provides a faster way of printing mixes The offline rendering process runs as fast as the speed of the host computer and hard disks allow which is often faster than real time To perform an offline render Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Make a range including all the audio you want to mix Click Prcess Render Mix to Track Choose the track where the render should start The render will use this track plus the following tracks as needed Fairlight QUANTUM Page 262 AUTOMATION November 13 2014 Bus User Name Format Main Main Stereo Sub 1 DIA BUS Stereo Sub 2 VO BUS Stereo Sub 3 MX BUS Stereo Sub 4 FX BUS Stereo Sub 5 Mix Minus Stereo Sub 6 Phone Mono Sub 7 REC 1 Stereo Sub amp REC 2 Stereo Aux 1 Aux 1 Stereo Aux 2 Aux 2 Step 4 Choose the bus you wan
35. A Quickt Uncompressed WDV25 MI Dec Click here to browse for the Walliieaaiit file you want 2 1 lossless Huff _ to import y The following file types can be imported using this method e Quicktime mov e Avi avi e Windows media format wmv e Mped 4 files mp4 e Mpeg 1 or 2 mpg m2v mvf e dv25 dv or dif e Bitmap omp or Cineon cin sequence of images in sequentially numbered files 1 frame per file e Final Cut Pro XML project note that nested sequences are not imported e jpeg also any Post V5 0 native files which are e uncompressed vmu Fairlight QUANTUM Page 298 PYxis TRACK November 13 2014 e dv25 dif e mjpeg vmj e lossless Huffman compression vmh Import by Drag and Drop A quick way to import video files is to use Drag and Drop as follows Step 1 Make sure that a Pyxis track is displayed If not see above Step 2 Open Windows Explorer or My Computer and find the video file you wish to import Step 3 Drag the video file from the Windows Explorer window and drop it on the video track in the QUANTUM Edit Screen The following file types can be imported using drag and drop e Quicktime mov any more than 2 accompanying audio tracks must be imported the system will prompt if this is necessary e Avi avi e Windows media format wmv e Mped 4 files mp4 e Mpeg 1 or 2 mpg m2v mvf e dv25 dv or dif e MXF
36. Add creates a blank format or Duplicate creates a copy of the selected format which you can edit In this case we select the factory 5 1 format and click Duplicate Fairlight QUANTUM Page 192 MIXING November 13 2014 Conese Cet TET Fairlight Setup Utility 100 0 50 Step 5 Double click the name of the new format which appears as 5 1 D for duplicate and edit it to read 5 1 SMPTE The SMPTE 5 1 format requires a different element order from the factory 5 1 format based on Dolby Step 6 Click on the Centre Element Fairlight QUANTUM Page 193 MIXING November 13 2014 Bus Elements Element Name LR FB Left L 100 100 Right R i 100 Centre C 0 100 Surround Left Ls 100 100 Surround Right Rs i o 100 Boom B 0 100 Step 7 Click the Down button until the Centre element is in the correct position below Right Step 8 In the same way move the Boom element to its correct position below Centre Step 9 Click Save When you restart the QUANTUM software the new Bus Format will appear in the Bus Format dialog Note The DU Down Up parameter cannot be altered unless you have purchased a 3D licence from Fairlight Bus Assign Overview Assigning a path to a bus means sending it to that mix destination Every path in the system has separate assignment to Main and each Sub Bus meaning that you can choose which paths go to which buses Bus to bus assignment is
37. Al 42000 00 03 01 17 00 03 26 09 00 02 52227 00 03 17 14 E 3 C A 34 j 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 03 17 14 00 03 17 14 C 3 D A 34 5 00 46 21 14 00 48 37 05 00 03 17 14 00 05 33 05 4 C Al BL 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 03 54 07 00 03 54 07 O 4 D Al 2 SoLP So 00 14 38 12 00 16 55 12 00 03 54 07 00 06 11 07 E 5 C A 34 CLOSE 0472k 12 00 48 26 11 00 05 33 05 00 06 35 04 C 6 C Al Sor 33 00 16 55 25 00 16 55 24 00 ave 11 07 00 06 11 08 MENE E Ai S3EP33 00 16 55 24 00 16 55 24 00 06 Tine 00 06 11 08 E Fi D A12 34000 18 28 13 17 18 28 16 17 00 06 00 06 14 08 C 5 C A CLOSE 00 48 26 11 O00 48 26 11 00 06 35 04 z 5 35 04 T E D A MAIN RE 19 00 51 10 19 00 54 10 00 06 35 04 38 MES E Al S3EP 12 O0 12 24 20 O00 12 44 15 00 06 35 2733 00 06 55 M 4 0 C Al SEP 00 13 13 22 00 13 54 02 00 06 55 18 00 07 35 11 T Ai2 S3EP 12 OO 13 54 02 O0 13 54 02 O0 07 35 23 o0 07 35 23 11 D Al 12 BL 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 12 00 07 35 23 00 07 36 10 E 12 E A 34 BL 00 00 00 00 O00 00 00 00 O0 07 35 23 O0 07 35 235 O 12 D A 34 i Soo 1 00 17 32 09 00 17 33 06 00 07 35 23 00 07 36 20 E 13 T A 34 S3EP 12 OO 17 33 06 O0 17 33 06 00 07 36 2720 00 07 36 20 Oo 15 D A 34 25 BL 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 07 36 20 00 07 37 20 E 14 c Ai2 S3EP 11 OO 07 30 20 O0 09 30 24 O00 08 35 24 00 10 36 03 O 15 C Al goer 11 00 09 30 24 00 09 30 24 00 10 36 03 00 10 36 03 0O 15 D Al2 12 34000 18 28 13 11 18 28 16 17 00 10 36 03 00 10 39 09 Events Sart Capture a
38. D Device Speed Fast e Normal Slow Click here for folder display Device Type Local C Networkishared Temp Format Guid To use a network connected device first create a mapped network drive or folder in Windows Explorer This can now be selected in the device panel and converted to a QUANTUM Media Device as above Please note that audio and video files can only be played from a designated Media Device If you try to play files from any other disk you will receive an error message Creating New Projects Once Media Devices have been set up on your QUANTUM system for Audio and Video you are ready to create a New Project To do this Press the Project key on your QUANTUM controller followed by the New softkey or select File gt New from the QUANTUM pulldown menu You will see the following dialog Fairlight QUANTUM Page 324 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT November 13 2014 D FairlightAU Projects New Project10 Will appear in title bar Choose a Project Type MT or DR2 By default your project is created in its own subfolder named with the Project Name This is the recommended practice as it helos keep your QUANTUM system organized If you prefer you can place your projects elsewhere as long as you select a designated Media Device If you enter a comment this text will appear in the Title Bar of the Edit screen whenever the project is loaded Give your project a name and
39. Dream II Docs First Startup Even if someone else has installed the system for you there are some things you need to do the first time you start the system The manual mentioned in the previous paragraph includes a chapter on this subject called Launching QUANTUM for the First Time Please read this before using QUANTUM or at least have it standing by in case things get confusing Momentary and Latching This is one of the keys to speed Many operations can be done two ways Momentary means Hold down a key to open a mode do one thing in that mode then let go the key to exit the mode and go back to where you were This is skilful because it requires two hands but it s fast Latching means Press a key to enter latch a mode do some things in that mode then press the Original key again to exit the mode This is not as fast but it s easier being one handed When we refer to momentary operation you ll see words like hold down and release When we refer to latched operation you ll see the word press or type which both mean press and release Fairlight QUANTUM Page 1 INTRODUCTION November 13 2014 Some Important Terms Throughout this manual we will use some terms that you need to understand Transport This refers to the movement of the system along the timeline For example when we put the transport into Play it means we cause forward movement along the timeline This applies to the disk audio tracks P
40. F My Computer Zz The Media folder looks like this The WAV files are named as follows Clip Name _ Track number _ GUID wav The Clip name is the automatic name given to the clip by the system Or you may have named the clip while recording it The Track number is the one on which the audio was first recorded The GUID is a system number discussed below GUIDs QUANTUM Broadcast WAV Files are named using GUIDs A GUID is a unique ID that makes it easy for the system to locate files in a database Since GUIDs are hard to read Fairlight has created the Fairlight Shell Extension for Windows Explorer The Fairlight Shell extension is installed by default and allows users to view hidden iXML metadata in the Fairlight Broadcast WAV Files The Project Name Fairlight QUANTUM Page 319 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT November 13 2014 Clip Name and Frame Rate are embedded in each WAV file by QUANTUM during recording and can be viewed with the Fairlight Shell Extension Using the Fairlight Windows Explorer Shell Extension 1 Open Windows Explorer 2 Under the View menu select Details 3 Right click a column header eg Name and select More from the popup 4 Scroll down to the bottom of the list and add the desired iXML columns eg Project you wish to view 5 Click Ok Localize Localizing audio means putting the files in the same folder as the Project file Any audio which is referenced out of other
41. Fairlight Dream II Undo C Program Files Fairlight Dream IT Unda 0 Mame Size Type Date Modified a UndoFile 00 2 IS KB 2 File 11403 2005 2 33 PM Only these two I UndoFile 00 1 pT Fite SECO SSS PPT files are from the E UndoFile_00 4 i3KB 4File 11 03 2008 2 31 PM most recent E UndoFile_00 3 i3KB 3File 11 03 2008 2 31 PM project Ej UndoFile 00 8 iSKB 6 File 11 03 2008 1 46 PM al Lindel On F ic re TE iOS nS 1 47 OM 4 d Disk Free space 14 1 GB 74 6 ME F My Computer F Step 2 Choose the undo file you want to open Rename this file so that it has an extension dr2 upper or lower case it doesn t matter Step 3 Move this file to a Media Device The simplest is to move it to the folder on your audio drive where the original project is stored Step 4 Open this file by issuing the File gt Open command or using the Project Menu open soft key Video Files QUANTUM supports drag and drop import of a variety of video file formats as well as direct video recording to the QUANTUM timeline For correct operation video files must be played from and recorded to a separate hard disk than the audio data WARNING If you attempt to play video and audio data from the same hard disk you will experience SEVERE performance problems The disk bandwidth required for video is governed by the type of video you wish to play back Some types of compressed Standard Definition video may play back from a single 10 000 RPM S
42. Fairlight QUANTUM Page 213 MIXING November 13 2014 Aux Sends Satellite AV provides 12 aux sends Each send from each channel has an independent Pre Post switch and In Out control Aux 2 send IN OUT Aux Sends Zoom Panels It is possible to see more detail when adjusting EQ Dynamics and Pan control using Zoom Panels In particular numeric values for all parameters are shown and update as they are changed To display a zoom panel do one of the following it will stay on the screen until removed e Double click a graph in the QUANTUM Mixer Screen screen Fairlight QUANTUM Page 214 MIXING November 13 2014 NAME Mixer Screen Double click e Right click the corresponding display in the FMC Fat Channel Main FMC Right ClidL e Double press the Path EQ Dyn Or Aux button in the XCS Panel e Double click a graph in the QUANTUM Mixer Screen screen To remove the current zoom panel from the screen do one of the following e Right click the Zoom Panel e Click the Close box in the upper right corner of the Zoom Panel e Double press the button from Path EQ Dyn or Aux whichever is being displayed in the XCS Panel Fairlight QUANTUM Page 215 MIXING November 13 2014 Automatic Zoom Panel Display Zoom Panels can also be displayed automatically whenever you touch controls around the QUANTUM Pad To enable automatic display Step 1 Select the Utils menu in the Setup Megamode S
43. Hold down Mode and press Setup M1 or click View Smart Pane Machine Control Step 2 The following Smart Pane is displayed Type aoe Name Online Servo Timecode Offset Capture Status Arm Y Analog Digital Asm inh Ref LTCAMTC ELS EF BB 00 00 00 00 i r 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Stopper LTC DE o 00 00 00 00 Online Gh Paw AA E video Arming Type comin Name Online Servo Timecode Offset Capture Status Arm AATA pdm PET TRA l ee OOS 49 19 0000 00000 Stopped OOS 49 13 00 00 00 00 MPIC Remote slg MMe Rem 0 0 F WY is Track Status Arm Y Analog Digital a5 TIME LIT E Stopped Online Online Asm inh Ref LTCMTC A 00 00 00 00 I LT Generator i In Stop i MTZ Generator I Wideo Armin J Step 3 Use the type soft key or Type list box to select one of the following machine types e TC Master the selected machine is the 9 Pin timecode master e Chase slave the selected machine is in 9 Pin chase mode e Remote slave QUANTUM will respond to 9 Pin remote commands like a virtual VTR e LTC Master the selected machine is set to chase external Longitudinal Time Code e MTC Master the selected machine is set to chase external MIDI Time Code e MMC Remote Slave when this is selected QUANTUM responds to MIDI Machine Control commands Fairlight QUANTUM Page 340 SYNC AND MACHINE CONTROL November 13 2014 e MMC Remote Master when this is s
44. Page 285 METERS November 13 2014 Meters Introduction Signal level metering is available in the various system video displays Master Screen Meters QUANTUM provides a set of eight Master Screen Meters To toggle them on and off e Use the Screen Meters button in the Mixer Megamode e Click on the Mixer screen and type ctrl SHIFT Space These meters can be dragged by their Title Bar to any point on the Edit Screen or Mixer Screen or to a third video monitor if your system has one installed Ya Fairlight Digital Peak and RMS Meters x Clear Max Clear Awg Main All A r T I E r E E mm mm mm ma y I r I a mm am Ea Meteraet Fairlight QUANTUM Page 286 METERS November 13 2014 x Choose Aux or Meter Set for 18 100 100 100 100 the 12 buttons above 100 F 0 100 100 100 Al te a Shows maximum value since meters opened Shows average value since meters opened 10 10 10 Selection of metering source for the Master Screen Meters e With Aux selected click Main Sub Buses B1 B2 and Aux buses Al A2 to toggle them on or off the meters You can add any number of buses and the system will display meters for up to eight Bus elements starting at the top of the selected buses e With Meter Set selected select one Meter Set or a number of Main and Sub buses Meter Sets cannot be added to other sets or buses Fa
45. Plugin builder DR2 XXXXX xxx File D FairlightAU Projects Plugin builder DR2 NjA D FairlightAU Projects Media SoftwareException DR2 Dream II 10 D FairlightAU Projects BusTest New Project9 MT MT Project NA D Fairlight4U Projects BusTest Media Frank MixO1 very large MT MT MT Project N A D Fairlightau Projects BusTest Frank Mix04 D Fairlightau Projects BusTest Media Frank Mix0S D FairlightAU Projects PluginPhaseTest 8 Me Hubble Briefcase D FairlightAUProjects PluginPhaseTest48 Javanese Di Fairlinhtal iPrpiecteiPh ininRecTect4e Tj jlazy Days Ma Localise test gt Stop Scanning Reveal Folder List Media Discard Unused Media J view Backup Projects While this pane is open click on one of the devices shown above and its folders will be displayed Now you can select folders and click Stop scanning selected folders Clicking Reveal folder will open a Windows Explorer window showing the selected folder and its contents Double clicking a folder in the list of Scanned Folders will display its subfolders if any in the Subfolders window and the projects if any contained inside it in the Projects window Select a project in the right hand list then click List Media in Project to display a new window containing all media in the Media folder of the project Click Delete Project to remove the project from the hard disk You will be prompted to remove all the media in the Media folder D
46. Preview Menu Soft key in the Mix Menu All of the following commands require Preview to be on They will affect all signal paths in Preview status on all enabled parameters Fill Range A range must be present Pressing this soft key causes all previewing parameters to write their current values into the range This is very useful for working with scenes or sections with different sound requirements Glide Range A range must be on This command takes the data at the beginning of the range and glides smoothly to the current control value fader or pot by the end of the range Preview Trim This command can raise or lower fader levels within a range by a constant amount lt can only be used with physical faders It requires Preview to be on and a range to be present To use Preview Trim step 1 Ensure Mix is On Preview is On and a range is present Step 2 Enable fader level automation and put the channels to be trimmed into Preview using the faders Auto buttons Step 3 Enter the Mix Menu and press Preview Menu Step 4 Press the Preview Trim soft key The faders of the selected channels will snap to 10 GB Step 5 Move the faders playing if desired to establish the amount of trim you want Step 6 Press the Commit P Trim soft key To escape with no change press the Cancel P Trim soft key Live Preview This is a quick way of getting signal paths in and out of Preview status When Preview is toggled ON and this Live Pr
47. Room Monitors In the Solo theme Control Room and controls are available in the upper right corner of the screen Mute Dim S O deve Fairlight QUANTUM Page 280 MONITORING AND TALKBACK November 13 2014 Control Room level can also be controlled by pressing or holding the Mon button and turning the Jog Wheel The Monitor Megamode The Monitor Megamode is used to control all aspects of monitoring To access it press or hold Mon Bus Monitor Sources T p rm m j m ppe jj ET SF vl Mus 4 Mus E Mus Pius Sub 1 i 2 A Eep Sub 3 IL Sub i Sub 5 IL _ eub 6 l Sub 7 a Rm 3 Dial 2 INTER J z Studio OFF Fixed 50 no p a i i Main FD Mix Minus FD Music FD P BG SyncFQ Interviews YO Archie Mus SF FD SF FD 4 AL JE JE JE J Es JE JE Ji L l i External Monitor Sources Monitor ren ath xt Ext Ext10 Ext11 Setup Modes Source Stereo Comp Mono Comp Speaker Speaker Mute and Mutes Sets Dim Levels Control Room and Studio levels are controlled on encoders at the left side of the Pad Fairlight QUANTUM Page 281 MONITORING AND TALKBACK November 13 2014 Mute and Dim Mute and Dim buttons are available on switches in the Monitor Megamode To set the amount of Dim turn the upper right Encoder The Dim amount changes and you can hear the result Monitor Sources The monitor system can play the audio from any system bus or from a selection of
48. Sends Returns toggle so that the word Sends lights up For insert returns do the opposite Step 4 To set up the physical I O for a send or return press the Patch soft key Operation is the same as other patching see Patching Signal Paths page 55 Note that Insert Sends and Returns may be patched to other channels within the NAME system not only sent to physical outputs Plug ins are described in detail in the Chapter Plugins and Rewire page 262 Direct Outputs Overview Most channels particularly Tracks and Live Feeds are assigned to buses where they are mixed with other channels A Direct Output is an additional feed of a channel signal path that can be patched anywhere you like in addition to its normal output to buses The Direct Output can be sent pre or post fader and may have its own independent level offset and mute Direct Output levels are controlled in the Path display Setting the Destination The Direct outputs in any channel are available in the general patching system Patching is covered in detail in Patching Signal Paths page 55 The following describes a quicker way of patching a specific channel s Direct Output Step 1 Hold down the Mode button and press the Direct Config button Step 2 Select the path whose Direct output you wish to configure Step 4 Press the Patch soft key Operation is the same as other patching except that the Direct Output of the path you selected is already active
49. Step 1 Use the command gt The system displays the following dialog Track s Ripple All Clips File Name Clip Name naon J ox cores Step2 Choose the track where you want the clip to be placed Fairlight QUANTUM Page 38 CHANNELS November 13 2014 Step3 Choose the audio file that will be played by the clip You may type in the name of the file if you know it including its full path Alternatively click the Browse button labeled and find the file in your disk storage Step4 Choose a name for the clip Step5 You may audition the clip at any stage to confirm that you have the right audio Step 6 Click OK to create the clip It will be placed at the current timecode position on the track that you chose Clip Display Information You can choose which information is displayed in clips using the command view Displayed Clip Information The system displays a dialog like this Select information you would like displayed on clips Bit rate Frame Rate Sample Rate I Video Resolution Gain Gain Icon offset Codec Source Channel F Not local media icon Note that Frame Rate Video Size and Codec are only shown on Video clips see the chapter Pyxis Track on page 294 for details about video Choosing Clip Colours To explicitly choose clip colours do the following Step 1 Select tracks containing the clips you want to colour Step 2 Move the transport so the c
50. Stop Command Allows the option of keeping the VTR tape on the heads when the machine stops This will allow it to start playing much quicker but it does increase head wear Head Protect Specifies a time after which the tape is removed from the heads automatically to prevent wear Play Tracking Determines how many incorrect frames the system must see before it jumps to be in sync with the incoming timecode or stops if no timecode is coming in This allows the system to keep playing over timecode that has gaps Record Tracking As with Play Tracking but recording uses a different number This is because recording sometimes needs to be more tolerant Note that if timecode sync is lost during recording then re established the transport will go back into Play but not into Record Run Lock If the Play Run Lock checkbox is ticked the system will continue to play after first achieving lock to timecode no matter what the timecode does The lower Run Lock checkbox provides the same option when recording Locate Method Cue Only Lace Window 00 00 29 29 Tracking Algorithm jog Power Tracking Algorithm play chase Power 12 5 As for TC Master but there is an individual choice of tracking algorithm for Play and Jog Remote Slave Mode When a machine M1 or M2 with this setting is placed on line it means that QUANTUM emulates a 9 pin machine and will obey commands sent to it It is the master f
51. To use Path Copy Step 1 Hold down the Mode button Step 2 Press the Path Copy button Step 3 Select the source path Step 4 Press the copy soft key Step 5 Select the destination path Press one of the Paste soft keys Inserts Overview There are two types of inserts available in the NAME software The first is a physical insert where a signal exits a channel undergoes some external treatment then comes back into the same channel The second is a Plug in where the same thing happens but using software running within the original channel Toggling Inserts Both types of inserts can be switched on and off as follows Touch the encoder for the Insert button in the Pad second page of the Path display Use the mouse to click on the Insert button in the EVO Mixer screen Use the Insert Config menu which has an Insert toggle button see below Fairlight QUANTUM Page 221 MIXING November 13 2014 It is available by holding down Mode and pressing Insert Config Setting Physical Inputs and Outputs for Inserts The Insert points in any channel are available in the general patching system Patching is covered in detail in Patching Signal Paths page 55 The following describes a quicker way of patching a specific channel s Insert Send and Return Step 1 Hold down the Mode button and press the Insert Config button Step 2 Select the path whose inserts you wish to configure Step 3 To work on insert sends press the
52. Track to set loop start and end points and Starts looping around that Range Takes the current edit range which you have previously set using the From and To buttons and loops around it Note you can set the range while the Loop Menu is active Last Record Uses the start and end of the last transport recording to set the loop start and end points and loops around it Note The system Preroll and Postroll are used for all automatic recording functions including automation recording In the case of looping their use is optional controlled by the Use Rolls soft key Shortcuts The following shortcuts allow you to issue Loop commands without visiting the Edit Loop menu Hold down the BLUE key and press the Loop Range button that appears The transport will preroll and postroll the range if there is one otherwise nothing will happen Hold down the BLUE key and press the Loop Clip button that appears The transport will preroll and postroll the next clip on the currently selected track if there is one otherwise nothing will happen To stop looping press any other transport button Fairlight QUANTUM Page 62 TRANSPORT November 13 2014 With the Mouse Click the Loop icon in the toolbar to start looping the current range Changing the range points while looping does not change the loop special Transport Commands Holding down the BLUE key creates more transport options BLUE Record Key causes the range to be recorded
53. as a video tape recorder timecode striped audio tape or a timecode generator The disk recorder will play in time with the Master Timecode source so that sound and picture coincide Position This is an absolute location reference to a sequence of pictures or audio It is used to determine whether the disk recorder is playing the right part of its Project For video position reference is usually provided by 9 pin Sony protocol from an RS 422 port For audio tapes LTC is normally used though 9 pin is also a possibility Motion The motion of an external machine is a measure of its speed and the disk recorder must move at the same speed to remain in sync This translates into producing the correct number of samples every second which is called the Master Clock rate This can be locked to a Digital Word Clock a video signal an AES EBU signal by the internal crystal a timecode source or a digital audio source which is being recorded lf the Position Reference and Motion References are not the same it is possible that they will drift apart over time This will be shown by a warning at the top of QUANTUM s video screen which indicates when an inconsistent timecode frame was encountered How QUANTUM Synchronises QUANTUM goes through a number of steps in achieving synchronization in play mode 1 Read the position reference and start loading up the corresponding audio on all active tracks 2 When ready start playing but with the outp
54. at the cursor which is now shorter The effect is just like erasing the head of the clip Its sync remains as before but it starts at a later time and a later point in the audio Step 6 Jog backward a few frames and press ENTER Now the head is moved earlier revealing more of the audio You can keep jogging and pressing ENTER as long as you like until you are satisfied with the position of the head Two Handed Trimming This is a more powerful method which is worth learning Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Select a track and move a clip under the cursor Press the Trim key if not already on Press the Head key and hold it down the head is extended to show the full extent of the Original recording Jog or play the transport you can listen to the audio and choose the right position Release the Head key the head is placed at your current position Limit to Trim When extending a clip the end of the recorded audio will be reached eventually After that it is not possible to extend the clip further Tail Same as Head but the later part of the clip is trimmed Clip Trim clip changes both ends of the clip at once Its purpose is to preserve the length of the clip but access an earlier part of the recorded audio Not commonly used Range Ranges cannot be used with Trim Multiple Tracks Works as expected All the red clips will be trimmed to the same timecode point Trim Sync Soft Ke
55. can alter its sample rates far enough to accommodate the small soeed change caused by going from 30 to 29 97 frames per second and back again In other words if you slow down the frame rate from 30 to 29 97 QUANTUM can slow its internal sample rate to match This is called Pull up or Pull down depending in which direction you are taking the speed When you choose a frame rate you are telling QUANTUM what frame rate to expect To put it more accurately you are telling it the frame rate at which the chosen sample rate will be accurately reproduced For example if you tell QUANTUM that the NTSC frame rate is 30 in the Setup Menu and the sample rate is 44 100 it will pull down the sample rate to 44 056 if you feed in timecode at 29 97 If however you change the NTSC field to 29 97 QUANTUM will play at 44 100 at 29 97 frames per second and will pull up to a sample rate of 44 144 when timecode runs at 30 frames per second It is advisable to choose a sample rate at which you want to make the final transfer of the Project Then record your material at whichever frame rate is going to be used during that final transfer The importance of this choice is that you do not want to compromise the quality of your final product by using sample rate conversion at the moment it leaves QUANTUM for the last time You should make these choices at the very beginning of the Project and then you may use any other combination that suits your purposes temporaril
56. chosen e Use the Jogger Wheel make sure the transport is not in Jog mode at that time e Use the and buttons in the Numeric Keypad e The Frequency and Gain values can directly be chosen and changed with the mouse by dragging the red dots in the graph area e While you are changing parameter values with the encoders the actual sound is updated after a short delay e There is no limit to the frequency Range for each band so you can have your low frequency higher than your high frequency if you want e When you are using a Range it is possible to change one or more bands for the entire Range while leaving other bands as they were So for example the clips might have different settings for LOW EQ but the same setting for HIGH EQ Applying the Changes To apply your changes click the Apply button or press Enter Only the bands whose Enable checkboxes are selected will be applied To escape without applying your changes press the edit soft key to deselect it New or Old Whilst adjusting an EQ parameter it is possible to toggle between the new and old settings using the NEw OLD soft key or clicking the New Old radio buttons until you apply the changes In or Out Toggle the EQ on and off with the rn out soft key or the In Out radio buttons Copying an EQ The EQ parameters of a clip can be copied to another clip or Range of clips Step 1 Press the clip EQ button Fairlight QUANTUM Page 126 EDITING Novembe
57. double clicking with the mouse on a mark locates you there without closing the dialog This can be very useful Go To Clip A Clip is a piece of audio Clips are created by recording and editing They all have names Go To Clip allows you to display a list of clips in the project then choose one and locate to it Like this Step 1 Press the Go To button Step 2 Press the clip soft key Step 3 The Clip Search dialog appears on the Edit Screen Fairlight QUANTUM Page 68 TRANSPORT November 13 2014 Track 10 32 Bicycle aif ne 10 32 Bicyde aif ne 10 32 Bicyde aif ne 10 32 Bicyde aif ne 10 32 Bicyde aif ne 10 32 Bicycle aif ne 10 32 Bicyde aif ne 10 32 Bicycle aif ne 10 32 Bicyde aif ne 25 Bird Pigeon Flapp 47 Bicyde_10 Speer 10 32 Bicyde aif ne 10 32 Bicycle aif ne 25 Bird Pigeon Flapp 47 Bicycle_10 Speec 10 32 Bicyde aif ne 10 32 Bicycle aif ne 25 Bird Pigeon Flapp 47 Bicycle_10 Speer 10 32 Bicyde aif ne 4 bi Step 4 Track 12 Track 12 Track 12 Track 12 Track 12 Track 12 Track 12 Track 12 Track 13 Track 13 Track 13 Track 13 Track 13 Track 13 Track 13 Track 13 Track 13 Track 13 Track 13 Track 13 This dialog displays every clip in the project You can filter it reduce the number of clips displayed in a number of ways The most important is to type in all or part of a name into the Search box as shown above This will hide all clips except those with names containing what you typed
58. down and no signal passes from the channel to its send destination The Mute button always follows the fader See below how the fader can be reassigned to various functions in the channel in all cases the Mute button is reassigned to the same function Solo The Solo button has the general effect of isolating the soloed channel so it can be heard alone Fairlight QUANTUM Page 226 MIXING November 13 2014 Fader Button Usage Each button has two potential uses one unshifted and one with Blue pressed Holding down the Blue button triggers alternative functions in the other keys The BLUE button is equivalent to the BLUE buttons on NAME and on ILP Il Bank toggles the function of buttons 1 to 6 In its A state it is lit yellow and buttons 1 to 6 select Fader Sets 1 to 6 In its B state it is lit purple and buttons 1 to 6 select Fader Sets 7 to 12 When BLUE is held down the Flip function toggles between normal and flipped statuses In flipped status the functions of the fader and pot are reversed While BLUE is pressed the Flip button is lit yellow for normal state and blue for flipped The 1 button chooses Fader Set 1 if Bank is A or Fader Set 7 if Bank is B Similarly for 2 button to 6 button Pressing and releasing the 1 button while BLUE is pressed toggles between normal mode pot controls LR Pan 1 button is solid blue while BLUE is held a
59. external sources coming into system I O The default selection is Main Bus In the Monitor Megamode the buses are shown in the Pad not visible above and any of them can be selected The external sources are chosen in the upper row of the Picture Keys as shown above Stereo and Mono Comp These buttons allow you to listen to your mix through a stereo or mono speaker system If your main speakers are 5 1 the monitor system will use Left and Right for stereo or Center for mono Speaker Sets The Monitor Megamode allows access to two alternative speaker sets plus your Main speakers Monitor Setup Menu Monitor Setup allows you to configure your speaker sets as to their format mono stereo 5 1 etc and the physical outputs that feed them Fixed Level For some applications the Control Room monitors must be set to a fixed level and afterwards not respond to monitor pots To toggle Fixed level monitoring Step 1 Press Mon to enter the Monitor Megamode Step 2 Press or hold ALT and touch Encoder 3 labelled Fixed Step 3 To change the Fixed level release ALT and turn Encoder 3 The current fixed level is shown in the Pad Mute Individual Speakers Use the speaker icons to mute individual speakers Fixed Level For some applications the Control Room monitors must be set to a fixed level and afterwards not respond to monitor pots To toggle Fixed level monitoring Toggle Main and ALT Speakers The system allo
60. fader pot or switch Punch out manually with the out key in the Punch Menu or punch out automatically at the Active Out point after pressing PUNCH or the PLAY key see Programmed Automation This works for enabled signal paths In Prime mode use any applicable method to punch out of record Press the All Read button in the Automation Megamode to instantly place all mix items in Read Press the Mix ON key to disable the mix automation system desperate measure but it works Transitions Using Glide When the automation system makes a transition from Write or Trim to Read Glide out data will be written to smooth the parameter transition as described below The Glide Out transition starts at the point where the system leaves record and finishes at the Out point plus the Glide Out time When a transition is made from Preview to Write Glide In data will be written The Glide In transition starts before the point that the system entered record In point minus Glide In time and finishes at the point where the system entered record Glide times are set in the Auto Setup menu Step 2 Type Shift Ctri 1I Repeating this sequence cycles through all six ways of ordering Insert EQ and Dynamics Fairlight QUANTUM Page 244 AUTOMATION November 13 2014 On Stop Mix items currently in Write or Trim return to Read when the system leaves automation record using the Stop command The data that is written after the mix item returns to Rea
61. five main modes selected in the Edit Megamode Copy copies the selection to the clipboard Enter pastes it into the tracks Cut cuts the selection to the clipboard Enter pastes it into the tracks Erase erases the selection Trim retracts or extends the heads or tails of clips Fade fades or cross fades the selection Once a mode is selected it remains current until another mode is selected The Cursor Most edits are performed at the Play Head or Cursor This is the vertical line in the center of the Edit Screen Recorded Audio 9 dala Audio 1 Cursor Normally the Cursor is stationary and the clips scroll across the tracks The audio you hear is the waveform passing the Cursor hence its name Play Head Moving Cursor Many products show stationary waveforms with a moving cursor To show this in Post V5 0 select Setup Locked Playhead from the Edit Screen menu bar When this item is ticked the cursor is stationary but otherwise it moves While the cursor is moveable you can reposition it by right clicking anywhere in the Edit Screen and dragging the mouse right or left audio is not played while you do this or press the Jog command and use the Jog Wheel audio is scrubbed if the movement is less than four times play speed When re locking the cursor its current position is held This allows you to place it away from the middle of the screen which can be useful for seeing more of the incoming audio for example
62. foreground If you do it in the foreground it will block any other action in the user interface but will go faster To toggle this choice Step 1 Click Setup gt General Preferences gt Audio Plugins Step 2 Click Render ClipFX in Background Using VocAlign Processing Note Vocalign Project can be purchased at http www synchroarts co uk Post V5 0 will recognize Vocalign Project after it has been installed and run at least once Step 1 To enter the Wave Menu press the WAVE key Step 2 Select two tracks for VocAlign Processing The first selected track serves as the guide track VocAlign will attempt to match the second track to the guide track Note that VocAlign cannot process clips longer than 120 seconds Dream II v0 0a35 Beta The_Firm_48tk lt 48 tracks gt MFX Project File ix e s m iz rack Fo e s m f Step 3 Press the VocAlign soft key The VocAlign popup will appear Fairlight QUANTUM Page 166 TIME DOMAIN PROCESSING November 13 2014 Y YocALign Project Oj x File Edit View Options Play Help S ys x B foaren OOOO vjieeroral megrel a Render FL_ D4J2K8BQD Step 4 Adjust VocAlign parameters or use defaults see the VocAlign manual for details When you are ready press the Align button or the align soft key A new clip will be created on the Post V5 0 timeline and the original clip will be muted and preserved in the layer underneath Removin
63. frame Clip Level Mar next mark next point k Display Layering Toggles the display of clip layers on tracks This is explained on page 150 AudioBase Smart Pane Opens the AudioBase Smart Pane where you can search for sound effects audition them and paste them into your project This is explained starting at page 170 Clip EQ Smart Pane Opens the Clip EQ Smart Pane where you can add a four band equaliser to any clip This is explained starting at page 154 Fairlight QUANTUM Page 146 EDITING November 13 2014 Meters Smart Pane Opens the Meters Smart Pane This is the default display at the top of the Edit Screen It shows a meter for every track in the project Clip Search Window Opens a window showing every clip in the project plus ClipStore projects From here you can audition locate or paste any clip into your current project This is explained starting at page 173 Patch I O Page Opens a window where every signal path in the system can be accessed and connected to any other path This is explained starting at page 55 Undo and Redo Undo reverses the effect of the last edit performed The system has an unlimited number undo steps Each one saves a complete copy of the edit list to disk and can be recalled later if need Redo reverses the effect of the last undo You can see a list of the available undo steps in your project using Edit gt Undo List You can see a list of the available redo steps in your project
64. g a stereo plug ins uses two of these channels Control of plug ins can be graphical using the mouse or fader based using fleximaps The graphical controls are supplied by each third party manufacturer of plug ins Fleximaps allow physical control of plug in parameters and this how they are automated Access to control of Plug ins is via the Plug in button in the Channel Panel or via mouse clicking on the Fat Channel in the Mixer Screen Details below VST and VSTi lt Vm Me lt About VST VST Virtual Studio Technology is an audio plug in standard created by Steinberg The VST standard allows third party developers to create VST plug ins for use within VST host applications or to create VST host applications themselves The VST plug in standard is the most widespread plug in standard in use today with thousands of available plug ins The VST Host A VST host is a software application or hardware device that allows VST plug ins to be used in a logical context interacting with digital audio and MIDI elements QUANTUM is a VST host enabling VST plug ins to interact with the Post V5 0 mix environment As of this writing Post V5 uses Version 2 4 of the VST SDK Software Development Kit VST Effects versus VST Instruments VSTi AVST effect is a type of VST plug in that is used to process audio A VST effect might be a Reverb Compressor Flanger or EQ A VST Instrument is typically used to synthes
65. get a lot of work done NOTES e f you do not want to apply the Smart Panel shape shown above to the Head deselect the shape checkbox in the Smart Pane e If you ONLY want to apply the shape and not to change the length of the head fade deselect the length checkbox in the Smart Pane Fade Tail Same aS fade head but it fades from the cursor to the end of the clip Fade Clip Applies the numbers in the Head Duration and Tail Duration fields shown in the Smart Pane Fairlight QUANTUM Page 114 EDITING November 13 2014 Using Multiple Tracks lf multiple tracks are selected the simple Fade Head and Fade Tail commands will apply to all clips touching the cursor on selected tracks Using a Range If a range is present the fade head command applies the Head Duration field value and the fade tail command applies the Tail Duration field value to all red clips those wholly inside the range on selected tracks Using Soft Keys Advanced fade editing can easily be performed using the soft keys Del Head Removes zeroes the fade at the head of the selected clip s Del Tail Removes zeroes the fade at the tail of the selected clip s Capt Head Copies the Duration X Level and X Point from the head of the selected clip into the Smart Pane to use with other clips Capt Tail Copies the Duration X Level and X Point from the tail of the selected clip into the Smart Pane to use with other clips Dur Head Moves focus in
66. give you an optional close up waveform view of one or two tracks that can be useful for editing or mixing Fairlight QUANTUM Page 46 CHANNELS November 13 2014 Le m m mes EE Le iM 6 ie ad T AE OED l ma es am os aa h er er iaa LA BGO A oE mi Pe E ee T roe sam ane e D E ajme hanen aii jii ge am i e a A A a momin jan eo GiH pi i o et E e em RHA ADA RS LD MDa m Le Lo z H t 11 Le s m 13 Le sm 14 15 Le Ss im 16 alja oo 8 8 a j Le Lo z a i They effectively provide an extra zoom range to use on tracks of particular interest while the rest of the screen gives more contextual information The Video Scroller shows a frame by frame view of the video track centered on the current position To enable Scrollers use Setup General Preferences Scrollers Fairlight QUANTUM Page 47 CHANNELS November 13 2014 General Preferences x Options Audiobase Playback VideoCaptue Projects Scrollers Audio Plugins Tracks that have scrollers Scroller Settings Video Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 Track 4 Track 5 Track 6 Track 7 Track 6 Track 9 Track 10 IY Scrollers as Outline Scrollers on full screen video Scroller follows curent track Select the tracks you wish to see Only two audio tracks and or the video track may be displayed You can
67. groups UnGroup Clips Fairlight QUANTUM Page 158 EDITING November 13 2014 Edit Settings Menu Edit Settings Range Controls Range On Off sets head or tail of range All Layers Controls whether on or all clips layers are affected by edits Razor On Turns Razor edit on and off Range Selection Toggles range selection type between inclusive and exclusive Snap Editing Turns Snap Editing On or Off Snap To Defines where clips snap to when mouse editing Jump To Defines Jump destination points for speedy project navigation Define Project Start Time Sets the start time for the project Target Automation Toggles Automation follows editing on or off Fade Menu Fades can be applied to clips using the Fades Menu Fades Auto Fade Uses Playback head location on a clip to guess desired fade Fade Head Fades to head of Clip s Fade Tail Fades to tail of Clip s X Fade Makes a crossfade at the current position see page 152 Make Overlap Makes a one second overlap by pulling out the head and tail of butted clips Fairlight QUANTUM Page 159 TIME DOMAIN PROCESSING November 13 2014 Time Domain Processing Bender Bender is a new Suite of time domain processes available to all users in V5 software It comes in two flavours Render Bender is a high quality static process for pitch and time compression ClipBender is a real time processor that provides bend points within a clip and processes them non destructively
68. in is selected press the Add soft key or click the on screen Add button Method 2 via the QUANTUM Mixer Screen screen Step 1 Right click an empty slot in the Plug in area of an QUANTUM Mixer channel Fairlight QUANTUM Page 267 PLUG INS REWIRE AND EXTERNAL PROCESSING November 13 2014 Right click Step 2 Continue from Step 6 above After some time the plug in will be loaded This may take a minute or so if the plug in is dongled Dream If wi 11 3 0 New Project8 lt 48 tracks gt 0 o d l o b e o i lt o i 10 a ol gt a e gt 4 A a a s 5 p gt P lt D a 4 m a A a od A ad J a A P a e 15 ad l 4 a gt a lt A l gt gt lt e gt a a 4 d gt l o lt d 20 a b a o b al lt b 1 Gy eal See Coa wine eel 9 10 1 1 amp 14 15 6 ff 8 19 EE 4 4 Mas SB BVA BHAI KRdDHKHH BMI BHA HH H 4 7 Tari Asortir i B ni Pi 7 d ri ty NX i i r j Recoroec he SS SS eee ee waren en an See Se S eaaa i oe K Sssssessccssccs o ee The plug in popup will now appear on the Editor display where the mouse can be used to change its parameters It will also appear on the QUANTUM Pad controls or Faders see Controlling Plug ins on the Surface page 272 Removing a Plug in Step 1 Select the track
69. is done automatically when needed Note that many of the important menu keys also appear in the Megamode layouts Fairlight QUANTUM Page 20 CENTRAL TACTILE CONTROL November 13 2014 Blue Blue acts as a modifier to other keys in the same way that SHIFT or CTRL do in other software In fact the Blue function combines the CTRL key so you can use it with familiar Windows shortcuts When the Blue key is held down you see a layout that shows what the key functions have become F la i aal Fec Fed c A 3 in iE Y F z ge z St 4 Loop Razor i Gap Range Jump Jump Loop clip Blue Mode Enter Zoom Zoom affects the horizontal and vertical scale of the Edit Screen To change the horizontal scale hold Zoom down and turn the Jog Wheel At the same time a Number Pad appears which you can use to select a Zoom range between 1 and 21 Type the number while the Zoom button is held down then release it to change the scale Other ways to change the horizontal scale e Turn your Mouse Wheel To change the vertical scale hold down Zoom and Blue and turn the Jog Wheel This will affect how many tracks are visible on the Edit Screen Other ways to change the vertical scale e Hold down the Bank button and press one of the View buttons e Hold down the Blue key or the CTRL key on an external keyboard and turn the Mouse Wheel e Turn on Edit Set in the Blue layout and select any tracks Only the selected ones appear
70. is not used To use this tutorial item you need to load a Project containing clips The system comes with a demo project To load it consult the following Xplain item How to gt Files gt Load Demo Get Ready Hold down Mode and press the green Edit Basic Megamode button Press the cut erase button so that Cut is highlighted Press the range key to turn it OFF Fairlight QUANTUM Page 92 EDITING November 13 2014 Operation Locate the transport so that the cursor crosses the middle of at least one clip Identify the track containing that clip and double press its button to make it the only selected track If necessary use the Bank key The target clip should now be the only red clip on the screen Red means ready to edit Press and release the cut clip button The clip is now on the clipboard Move the transport The clip s ghost shows where it can be pasted Press another track number The ghost moves to the new track Press Enter to paste the clipboard contents once or many times Now press cut head Or cut tail The front or back of the clip is now on the clipboard Press Enter to paste the clipboard contents Using Ranges Overview A range is the time span between two points called the IN and OUT points or the From and To points When a range Is present the button labelled cut clip Or copy clip erase clip etc changes to cut range copy range erase range In this situation the basic editing commands cut c
71. key below For any clip whether or not it is being edited you can press the EQ In Out button to toggle its Clip EQ on and off Mame EQ In Out Copy Mudge Trim cll Old New Level Old hJ E When all parameters are set press Enter If you want to escape without changing the Clip EQ settings press Edit EQ again Clip EQ Parameters Band There are four EQ bands that you can apply They are given the names commonly used on mixing consoles but actually they are not in fixed ranges you have the full frequency range available on each of them Filter Type Choices are P Band pass filter gt High pass filter lt Low pass filter Each band can be set to any filter tyoe Mouse click on the button to cycle amongst the choices Frequency The centre frequency of each band Gain The gain of the band Range 99 to 20dB Q This displays the Q of the band or indicates the type of shelf Range 0 99 Enables Used with the Apply command Only the Enabled bands are applied to the selected clips Fairlight QUANTUM Page 125 EDITING November 13 2014 Value Grid eo The Value Grid shows all the current parameters of the EQ being changed Choosing a Parameter Click with the mouse in the cell you would like to change In QUANTUM this becomes available after you initially click in one of the Value Grid locations Changing a Parameter Value There are several ways to change the value of a parameter once
72. keys are available when the cut copy or erase modes are current split clip Cuts the clip into two pieces at the cursor position mute clip silences the clip Fairlight QUANTUM Page 109 cleave clip reverse Ghost On EDITING November 13 2014 Removes the link between stereo linked clips Creates a reversed version of the audio in the selected clip s and replaces the original with this reversed version Toggles the ghost image on and off Some people prefer working without it Range On Soft Key Functions The following additional commands are available when the cut copy or erase modes are current anda Range Is present split range fill b f fill overlap Cuts any clips lying across the ends of the range into two pieces at those range ends The fill function is used to automatically repeat a section of audio to fill a Range on a track to create background fills or buzz tracks The audio used for the fill is the clip currently on the clipboard from the last cut or copy function Multiple copies of the source may be needed in which case an overlap is used see below Reverses the audio in every second copy of the clipboard used for filling This can give a smoother effect Controls the length of overlap between pieces of audio used in the 111 command To set the overlap value Step 1 Press the Overlap a number of times until you have the value you want The maximum value is 10 frames Press
73. latency which is the time taken to get the audio from the Crystal engine to the CPU where the plug ins are executed and back again This is unavoidable due to the VST specification requiring blocks of samples to be sent for processing e Processing time of the plug in which is how long it takes the CPU to process a block of samples This is reported by each manufacturer of VST plug ins Latency Compensation For Track Feeds containing plug ins the track playback is automatically advanced by the amount of the latency Note this is not possible for Live Feeds as they happen in slightly retarded real time When Buses contain plug ins the tracks feeding that bus are automatically advanced by the amount of the latency lf a track is feeding more than one bus the amount by which the track is advanced is decided by a priority system Main Bus is highest then Sub Buses in numerical order then Aux buses With a track feeding more than one bus the timing will only be correct for the highest priority bus and others which happen to have the same latency Bus Balancing There is one exception to the preceding statement If a track is feeding the Main Bus and one other bus and the other bus is also routed to the Main Bus the system will correctly compensate for the latency See diagram below pe Latency 1 7 Track Main Bus Aux Bus LeLatency 2 4 Fairlight QUANTUM Page 266 PLUG INS REWIRE AND EXTERNAL PROCESSING November 13 2014
74. least one clip Identify the track containing that clip and double press its button to make it the only selected track If necessary use the Bank key The target clip should now be the only red clip on the screen Red means ready to edit Press the fade head button The clip now fades from its beginning to the cursor position The shape or curve of the fade is that one shown above in the Smart Pane Current Head Fade 00 00 0 12 00 curve In the next section we will change this shape Fairlight QUANTUM Page 95 EDITING November 13 2014 For now move the transport a little to the right and press These two commands are used to create most simple fades Press this will simplify the next step Now press the button Locate to the middle of the clip where you placed fades Press the button Now about half the clip s length to the right and press You have pasted a copy of the clip on top of itself The beginning of the newly pasted clip now interacts with the clip underneath inducing a crossfade You can see the line of the crossfade in the lower clip Move the top clip backwards and forwards to see how the fades interact Also go back to the Fade Menu and experiment by changing the fade in point Fade Shape Curves A fade s shape includes the following parameters controls how loud the fade is compared to the full Level of the clip at the Crossover point Second clip Second clip Second clip An TY
75. light is on or crack a wonderful joke while you are listening to the creative director s opinion of the last take Licensing The Background Recorder is a system option requiring a licence The following applies only to licensed systems Please contact your Fairlight distributor if you to purchase a licence Cache or Linear Recording The background recording process has two recording modes Linear Just like a normal recording it captures everything from GO to STOP Cached Records an audio loop on the disk whose length you can control For example if you set the length to 10 minutes the recording always contains the last 10 minutes of source audio User Interface To control background recording open the Background Recorder using the following command Setup Background Recorder Background Recorder E l x Options Destination E Media Background Cache Length _ 2 mins Harvest gt Clipboard Harvest gt Clipboard Options Destination Displays the holding tank folder where background recordings will be temporarily stored Click the button to browse to the folder you want to use Click the Reveal button to open the destination folder in Windows Explorer Cache Length Controls the amount of storage used when in Cached mode see above Armed Tracks Slider Fairlight QUANTUM Page 80 RECORDING November 13 2014 Choose the number of armed tracks you want to record in the background
76. list will loop repeatedly emerging directly in the Monitor output not connected to any track or bus You can use the Jog wheel or the and keys in the numpad to move the highlight up and down the list Each time you highlight a new clip it starts to preview Press and hold the shift key while scrolling to go faster Note you can determine whether the preview comes directly from your monitor speakers or from the current track by opening the following dialog tab Setup General Preferences Media Libraries and entering a choice in the Preview group An alternative method gives you more control of the clip s final position Step 2A Press the Audition soft key or click the Audition button in the Smart Pane While Audition is Fairlight QUANTUM Page 171 AUDIOBASE CLIP SEARCH CLIPSTORES QTUBE November 13 2014 lit the highlighted WAV file in the list will play as a clip on the current track while everything else is frozen if necessary take M1 off line to prevent the video moving You can also press the Jog button and move the clip with the Jog Wheel This allows you to find a sync point Note you can force the auditioning clip to be shown on top of existing clips by selecting the following option Setup gt General Preferences Media Libraries clip appears on top of existing clips Step 3 Double Click the selected WAV file to paste it at the playhead on the active track or drag and drop a clip to any track at any point o
77. mark 00 53 1407 ad i i E To select a Mark use the Jog Wheel the and buttons click with the mouse or type the index number on the Numpad To change the timecode stored in the mark press the Set Time soft key or click the Set Time screen button and type in a timecode then press Enter To rename the mark press the Rename soft key or click the Rename screen button and type in a name then press Enter To change the mark index click the Set Index screen button and type in a Index number then press Enter You can also press Enter to locate to the selected Mark or click the Jump To button if you want to keep the dialog open Normally marks are displayed at the top of the Edit Screen To display the mark as a vertical yellow line check the Line Marker box The middle mark below is a line marker while the other two are normal Fairlight QUANTUM Page 65 TRANSPORT November 13 2014 00 53 12 00 IRER EHLI 00 53 15 00 Jump to Mark Press the button which appears above the Jump Key Proj Jump Go To The Go To command is used to quickly locate to either a Timecode position a specific clip name or a stored Mark General Go To Usage Step 1 Press the button Step 2 Select an option from the Soft keys note Timecode is selected by default Step 3 Press the button again or to locate to the displayed timecode or to locate and go into play immediately or press upper left key to close
78. must be in the Edit Basic Megamode or the Quick Edit layout To access one of these hold down Mode and press Edit Basic Of Quick Edit To select the Move Menu Step 1 Hold down Mode and press Move Menu Release Mode To move a clip to another track HEAD TAIL Fairlight QUANTUM Page 129 EDITING November 13 2014 Step 2 Hold down move CLIP Step 3 Type the destination track number on the Numpad Step 4 Release move CLIP The selected clip is moved but the track selection stays where it was Notes about Move e move HEAD and move TAIL work exactly the same way aS move CLIP e The system remembers your last destination track To keep using it simply press and release move CLIP HEAD TAIL Options Multiple Tracks Move commands can use multiple tracks Clips on the lowest numbered selected track will be moved to the destination track Clips on higher numbered tracks will be sent to corresponding higher numbered destinations Range Move commands can use a range All clips and parts of clips within the range are affected QUANTUM s Quick Edit Layout The Quick Edit Layout provides a faster way to perform basic edit functions It combines a number of the most used commands into one layout to reduce the number of keystrokes needed To use the Quick Edit Layout do the following Step 1 Hold down Mode and press Quick Edit Release Mode Mute Clip Mudge Clip Head Pai barn Menu keys 7 Sync Tail keys Nu
79. mxf containing dv25 dv50 dv100 DVCPro HD or IMX mpeg compressed video e Omf video files omf containing mjpeg dv25 or uncompressed video e Thomson Grass valley dv25 files vid e Bitmap files single still image omp useful for a clapper board e LongGop requires mxf licence option mpeg licence option plus MXFReader2 1 beta or later e Final Cut Pro XML project note that nested sequences are not imported also any Post V5 0 native files which are e uncompressed vmu e dv25 dif e mjpeg vmj e lossless Huffman compression vmh MXF files require an MXF licence dongle IMX Mpeg requires an IMX Mpeg licence Dv50 dv100 require a DVCPro Licence dongle Playing a QuickTime or AVI file requires that the latest available codec for that file tyoe has been installed Fairlight recommends that automatic update be switched on to ensure that the version remains current In some cases a specific codec must be installed e g QuickTime files from Avid require the Avid codec to play them Fairlight QUANTUM Page 299 Pyxis TRACK November 13 2014 For a good indication of playability double click a file in Windows Explorer If the operating system plays the file immediately it will almost certainly play in Pyxis Track Capturing Video into Pyxis Track The following assumes your system is equipped with a Decklink Video capture card For the purposes of the example we will be operating in Standard Definition
80. number of channels with a small number of faders Mixer Set has two modes Dynamic and Fixed Dynamic mode is always set first It responds to every change you make in the channel selection Fixed mode can be entered later It retains the last set of channels you placed on the faders in Dynamic mode but no longer responds to changes The first 12 faders are allocated to the Mixer Set If you have more than 12 faders the remaining ones continue to display the contents of whichever Fader Set you have chosen So you can have some fixed allocations and some dynamic ones To toggle Mixer Set on or off On the Fader Panel Step 1 Step 2 Step 1 step 2 Step 3 Hold down BLUE Press the 5 button Mixer Set Select the Mixer Megamode by holding down Mode and pressing Mixer Press or hold down the Fader Set button Press the Mixer Set button Fairlight QUANTUM Page 230 MIXING November 13 2014 This puts Mixer Set into Dynamic mode The button lights up fully Pressing Mixer Set again puts it into Fixed mode Further presses will toggle it between Dynamic and Fixed modes To exit Mixer Set select any Fader Set Mixer Set Shortcuts step 1 Hold down the BLUE key Step 2 Press the Mixer Set button This procedure can be used to get into Mixer Set and to toggle it between Dynamic and Fixed modes You can use the F Set up and down buttons to exit Mixer Set while BLUE is held down Call button For each fader t
81. numbers by 24 or sometimes 12 2 Hold down Blue and press Bank to access the first Bank i e the one containing Track 1 Fairlight QUANTUM Page 16 CENTRAL TACTILE CONTROL November 13 2014 a a J j l i i Split B F Ovlap Paste Split Mute i Cleave ma Erase 255 j mon Blue Key Bank Key 3 Hold down Bank to display a layout containing many choices Bank Bank Bank Bank T Y jE Mode Enter i JA fay Il tes Control Video Track Half Bank Select All Tracks Choose Bank Choose Fader Set Choose Number of Onscreen Edit Tracks Bank Number Xstream calculates how many banks will be needed to display all the signal paths in the project step 1 Hold down the Bank key Fairlight QUANTUM Page 17 CENTRAL TACTILE CONTROL November 13 2014 Step 2 Press one of the Set Bank buttons step 3 Release the Bank key View Tracks The Edit Screen can show few or many tracks with corresponding greater or less detail Press one of these buttons to control the number of tracks on screen step 1 Hold down the Bank key Step 2 Press one of the View Track buttons step 3 Release the Bank key Another way to control the number of tracks on screen is as follows step 1 Hold down the Blue key step 2 Hold down the Zoom key step 3 Turn the Jog Wheel Step 4 Release the Zoom key and the Blue key the order doesn t matter and there is also a way to do it with the mouse Step 1 Hold down the ctrl button on
82. of the cue This is useful when recording artists that tend to anticipate the entrance The streamer will still indicate the cue in time but you are able to capture the audio a little earlier Early In Early In can be clicked during the preroll of a record cycle It causes recording to start immediately There is also an early in soft key Rec Out If desired the system can ignore the Out time of the cue and just keep recording until you exit manually using Stop Jog Rewind etc The Rec Out soft key can be set to PROG programmed exit or OPEN keep recording until manual exit The Rec Out screen button does the same When selected blue the record Out time will be obeyed When unselected grey manual exit will be used Keep Playing At the end of a cycle you may wish to keep playing in order to hear the next section of track Pressing the keep playing soft key at any time during a cycle will cause the postroll to be ignored and the system will enter normal Play mode after the cue s Out time Exporting the ADR List Clicking the Export button will cause a file to be created in CSV format containing all the cues in your ADR List Nie Delete Delete All HOI dd Cue Prev Cue FE The format is as follows 2 columns of timecode Then next column is the character default is Then next column is the text Example 23 58 39 03 00 02 58 19 Andrew Haven t seen you before Fairlight QUANTUM
83. om ATW un om E oO om AT J E om ATW E oO om ATW J E om co oO om AT E om oO oom om co k Tra 3 Tra Tra Tra Tra Tra Tra Tra Tra Tra 2 Track 83 Tra oO oO oO oO oO oO ma na mn na mn oom AT D oO Tra k 85 ees 86 Trak 87 Tra E 88 Trak 89 ees 90 Trak 91 Trae 92 Trak 93 Tra 4 94 Tra E 95 Tra m m m fm SFX 01 SFX 02 SFX 03 SFX 04 SFX OS SFX 06 SFX 07 SFX 07 SFX 08 SFX 08 SFX 09 SFX 09 SFX 10 SFX 10 SFX 11 SFX 11 SFX 12 SFX 12 SFX 13 SFX 13 SFX 14 SFX 14 SFX 15 SEX 1S SFX 30 SFX 16 SFX 16 SFX 17 SFX 17 SFX 18 SFX 19 SFX 20 SFX 21 SFX 22 SEX 2 SFX 24 SFX 25 SFX 25 SFX 26 SFX 26 SFX 27 SFX 27 SFX 28 SFX 28 SFX 29 SFX 29 SFX 30 mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm M mm M mm mm Select a destination bus at the bottom of the screen in the picture Sub 1 is selected Each path already assigned to that bus is highlighted tracks 88 to 90 are highlighted Each path shows the buses to which it is currently assigned all Aux Buses and Sub Buses can now be assigned to Main bus fe fw fe f f Spral SF 16 a SFA 20 Ste cul MEI MEI fu f f SF 20 Sree APERE SPA 28 SFA 29 a Sub Sub Sub Sub il 4 Click any path to toggle its assignment to the destination bus To toggle multiple paths click and drag the mouse over them Fairlight QUANTUM Page 195 MIXING November 13 2014 Use Page Up and Page Down to reach more paths Sub Buses are at
84. otherwise a slight movement of the jogger wheel may result in phasing during the fades The same technique can be used to fade one clip EQ setting to another within the same piece of audio In the above illustration the top layer plays the same audio as the bottom layer but may have different level or EQ settings During the fade in and fade out the settings will effectively crossfade Clip Level Each clip has a volume level that you can set This is a quick and easy alternative to fader automation for many situations To trim the level of a clip Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Select a track and move a clip under the cursor Press the clip level button if not already on Press and hold the Jog Level soft key Turn the Jog Wheel or type a number on the Numpad this will trim the clip level up or down Alternatively press the 2 dB or 2 dB buttons a number of times to trim the clip level Note Clips on multiple tracks can be amplitude adjusted at the same time If a range is present all clips wholly inside the range will be affected Fairlight QUANTUM Page 123 EDITING November 13 2014 Level Normalisation Clips can be normalised to the maximum possible level using the Normal Level Soft key in the Clip Level menu Clip Equalisation QUANTUM provides clip based four band parametric Equalisation plus shelving which can be applied to a single clip or range of clips within a Project EQ is performed by the
85. parameter To display automation curves on one or more tracks Step 1 Select the tracks where the automation Is to be displayed Fairlight QUANTUM Page 257 AUTOMATION November 13 2014 Step 2 Click the Display button or press the Display soft key in the Auto Curves menu Step 3 Select the parameter to be displayed use either the pull down menu or a preset The pull down menu can also be accessed using the Target soft key in the Auto Curves menu Note that each signal path may show its own selected parameter The Display button is also used to turn the curves off To remove the display of automation curves step 1 select the tracks where the automation is to be displayed Step 2 Click the Clear button or press the Clear soft key in the Auto Curves menu Curves for Buses Lives and Groups Mixer Tracks When Mix On is toggled ON the Edit Screen is appended with a set of Mixer Tracks corresponding with Live Feeds Buses and VCA Groups These displays are always shown at the bottom of the Edit screen after the Tracks It is possible to control whether the Mixer Tracks are displayed To do this Step 1 Click Setup gt General Preferences gt Display Step 1 Select or deselect View Mixer Tracks on Mix On To see the Mixer Tracks you may do any of the following e Use the mouse and scroll bar in the Edit Screen to scroll down to the bottom e Select a Bus Live Feed or VCA Group in the normal way and it will become the cu
86. screen To open the ADR List Hold down Mode and press ADR Then release Mode The ADR List can also be displayed using the command ADR ADR List There are no items to show tn this view When it is first opened the list is empty of cues Import Cue List from a Text File You may import an entire script through the use of the Import button in the ADR List This can import a short script that has been written in a word processor Each line of text in the file is treated as a separate line of ADR cue text Each line of text can optionally have one or more timecode numbers at the start of the line 00 00 00 00 This line has one timecode number Fairlight QUANTUM Page 83 ADR November 13 2014 or 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 12This line has two timecode numbers The first timecode number becomes the cue in point and the second if present the cue out point Timecodes must contain 4 individual numbers separated by colons 01 00 23 12 or semicolons if the timecode is drop frame based 01 01 00 02 Here is an example of a text file in the correct syntax with timecode numbers at the start of each line 00 02 19 19 Her eyes shined bright and true 00 04 57 07 00 09 42 18 Do not look now but 23 58 39 03 00 02 58 19 Haven t seen you before Import from CSV File QUANTUM can also open ADR lists in comma separated variable CSV format In this case the Character should be included The format is as follows 2 columns of time
87. select the appropriate options You are ready to begin Backup Project to Folder Both MT files and DR2 files can be backed up using File Backup Project to Folder option This feature copies the project file and all the associated media files audio and video to the designated folders Backup Project to Folder places all files associated with a project in a single place making it easy to restore them later Many facilities use inexpensive USB drives for backup Restoring files is simply a matter of dragging and dropping files from the backup folder to the appropriate Audio and Video Media Devices Media Scanning Normally the system scans all available media to ensure that it is up to date with available files This takes some system bandwidth and memory in particular If you do not need this function i e if your storage contents are not being changed by other computers you may turn off background scanning in Setup gt General Preferences Projects If you open a project whose media is not online and then you bring the media online it will not be found if background scanning is switched off You can however force the system to find the relevant media for the current project using Process gt Relink Media Detailed Media Management To work on media and project management select Setup Media and Project Management from the QUANTUM main menu Fairlight QUANTUM Page 325 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT November 13 2014 Contr
88. soft key in the Arm menu Step 2 Use the From and To keys to make a range that represents the length of the Tape you want to make Step 3 Arm the tracks where you want to put a Tape Mode clip Step 4 Press the Setup Tape soft key Now you have two choices Step 5 Blank Tape will make a blank zero waveform Tape Mode clip on each armed track filling the range step 5A Render Tape will make a single Tape Mode clip on each armed track copying all the audio that is already in the range on the armed tracks Afterwards you can replace any parts that are not correct by recording over them Both Blank Tape and Render Tape run quite fast about 10 seconds for each hour of track time depending on computer and hard disk speed The advantage of using them is that you do not need to record sequentially you can move around anywhere in the Tape and replace the parts you are ready to work on Add Recording Handle Overview A Handle is an extra piece of audio at the beginning of a recording The system automatically adds this piece just as if you entered recording earlier This can be very useful when trying to capture performances as it gives you extra time to react Press Mode and then Arm to access recording functions Press the Handle soft key then change the displayed number of frames by typing on the Numeric Keypad or pressing the and buttons Press the Handle soft key again to accept the currently displayed value Fair
89. the EQ 1 button controls the following Band 1 Gain Band 1 Frequency Band 1 Q factor Band 1 Shape Band 1 Range Band 1 Gain Band 1 In Out To toggle the enables for all these controls simply press and release the button To access the controls individually hold down the button and select from the individual parameters that appear in the top row Fairlight QUANTUM Page 240 AUTOMATION November 13 2014 Pan F i 2O Boor Spread Diverq Rotate In Out Diverg Level Pan Mute Group In this case the Pan button has been held down and just one of its members has been selected This will cause the Pan button to be half lit as shown Using Screen Enables There are enable buttons on the Mixer Screen Clicking on these toggles a parameter enable group on and off On Stop Touch Enables a L 1er t F gt Screen Enables Automation The Edit Screen also displays enables for Fader Mute and Pan in the Solo Theme only Screen Enables To display the Solo theme click General Preferences Options Themes gt Solo Enabling Plug ins Enable plug ins button in any of the the Param Enable layouts described immediately above This enables all plug in parameters When you are ready to record data for a particular parameter use Touch Write to access it Enable Signal Paths Enabling signal paths for automation allows you to control the paths on which automation may be recorded To enable Signal p
90. the existing selection this is useful for working with non contiguous ranges of tracks Shift Ctrl clicking also works and is useful in case the track has a clip where you want to click Fairlight QUANTUM Page 42 CHANNELS November 13 2014 Solo Mute and Arm On Tactile Controller Press the button to enter the Solo state You can now Solo any channel by pressing its Pad button Double Press the button to toggle all Solos off and on again Press the button to enter the Solo state You can now Solo any channel by pressing its Pad button Double Press the button to toggle all Solos off and on again On Screen The buttons at the left of the Edit Screen can be used to set arming Mute Solo and more Link Groups The first track is master Clicking its Solo or Mute button affects the whole group Individual tracks within the group can be soloed or muted Arming any linked track will arm all of them as long as they have a patched Input Click to cycle through automation display parameters Fader Mute or Pan Click to put track into automation record Click to arm track for recording must have audio input Click and drag for fader level and pan position Click to select Video Track Double click here to collapse the Link Group to one track width Uncollapsed Stereo Link Group Click the number to select a single track or Link Group MIDI Track indication only Indicates Audi
91. the mix was saved When a mix is loaded the mixer state is updated and all mix items are recalled So it is not necessary to write automation data for non critical items they will be reset to their correct static values when the mix is loaded A large number of complete mixes can be saved within a project How to Use Automation Where the Controls Are Many of the Automation controls are found in the Automation Megamode This can be accessed in two ways e Toggle the Mix Auto button in the Mixer Megamode This is only visible when Mix On is toggled ON e Hold down Mode and press AutoMate In addition the Faders contain their own Auto buttons for putting their channels in and out of Automation record the rotary controls around the Pad are touch sensitive for automation and many screen controls are available Automation Methods There are many styles for using automation Here is a summary of general methods it assumes that you have already enabled Mix On and you have selected the right Megamode see above Using the Xstream Auto Button Step 1 Enable parameter s see Enable Parameters below Step 2 Press the Auto button next to the Jog Wheel this puts the currently selected channel the one in the Pad into WRITE or TRIM see below Fairlight QUANTUM Page 237 AUTOMATION November 13 2014 Step 3 Press Play to move the transport automation data starts writing Step 4 Press Stop automatio
92. the things that can be done to a clip Copy Level Split CLIP CLIP Track Up Down This is a quick way of moving the track selection up and down To use it press the Track Up Down button then type a number on the Numpad or use the Jog Wheel When you release the Track Up Down button the reselection is complete Range On Off The range is a selected timecode region which may be targeted by edit commands This key toggles the range off and on When toggled on the Range uses the In and Out points that were present when it was toggled off Ranges are made with the From and To buttons next to the Range button or with the mouse Quick Editor This layout provides one button access to the most commonly used edit commands Fairlight QUANTUM Page 25 CENTRAL TACTILE CONTROL November 13 2014 Mute Name HEAD TAIL Clip Clip Nudge Sync Jog BE Range Level a ON Trim Trim Split HEAD TAIL Clips Common Edit commands Track Range Up Down On Off Add Mark This layout provides one button access to the most commonly used edit commands Common Edit Commands The Trim Fade and Nudge commands are used more than any others to fine tune audio clips Double Handed Commands with the Jog Wheel The Fade and Trim commands can use the Jog Wheel to speed up the process Fade Head For simple use just press and release the Fade Head button A e Choose the point where the Fade in should complete For simple use just press
93. these formats require special licences to operate See below for import export information Creating a Pyxis Track Before using Pyxis Track a video track must be added to the project This can be done in two ways e When creating a new project select the Add Pyxis Track checkbox shown below Di FairlightauiProjects ae al For a project that is already created use the command Tracks Add Pyxis Track Delete Pyxis Track Convert To or From Midi Tracks Set Audio Track Count Repame Track Set Record Seed Name Add Clip Set Display Level Set Track Colour Arm Tracks Solo Tracks Mute Tracks Safe Tracks Select All viewed Tracks Fairlight QUANTUM Page 294 Pyxis TRACK November 13 2014 Once created the Video track appears at the top of the Edit Screen Adding a Second Pyxis Track Note This feature is licensed if you wish to purchase a licence please contact your Fairlight distributor It is possible to add a second Pyxis Track using the same command Tracks Add Pyxis Track Adding a second track puts more demand on system resources particularly memory and CPU bandwidth If you plan to use a second video track particularly with HD formats we recommend upgrading your host PC to Windows 7 64 bit and bringing the amount of RAM up to 6 GBytes The second video track can be used to play out 2 video streams when used in conjunction with Black Magic Design 3D Extreme HD card This enables Post V5 0 to play
94. to this to create the final complete mix Entering Automation Record There are four ways to enter automation record Press the auto key below any fader Enabled parameters on the channel are put into record Pressing the Auto button on the Xstream Panel puts the current channel into record There are also AUTO buttons on the Edit Screen and Mixer Screen Use Touch mode and move any fader pot or switch on your Fader panel or the Xstream Pad The mix item it controls is put into Write or Trim if it is touch enabled If Touch Auto Enable is OFF the signal path and parameter must both be enabled for mix items to enter record If Touch Auto Enable is ON the signal path need not be enabled but the parameter must be Punch in manually on enabled tracks with the rn key in the Punch Menu or punch in auto matically at the Active In point using PUNCH or the PLAY key Details in Programmed Automation below All enabled mix items are put into record Use Prime mode and the transport Recording or ADR functions to record automation on selected signal paths Details in Programmed Automation below All enabled mix items are put into record Leaving Automation Record There are seven methods of leaving automation record Press any illuminated auto key to take its signal path out of record Cause the transport to leave PLAY or REC using any transport command not effective if Jog Mix IS on see below When in Touch Snap mode release any
95. together on one QUANTUM system to control up to 24 signal paths at the same time Installation of Quantum Fader Pack s is described in detail in the Quantum Installation manual which is supplied with your system and found in the folder C Program Files Fairlight Dream II Docs This chapter assumes you have successfully installed and tested your faders Fairlight QUANTUM Page 224 Fader Controls 9 Fairlight QUANTUM MIXING November 13 2014 Soft Pots used in conjunction with the screen above to control signal processing parameters Solo toggle Mute toggle AUTO button channel enters automation write trim preview CALL button brings channel to PAD Fader controls level or other choices Page 225 MIXING November 13 2014 Basic Operation Fader Each fader controls the channel volume level in a range from 90 dB to 10 dB To set the fader to exactly 0 dB hold down the BLUE button and touch the fader The motors work during automation playback to track the level data recorded for the channel being controlled During automation recording the motors switch off allowing new movements to be recorded The touch sensor tells the NAME software that you have touched the fader The most common use is to put the fader into automation write when you move it Mute The Mute button is used to turn the channel on and off When the channel is muted it is equivalent to having the fader pulled right
96. transport layout key panel command are seen on the options location sequences Edit Screen Fairlight QUANTUM Page 19 CENTRAL TACTILE CONTROL November 13 2014 Mode Mode is the key to accessing all the system functions It works only in momentary mode Hold it down and the following layout appears Press one of its buttons as described below O E _ TE WIS WS alk Insert Utils 7 eck Config amp Gain ain 78 ine Freq Freq okeg LJ Ta tee MEN hs TEE ath ath Edit Mi Edit E S Arder Loopy Mark Setup menu Loop Group Clip a Audio my File CUrvES Mix EQ LEE Base Import Menu Menu Menu pam k Track Salo s Copy Mudge ee way ate car Erase Menu ii a a Menu Clip t d Mute Level gE i mel Menu Duick Mixer pene User Ato _ Edit il Orange keys each Macro L mate E one loads a set of soft keys that perform mix and automation related a0 Blue mode Enter functions eo ll E Megamodes Edit menus Record menus Setup menus QWERTY Dark green keys Brown keys each Red keys each one Blue keys each Puts a each one loads a one loads a set of loads a set of soft one loads asetof typewriter on complete layout of soft keys that keys that perform soft keys that the keys most functions See page perform edit related record related perform setup of the time this 24 for details functions functions functions
97. type the name then Tab to or click the Starting Seed Number and use the keyboard to set it You can also choose the Add Track Name Checkbox When this is selected the name of the track being recorded will be prepended to the clip name as well as the other items in the seed name Click ok or press Enter to finish You can do this while in Record Note If you give more than one track the same seed name at the same time their clips increment as a group preventing repeated names Fairlight QUANTUM Page 76 RECORDING November 13 2014 Clip Naming Each clip can be given a typed name For existing clips you select them and issue the clip name command You can also name clips while they are being recorded Press the name menu button in the Edit Basic Megamode or in the Mode display to display naming soft keys Select the track s where there are clips that you want to rename Press the name soft key To rename clips they must be touching the cursor or wholly inside the range In either case they will be coloured Red Press the clip soft key to display the name dialog Use the QWERTY keyboard to type the name then press ENTER or Click ox to finish Another way to open the clip name dialog is by clicking Clip Rename Clip Recording Shortcuts the Record menu Overview The record menu gives you some recording shortcuts which appear when the Record button is held down These include record head record clip record he
98. using Edit Redo List Erase Selected lf there is no range this command will erase all clips on selected tracks that are touching the Play Head These clips are coloured red Warning This may include clips on tracks that are not visible at the time lf there is a range this command will erase all clips and parts of clip on selected tracks that lie inside the range The same warning applies Cut Selected Cut is the same as Erase except that the clips are removed and placed on the clipboard ready to paste into the project at any time and on any track s If there is no range this command will cut all clips on selected tracks that are touching the Play Head These clips are coloured red Warning This may include clips on tracks that are not visible at the time lf there is a range this command will cut all clips and parts of clip on selected tracks that lie inside the range The same warning applies Copy Selected Cut is the same as Cut except that the clips are not removed from their original position They are copied to the clipboard ready to paste into the project at any time and on any track s lf there is no range this command will copy all clips on selected tracks that are touching the Play Head These clips are coloured red Warning This may include clips on tracks that are not visible at the time If there is a range this command will copy all clips and parts of clip on selected tracks that lie inside the range The s
99. 0 08 fe Second clip To apply the specified crossfade press or click the button in the dialog See more details about crossfading later in this chapter Fairlight QUANTUM Page 99 EDITING November 13 2014 Clip EQ Overview The clip eq menu allows you to add a four band equaliser to every clip The display of clip eq is shown in the Clip EQ Smart Pane above the Edit Screen This comes on automatically when you enter the clip eq menu In Clip EQ only one track is active Even if many tracks are selected only the most recently selected will be affected This track has a blue label in the Edit Screen Clip EQ does not use a range Get Ready Hold down Mode and press the green Edit Basic Megamode button Operation Press the clip eq button Locate the transport so that the cursor crosses the middle of at least one clip Identify the track containing that clip and double press its button to make it the only selected track If necessary use the Bank key The target clip should now be the only red clip on the screen Red means ready to edit Press the edit soft key The Pad now displays an EQ graph for the clip and parameter values at the ends Use the Encoders to change the parameter values dfgh Fx ASLONGS TRACKS Track The i4th Track Track Track Track Track Stereo 1 POSS 13 o Ta 13 16 17 16 19 Tks 3 4 Tk 6 Tks 1 2 Tk S Tk 13 Tk 14 Tk 15 Tk 16 Tk 17 Tk 18 Tk 19 bayvx NMJ 0 0 dB 10000 hz
100. 0 O08 S000 Press and hold the Fade Head button This will cause the Fade display to show in the Smart Pane I We 20 Su EL u WW Zul 30 OH bU b 1 sl o i 3 3 w 3 z E 6 I l z Li 10 00 00 01 00 10 15 ails 15 m 20 Duration 20 30 Co sate ae 00 08 10 00 O00 000 OO 08 S000 Turn the Jog Wheel to adjust the displayed curve I We 20 su UL u WW Zul Su OW bU b 1 feo il 3 3 oH 3 3 ME 3 l T Li 10 00 00 04 00 10 I5 15 15 0 20 Duration 20 Top mea SxX20 Sree OO to OO 0s 2000 OOS S00 When ready release the Fade Head button to apply the fade Fairlight QUANTUM Page 132 EDITING November 13 2014 U 1U U 3U H oU b U IU eU 2u LIL dB 10 00 00 01 00 10 Duration Note Clips on multiple tracks can be faded at the same time If a range is present all clips wholly inside the range will be affected using the number in the Duration field as the length of their fade in 00 00 01 00 l 10 Duration ae Jog Level This key combines the Jog Wheel and the Level Trim function To use Jog Level Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Start with the cursor touching a clip whose level you wish to trim Press and hold the Jog Level button Turn the Jog Wheel to adjust the level trim displayed in the dialog box At the same time the clip waveform will change amplitude When ready release the Jog Level button to apply the level change No
101. 00 03 16 03 00 03 00 16 0002 56 02 00 03 05 10 0003 11 09 D004 i7 16 00 04 235 05 00 04 25 11 00 00 08 21 00 0001 00 00 10 00 00 00 08 21 00 00 08 21 00 00 10 00 00 00 30 12 00 00 18 0535 00 00 51 18 00 00 51 18 00 00 17 16 00 00 06 00 00 00 03 23 00 00 09 08 00700 13 20 00 00 14 13 00 00 05 14 AUDIOBASE CLIP SEARCH CLIPSTORES QTUBE November 13 2014 Filter the list by typing a sequence of characters in the text box Only clip names containing that sequence will be displayed To quickly move the cursor into the Search field press the Search soft key Sort the clips in track order start order end order or duration or clip colour by clicking on the column header Clicking the header a second time reverses the sort order Double click any clip to locate to its timecode Press the Playhead soft key or select the Under Playhead checkbox to display only clips touching the cursor This is updated as the transport moves Press the Pop soft key or select the Pop button to bring the currently selected clip to the top layer on its track This can be used to manage multiple takes of the same recording layered on a single track Press the offline soft key or select the Only Offline Clips button to reduce the list to only those clips for which media are not currently available Click the Reveal File button to display a Windows Explorer window showing the file containing the media for the clip Resi
102. 00000000_656908E4_7F35633E 00000000_00000000_656908E4_7F35633E 00000000_00000000_656908E4_7F35633F 00000000_00000000_656908E4_7F356340 00000000_00000000_656908E4_7F35633E 00000000_00000000_656908E4_7F35633E 00000000_00000000_656908E4_7F35633F 00000000_00000000_656908E4_7F356340 00000000_00000000_656908E4_7F355633E 24 bit 24 bit 24 bit 24 bit 24 bit 24 bit 24 bit Sample Rate Native 48000 Hz 48000 Hz 48000 Hz 48000 Hz 48000 Hz 48000 Hz 48000 Hz 48000 Hz 48000 Hz 48000 Hz 48000 Hz 48000 Hz 48000 Hz 48000 Hz 48000 Hz 48000 Hz 48000 Hz 48000 Hz 48000 Hz 48000 Hz timecode or Play to locate and go into play immediately or press Esc upper left key to close the dialog without locating anywhere anywhere Or you may double click on the name of any clip to locate to its position The Clip Search dialog has many other capabilities Please see the section starting page 173 Fairlight QUANTUM Page 69 RECORDING November 13 2014 Recording Basics Overview QUANTUM lets you record on multiple tracks at the same time using the standard Play Record transport buttons to punch in It will punch in from Play or Stop and can punch out with gapless monitoring of playback There are two recording modes New and Tape Mode In New Mode each time a track enters record a new clip is created on that track If there is already a clip present the new one goes on top of the previous one The upper clip i
103. 04 Sample Rate 44100 Type fan User 1 User 2 Clip Type fo Sample Rate fan User 3 User 4 Track 0 Results 617 reve Description Auto crash car approac From trac File Name T2_83 WAY File Type 2 Wooo O description opname 434CCL DCCL EXT from tra 43ACCL DCCL Ex ACCL IN BY from track 1 in ACCLIN BY ACEL DECL EXT 4U95127 f ACEL DECL EXT Aircraft carrier genera from T1 305 Aircraft carrier genera from T2305 Alarm car car alarm go fro T118 Alarm car car alarm go fro T218 Alarm car disarm car a fro T117 Alarm car disarm car a fro T217 Alarm car set car alar from T1 16 Alarm car set car alar from T216 askd4car from track 1 in Sa askd4car a f k Let askd4car from track 2 in SA askd4car i AEF fe Auto 91 old cutlass From T150 tet am Auto 91 old cutlass from T1 51 PE my Auto 91 on pats hast in T1252 7 Auto 91 old cutlass From T153 ia a Auto 91 old cutlass From T154 a VB ttc 191 old cutlass from T155 a FB tt 191 od cutis from 1156 Fp to 91 ld cutlass from 11 57 aS 4 91 utes from T1 5c a os ois a tron T eo au i Auto 91 old cutlass from T160 eB ttt 31 od cutlass from T161 rep uto 91 old cutlass from 7250 O MS epee to 98 ld cates from 125 j pg j j 7 i Auto 91 old cutlass From T252 rri 3 3 in SY N Tra Auto 91 old cutlass from T253 I 60 91 o
104. 1 systems e Upto 192 Track Feeds e Up to 48 Live Feeds For CC 2 systems e Upto 744 Playback Tracks see Chapter 2 for details e Up to 256 Full Tracks o Any number of the Full Tracks can be set up as Live Feeds Processing for Tracks and Live Feeds e 4band automated EQ Bell Shelf High amp Low Notch e 2band automated Filters High Pass and Low Pass at 12 pr 24 dB per octave e Compressor plus Limiter plus Expander Gate e Insert e Direct Out except on Playback Tracks in CC 2 systems e Track Metering e Aux Sends 12 each in any bus format up to 7 1 e Fader and Mute e Panning up to 7 1 surround Link Groups e Upto 8 members with linked parameter controls and support for advanced surround panning features Main Bus e 1x Main Bus e Formats Mono Stereo LCR 2 1 LCRS LCRSS 5 1 5 1 SMPTE 7 1 Custom e Compressor and Limiter e Insert e Direct Out e Master Fader and Mute Sub Buses e 8x Sub Buses Fairlight QUANTUM Page 5 QUANTUM OVERVIEW November 13 2014 e Formats Mono Stereo LCR 2 1 LCRS LCRSS 5 1 5 1 SMPTE 7 1 Custom e Compressor and Limiter e Insert e Direct Out e Master Fader and Mute Aux Buses e 12x Aux Buses e Formats Mono Stereo LCR 2 1 LCRS LCRSS 5 1 5 1 SMPTE 7 1 Custom e Compressor and Limiter e Insert e Direct Out e Master Fader and Mute e Compressor and Limiter e Insert e Master Fader and Mute Multi Track Buses e 24x Multi Track Buses e Mono Format e Ma
105. 2014 Loading a Mix Step 1 Hold down Mode and press the File button Step 2 Turn the jog wheel to scroll through the previously saved mixes These appear on the screen Step 3 Press the Load soft key in the LCD menu to load the selected mix Step 4 Confirm or cancel by pressing the Yes or No soft key Deleting a Mix Step 1 Hold down Mode and press the File button Step 2 Turn the jog wheel to scroll through the previously saved mixes Step 3 Press the Delete soft key in the LCD menu to delete the selected mix Creating a New Mix Follow these steps to create new empty mix with no automation data Step 1 Hold down Mode and press the File button Step 2 Press the New Mix soft key in the LCD menu This new mix must be named and saved once new data has been written Copy a Mix Between Projects Mix Carry Over allows the static snapshot and dynamic mix data from a single mix to be copied from one project to another Step 1 Enter the File menu and use the Save or Load soft key to Save your current mix or load a previously saved mix step 2 Press the Carry over soft key in the File menu The Carry over key flashes when carry over is active Step 3 Close the current project Step 4 Open the destination project Step 5 Enter the File menu again and use the Save soft key to save the mix in the new project Mix Undo The automation system supports multiple levels of mix undo These are interleaved with audio edits making a single undo l
106. 3 HUI SLAVE MODE November 13 2014 CID_SW_MACKIE_AUX CID_SW_MACKIE_BUSES CID_SW_MACKIE_OUTPUTS CID_SW_MACKIE_USER CID_SW_MACKIE_OPTION CID_SW_MACKIE_SAVE CID_SW_MACKIE_UNDO CID_SW_MACKIE_CANCEL CID_SW_MACKIE_SOLO CID_SW_MACKIE_DROP CID_SW_MACKIE_CYCLE CID_SW_MACKIE_DISPLAY_SMPTE You may add any of these to your remap file and assign them to any Post V5 0 key For help with Post V5 0 key assignment please consult your Fairlight customer support organization Remap to Macros One easy way to get more power from HUI keys is to map them to your macros An example of a mapping line that does this CID_SW_MACKIE_F1 CID_SW_M_1 CID_SW_MACKIE_INPUTS CID_SW_BANK_1 Using macro and bank assignments you can get access to 27 macro keys Identifying Keys On some HUI controllers the key labelling may not match the list above You can find out the name of any HUI key using the following method Step 1 Start the system and load a project can be empty Step 2 Start the MSAT application Start All Programs Fairlight gt FMC FMC Utils gt FMC Step 3 If you see this error message at any time click OK it doesn t mean anything is wrong x 6 Version Error FMC and MSAT have incompatible UICtriviewDefs Close MSAT and restart a compatible version Step 4 Click buttons at the top of the MSAT screen so that Msg Gen is on Msg Sys is off and All Para is off as shown below Fairlight QUANTUM Page 354 Step 5 Step 6 H
107. 47 Track 48 2 2 2 2 Track 49 Track 50 Track 51 Track 52 Track 53 Track 54 Track 55 Track 56 Track 57 Track 58 Track 59 Track 60 Track 61 Track 62 Track 63 Track 64 Track 65 Track 66 Track 67 Track 68 Track 69 Track 70 Track 71 Track 72 Track 73 Track 74 Track 75 Track 76 Track 77 Track 78 Track 79 Track 80 Track 81 Track 82 Track 83 Track 84 Track 85 Track 86 Track 87 Track 88 Track 89 Track 90 Track 91 Track 92 Track 93 Track 94 Track 95 Track 96 Grp Grp Grp Grp Grp Rename 1 2 7 10 11 Grp Grp Grp Grp Grp Grp Grp alz 14 ala alfi 19 21 22 Grp Grp er 31 To use this window Step 1 Select a VCA group at the bottom of the window Step 2 Toggle signal paths in and out of the group Step 3 Use Page Up and Page Down to access more Tracks and Live Feeds Step 4 To close this display type SHIFT ctr1 v again or esc or right click on the window Assignment from the Virtual Channel Membership of fader groups can also be controlled in the Virtual channel which is accessed by right clicking a channel tile in the Mixer screen Fairlight QUANTUM Page 187 GROUPING November 13 2014 Click here to change the Fader Group of the called channel Zero means no Fader group membership Naming a Group Groups are named the same way as other signal paths using the Name Path function see page 52 Calling a Group Master Group Masters are shown in the path displays in NAME when called To CALL a Group Master do one of the fol
108. ANTUM Page 35 CHANNELS November 13 2014 Track Height By default all tracks have the same height but you can change this To Drag track border up and down to change height recorded Audio 2 To change a track s height drag the lower border up or down with the mouse Hiding Tracks Tracks can be hidden and revealed To hide one or more tracks Step 1 Press the button to display 48 signal paths Step 2 Make sure that Tracks are being displayed Step 3 Press the button The tracks will be coloured purple Step 4 Use the to toggle hiding on and off Step 5 Press the or button to go back to the normal SEL layout Alternatively Fairlight QUANTUM Page 36 CHANNELS November 13 2014 Step 1 Hold down the Bank button keep it down throughout this procedure Step 2 Press the Hide Tks button The Path buttons change to show whether they are hidden or visible Step 3 Press any number of Path buttons to toggle them in and out of the hidden state Step 4 Release the Bank button or press the Hide Tks button to turn it off Alternatively Step 1 Select the tracks you want to hide Step 2 Click the menu item Tracks Hide Selected Tracks To reveal a specific set of hidden tracks Step 1 Select the two tracks above and below the ones that are hidden Step 2 Click the menu item Tracks Unhide Between Selected Tracks To reveal all hidden tracks Step 1 Click the menu item Tracks Unhide All Tracks The Clip When audio is recorded or i
109. ATA drive while uncompressed High Definition Video may require a large fast RAID array Please contact your Fairlight distributor to discuss your specific needs Typical QUANTUM Drive Configuration F My Computer Fie Edit view Favorites Tools Help r a aan Back gt wi A Search Wey Folders 555 Address 4 My Computer kd Go System Tasks Se Local Disk iC l z Audio Ds View system See Video Es information i B eee C Shared Documents programs Dream s Documents g Change a setting Other Places a My Network Places G My Documents Shared Documents g Control Panel Fairlight QUANTUM Page 323 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT November 13 2014 Designating Media Device When QUANTUM is first started it displays a dialogue box requesting that a default project device be selected Select the devices Audio and Video you wish to use from the list of available drives To prepare the drive for use with QUANTUM select Setup Media and Project Management from the QUANTUM main menu Select the device from the devices list and click on Convert to Media device Please also set the Device Info accordingly in most cases this is set automatically and does not need to be changed OO00000 Devices Media Free Space kb J C c Dream II Both 15178720 Yes 2500 Local Yes o000000 Rot Ra Dream II Audio 212907624 Yes 500 Shared Yes 0000000 Both 619719412 Rescan Devices Device Name
110. B It also sets all group members to 0 dB removing any differences between their values e The AUTO key on the group Master enables automation recording for the link group master which will control all the members Only the Link Group master actually records automation data and any existing data for the other group members is preserved and read by the automation system Creating a Link Group Step 1 Hold down Mode Step 2 Press the Link Group button The Link Group Window appears on the screen above Feeds that currently belong to link groups are shown with yellow links Step 3 Select the first feed of the group Its key lights up and all other buttons disappear except for 7 before and 7 after the one you selected maximum 8 feeds per group Step 4 Press one of the feed selection keys to make it the last feed of the group Link groups can only include track feeds or live feeds not a mixture of both Link groups can only include up to eight members which must have contiguous numbers e g 3 to 10 Step 6 Select one of the following options all defaults applies pan settings to each member to set the link group into a surround format as described above under Link Group Format All defaults also applies the feed parameter values of the first member of the group to all the members even if Relative Groups is selected Parameters modified are fader level pan EQ dynamics aux sends inserts and direct out state default pans appl
111. BLUE Play key causes Play Again the last Play command to be repeated BLUE Stop key locates to the timecode where Play was last started BLUE REW key causes a 4 second Review i e the transport jumps back 4 seconds and starts to play Double pressing the Stop key also initiates Play Again Jumping Pressing and releasing the Left or Right Jump Key locates the transport to the next target point on any selected track The types of targets in force can be set by clicking Edit Settings Jump To and selecting any number of the available options which are explained below Holding down a Jump Key displays a new layout offering multiple targets imin 2min amin 10min Mark Range 30min ihour 2hour Jump Jump Range locates to the IN point of the range if the Jump Left button is used otherwise to the OUT point Jump Project locates the start of the project if Jump Left is used otherwise to the end of the project Jump Mark Jumps the next or previous Mark see Add Mark for more details about Marks Jump Bend gt Jumps the next or previous Bend Point see Bender in the chapter on Time Domain Processing Jump times gt allows you to move the transport by a time interval Fairlight QUANTUM Page 63 TRANSPORT November 13 2014 Jumping with the Mouse Use the Toolbar jumps to reach strategic places in the project Previous Previous Add Mark Next Clip Next Mark Mark Clip A Mark is a stored timecode point in the pr
112. Bend Points Step 2 Click the following menu item Process ClipBender gt Remove Bend Point Note you can remove all Bend Points in a clip Fairlight QUANTUM Page 161 TIME DOMAIN PROCESSING November 13 2014 by pressing the Remove A11 soft key or by clicking Process ClipBender gt Remove All Bend Points When a Bend point is removed any time compression around it is also removed When all Bend Points are removed the clip goes back to normal playback apart from Pitch Bend see below To move an existing Bend Point Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Locate to the Bend Point using the Jump Keys Bend points must be selected as a Jump Target To do this click Hold down either of the Jump keys and select Bend Points from the Pad or Click Edit Settings gt Jump To gt Bend Points Press the Move Soft key Jog to the left or right to the new desired position for the Bend Point Alternatively Step 1 Step 2 Locate to the Bend Point using the Arrow keys Bend points must be selected as a Jump Target To do this click Edit Settings gt Jump To gt Bend Points Hold down the ctri key and drag the point to the right or left Note If some time compression has already been set up around the Bend Point you are moving the time will be changed and you will see the waveform distorting Compress Expand Time Arround Bend Points There are two ways to compress the time around a bend point called offset and warp To
113. But if you want to get it exactly back to the center use the command Setup Reset Playhead Cut and Paste Whole Clip To cut and paste a clip Fairlight QUANTUM Page 103 EDITING November 13 2014 Step 1 Select a track and move a clip under the cursor The clip is red because it is touching the cursor Step 2 Press the cut erase key so that Cut is selected Step 3 Press the cut clip key We see the clip s ghost Its a picture of the clipboard ready to be pasted in Step 4 Select another track and or move to another location The ghost shows where the clipboard contents can be pasted Step 5 Press the Enter key to paste the clipboard The clip is pasted Fairlight QUANTUM Page 104 EDITING November 13 2014 Head This time we ll only work with the Head of the clip That is the part before the cursor Step 1 Select a track and move a clip under the cursor The clip is red because it is touching the cursor Step 2 Press the cut erase key so that Cut is selected Step 3 Press the cut head key Only the head goes on to the clipboard Step 4 Select another track and or move to another location The ghost shows a head shaped clipboard ready to be pasted The original tail is now Blue because its track is not selected Step 5 Press the Enter key to paste the clipboard Fairlight QUANTUM Page 105 EDITING November 13 2014 The clipboard former head is pasted
114. CTILE CONTROL November 13 2014 Central Tactile Control Introduction QUANTUM uses the QUANTUM center section for editing basic signal processing setup and config functions monitoring plus automation This chapter describes the use of this tactile controller in detail This chapter is a great one to read right through as it gives you an orientation to working in the QUANTUM environment Terminology QUANTUM center section includes the following sections FAIRLIGHT XSTREAM a Fixed Keys 0 O00000 000000 BD x Key FXSt1 we rtyetS FxXStereo 1 FXMono TrackS Track6 Track7 Track8 Track9 Tracki0 Tracki1 Tracki2 Tracki3 Track192 Tracki5 Track16 Tracki7 Track18 Track19 Track20 Track21 Track22 Track23 Track24 A ee ceases HUOUOOUL LERE UII O en E o O I7 Fixed Keys Picture Keys Jog Wheel Bottom Row Keys Fairlight QUANTUM Page 12 CENTRAL TACTILE CONTROL November 13 2014 Fixed Keys Fixed keys have two main tasks Most of the time they function as track selection keys or soft keys whose function is shown immediately above or below them in the Pad screen area When the need arises they become QWERTY keys At this time they light up to show the printing on their surfaces Picture Keys The Picture Keys can change their appearance as well as their function This enables them to be used in a great number of different ways Key Layouts The Picture Keys and Fixe
115. Copies the selected clip or range to the clipboard Cuts the head of the clip at the cursor position to the clipboard Cuts the tail of the clip at the cursor position to the clipboard Copy Head Copies the head of the clip at the cursor position to the clipboard Copy Tail Copies the tail of the clip at the cursor position to the clipboard Paste Ctra Pastes a copy of the clipboard at the current position Paste Special Allows characteristics of the first clip on the clipboard to be pasted Erase Delete Erases the selected clip or range Erase Head Erases the head of the clip at the cursor position Erase Tail Erases the tail of the clip at the cursor position Restore Head Extends the clip head to use all the recorded audio Restore Tail Extends the clip tail to use all the recorded audio Check Media Size Used for media that was imported while still recording opens up tail Split Clips Splits the selected clips into two at the cursor Join Split Heals split in audio clips must be positioned together Cleave Multi Channel Clips Unlinks linked clips Restore Multi Channel Relinks previously linked clips Rotate Layers Cycles clip layers sending top layer to bottom Reverse Rotate Layers Reverse cycles clip layers bringing bottom to top Space Clips Evenly Spaces the selected clips evenly Copy Project Segment Copies the range including all clips and automation Groups the selected clips into one clip object per track Ungroups the selected
116. ENSE This EULA grants you the following license e You may use the SOFTWARE only on the DEVICE e NOT FAULT TOLERANT THE SOFTWARE IS NOT FAULT TOLERANT Fairlight AU HAS INDEPENDENTLY DETERMINED HOW TO USE THE SOFTWARE IN THE DEVICE AND Fairlight AU S SOFTWARE SUPPLIERS HAVE RELIED UPON Fairlight AU TO CONDUCT SUFFICIENT TESTING TO DETERMINE THAT THE SOFTWARE IS SUITABLE FOR SUCH USE e NO WARRANTIES FOR THE SOFTWARE THE SOFTWARE is provided AS IS and with all faults THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY PERFORMANCE ACCURACY AND EFFORT INCLUDING LACK OF NEGLIGENCE IS WITH YOU ALSO THERE IS NO WARRANTY AGAINST INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT OF THE SOFTWARE OR AGAINST INFRINGEMENT IF YOU HAVE RECEIVED ANY WARRANTIES REGARD ING THE DEVICE OR THE SOFTWARE THOSE WARRANTIES DO NOT ORIGINATE FROM AND ARE NOT BINDING ON Fairlight AU S SOFTWARE SUPPLIERS e Note on Java Support The SOFTWARE may contain support for programs written in Java Java technology is not fault tolerant and is not designed manufactured or intended for use or resale as online control equipment in hazardous environments requiring fail safe performance such as in the operation of nuclear facilities aircraft navigation or communication systems air traffic control direct life support machines or weapons systems in which the failure of Java technology could lead directly to death personal injury or severe physical or environmental damage Sun Micr
117. E_JUMP_LEFT CID_SW_MACKIE_RIGHT CID_SW_RNGE_JUMP_RIGHT CID_SW_MACKIE_MARKER CID_SW_GAP_FROM CID_SW_MACKIE_NUDGE CID_SW_GAP_TO CID_SW_MACKIE_SCRUB CID_SW_SHUT_JOG turns Jog on CID_JOG_MACKIE_WHEEL CID_JO_JOGGER this assigns the HUI jogger to the Post V5 0 jogger CID_SW_MACKIE_READ CID_SW_EN_FADER_2 enables faders for automation CID_SW_MACKIE_WRITE CID_SW_EN_MUTE_2 enables mutess for automation CID_SW_MACKIE_TOUCH CID_SW_EN_PAN_1 enables pan parameters for automation CID_SW_MACKIE_TRIM CID_SW_EN_EQ GROUP enables EQ parameters for automation CID_SW_MACKIE_LATCH CID_SW_EN_DYN_GROUP enables dynamics parameters for automation CID_SW_MACKIE_GROUP CID_SW_EN_AUX_GROUP enables aux send parameters for automation Examining this line CID_ SW_ MACKIE _STOP CID_SW_STOP we see that the first part is the HUI stop key and the second part is the Post V5 0 soft key This will cause the HUI stop key to work on Post V5 0 There are some HUI keys not mentioned in this remap file They are listed below CID_SW_MACKIE_BANK_DOWN CID_SW_MACKIE_BANK_UP CID_SW_MACKIE_CHANNEL_DOWN CID_SW_MACKIE_CHANNEL_UP CID_SW_MACKIE_UP CID_SW_MACKIE_DOWN CID_SW_MACKIE_SHIFT CID_SW_MACKIE_CONTROL CID_SW_MACKIE_F1 CID_SW_MACKIE_F2 CID_SW_MACKIE_F3 CID_SW_MACKIE_F4 CID_SW_MACKIE_F5 CID_SW_MACKIE_F6 CID_SW_MACKIE_F7 CID_SW_MACKIE_F8 CID_SW_MACKIE_MIDI_TRACKS CID_SW_MACKIE_INPUTS CID_SW_MACKIE_AUDIO_TRACKS CID_SW_MACKIE_AUDIO_INSTRUMENT Fairlight QUANTUM Page 35
118. Editing Multiple Takes 78 ADR ieee eae eRe ene oe eee ee ee ee 79 Background ReCOrding csccccsseeeeeeeeeens 79 ADR oer 83 PP OCUCU OV 22 ai sanea 83 TG ADR EiS toirnis 83 Import Cue List from a Text File 83 Import from CSV File cccceeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 84 Adding Cues Manually cccccceeeseeeeeeeees 84 ADR Preference ccccsscceccseseeeceeeeeeneeees 86 The ADR Display secesiiecs toiiiateshaniternccraaciee ss 87 Exporting the ADR List ccccssseeeeseeeeees 89 EDITING rioris eerie 91 Basic Concepts the Audio Clip 91 Other Clip Types ccccceccsseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 92 Editing Methods arcis tna 92 Edn TUON d iisa 92 Tactile Editing Detailed Description 103 TRE CUPS OV ics tees See etaeiaeeen 103 Cut and PASC ince dea cted enacts Cosaectearieictanbors 103 CODY eri a N 109 e e e S A E ee an AE A 109 Edit Soft Key Commands eeeeeeeeees 109 Paste SPECIA irae a 111 TAMIA E E A AE E E E 111 gt o E E E E E EE E A eee 113 NUGGET Seen eee 113 Fade and Crossfade ccccsseseceeeesseeeeeeees 114 Clip LEVEL cecccccccssesceeeceeeseeeeeseeeseeeeessaaees 123 Clip EqQualiSation ccccccccsccceeessseeeeeseeeeens 124 Editing on Multiple Layers c cccceeeeees 127 The Track M Nnu cccccscccssseeceeseeeeeeeseeeees 128 The Move Me nu cccccccsseeeseeeeeceeee
119. Exit from the File Menu or by clicking the Edit Screen close box or by the keystroke combination Alt F4 when the edit screen is in focus click anywhere on that screen to bring it into focus if necessary Step 2 If a project is open the system will prompt you to save any changes that have occurred since it was opened PSS ti x The current project has been modified ee Would you like bo sawe it now i Mo Cancel Fairlight QUANTUM Page 9 QUANTUM OVERVIEW November 13 2014 Click Yes if you want to save the changes in the project This may take a minute or so during which a progress bar will grow in size Step 3 You may now power down the QUANTUM surface and shut down your PC if desired It is recommended that the audio interface boxes remain powered up unless you are dismantling the installation Graphic Themes QUANTUM allows a choice of colour schemes which are called themes Three themes are provided To change theme Step 1 Click the Setup menu item above the Edit Screen Step 2 Click General Preferences Display Active Theme Step 3 Choose one of the themes from the list The Solo and Evo themes are dark grey while the Classic theme is light grey blue and white lt is possible to build your own theme If you wish to do this contact Fairlight in Australia Fairlight QUANTUM Page 10 SELECTION AND CALLING November 13 2014 Selection and Calling Selection Types There ar
120. FAIRLIGHT QUANTUM Post V5 0 Software Operator Reference Manual 13 November 2014 Issue 001 Important Notice COPYRIGHT The material in this document is copyright to Fairlight AU Pty Ltd and may not be quoted or reproduced in any form without written permission from the company Fairlight is a trademark of Fairlight AU Pty Ltd All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners LIMITED WARRANTY POLICY All the software and hardware provided with or purchased especially for Fairlight products has been tested for functionality Fairlight AU Pty Ltd will make its best efforts to correct reported defects for future releases subject to technical practicalities Fairlight AU will also replace any defective media on which software has been delivered provided that the item to be replaced is returned to the dealer who supported the product within 90 days of purchase Fairlight AU Pty Ltd makes no warranty or representation either expressed or implied with respect to the system s performance or fitness for a particular purpose In no event will Fairlight AU Pty Ltd be liable for direct or indirect damages arising from any defect in the product or its documentation Further Fairlight AU Pty Ltd will not accept any liability for any programs sounds audio recording or sequences stored in or used with Fairlight products including the cost of recovery of such data Product features and specifications are subject to change wi
121. File COMMANGS cccceeeseeeeeeeeees 314 PRO ECUFONM AUS sesaosan ys 315 MT eG OJ CCS i cirri 317 Dine ProjecIS scene 318 Waveform Profiles ccccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 321 Revealing the Project File eeeeeeee 321 BACKUP FIE S cresian ae a aa 321 Automatic File Saving cccccsssseceeeeseeeeeees 322 WINGO File ete osneersed vanaeesoseveuncdsptadeseastweecsenvade 322 VIGCO PIGS iccssnezecosncenencoeiuekeceeane caunsueransees 323 Typical QUANTUM Drive Configuration 323 Designating Media DeVICE cccee 324 Creating New Projects cccccsseeeeeeeeeeeees 324 Backup Project to Folder cccsseeeeeeeees 325 Media SCANNING ores 325 Detailed Media Managemenrt 000 325 Importing Files sereccctwinnchs sceaadtinatetewmcuseatiivet 329 EX OOM aaa a tosis 331 EDL Managemett ccccseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeees 335 SYNC AND MACHINE CONTROL 340 Modu UO eni E 340 Setting up MAChINGS cccccesseeeeeeeeeeeeees 340 Machine Control IndicatorsS ccce 345 Timecode Generator ccccccesseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 345 Putting Machines Online c 00ccceeeees 346 Editing with Machine Control 346 Timecode Setup cccccsseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeaeeeeees 347 HUI SLAVE MODE ccseeeeeeeees 350 Modu OM a cei aries eet aes 350 De WO D EAE A TE ST 350 MID MDC VIC CS orison e 350 Remap FNC setaseaWocls
122. If you choose a number higher than the actual number of armed tracks the system will record the number of files shown in the Armed Tracks box The actual armed tracks will occupy as many of these recordings as they need and the other recordings will record zeroes but are ready for you to arm at any time whereupon their inputs will be switched into the recording tracks If you choose a number lower than the actual number of armed tracks the system will record the lowest numbered armed tracks You can change the number of tracks to be recorded while a recording is in progress To do this move the slider then click the Apply button where Go and Stop usually are Record Source Main Bus Send You may select the Cached or Linear checkbox for Main Bus Send In either case the system will be ready to record the output of the Main Bus one recording stream for each element of that bus If you select Cached the last few minutes of audio will be continuously stored on disk controlled by the Cache Length slider If you select Linear the Main Bus output will be recorded continuously from the time you press Go until the time you press Stop Armed Tracks Harvest Clipboard Paste You may select the Cached or Linear checkbox for Armed Tracks In either case the system will be ready to record the inputs to a number of armed tracks as described under Armed Tracks Slider above one recording stream for each track This is used to g
123. In point to be then click the From button or keyboard shortcut Move the transport to a time where you want the Range Out point to be then click the To button or keyboard shortcut t Click the Range button to toggle the range on and off or keyboard shortcut r Selecting Clips not Clips cannot be selected as such with the mouse They can be edited using their 7 points as described below included in a range with other clips or dragged to different places But selection is always and only determined by clips touching the playhead or by inclusion in the Range At this time they are shown in red and are targeted by commands from menus and from the keyboard Moving Clips Clips can be dragged horizontally and vertically with the mouse This changes the clip timecode and track respectively When there is no range simply click and drag any single clip to another time or track When there is a range click on any selected red clip or part of a clip and drag it all other red clips will also be dragged along with the one you clicked To constrain movement to only vertical or only horizontal press the Shift button after clicking with the mouse but before moving the clips Fairlight QUANTUM Page 143 EDITING November 13 2014 7 Point Editing Each clip can display 7 points that can be moved with the mouse The points are displayed when the mouse hovers over the clip Fade Out point Fade In point Fa
124. LE MANAGEMENT November 13 2014 MT Projects The MT Project format is designed for backward compatibility with Fairlight QDC systems running software version 19 2 11 or higher QUANTUM can also open MT files created on older Fairlight systems dating back to MFX3 systems running rev 15 x software If you are planning to swap projects with QDC systems always use the MT format when creating new projects Recording Files FUFs When using the MT project format on a QUANTUM system new audio recordings are stored in FUF files FUF stands for Fairlight Universal Format and a FUF file acts as an audio container with many individual audio files bundled inside it FUFs are saved as soon as the recording is complete At this point the audio media is written to disk but it is still not safe The clip s that appear in the edit screen immediately after recording are the ONLY reference to the recorded material They are stored in the Project MT file and until that file is saved the audio is not secure FUFs can only grow to a maximum 4GB to maintain QDC compatibility and new FUF files are generated automatically as required FUFs are automatically named based on their parent project So a project named MyProject MT might have FUF files named MyProject_001 FUF MyProject_002 FUF MyProject_003 FUF and so on FUF files are automatically created in the same subfolder as the MT project You must not delete FUF files u
125. MIXING November 13 2014 e Pan a miniature display of the pan surround field with the red pan position is displayed The pan position changes in real time Track T z Buses The fader levels of the Main sub and auxiliary buses are displayed Signal level meters for the Main bus are also displayed Fat Channel The Fat Channel provides a detailed display of the signal processing and routing for the called channel lts only control functions are the fader and the Pan dot while the other graphics are for display only Main M ad i Right clicking in the EQ DYN or PAN sections causes display of the Zoom panels See below The Fat Channel shows a detailed display of the parameters for the currently called signal path A signal path may be a mono live or track feed a bus or a multichannel surround format link group which can be selected and modified from a single set of controls e The user and system names of the signal path are displayed at the top left The input box at the left of the signal path indicates the format or element name of the path and the user name and system name of the physical input from which it is patched e The input meter shows the signal level at the input of the signal path e Ifa track feed is selected the input fader level is shown e The EQ display shows a graph of the equaliser response e The dynamics display shows the composite transfer fun
126. NSEXTRA AKTUELL 13 00 2014 10 29 12 00 58 00 00 QUANTEL GER QTUBE 17018 EINSEXTRA AKTUELL 14 00 2014 10 29 13 00 58 00 00 QUANTEL GER QTUBE 17019 EINSEXTRA AKTUELL 15 00 2014 10 29 14 00 58 00 00 QUANTEL GER QTUBE 17023 EINSEXTRA AKTUELL 16 00 2014 10 29 15 00 58 00 00 QUANTEL GER QTUBE Step 2 Enter text in the Search field You may click on Title Owner Category or Clip ID shown above the Search field to choose the database field you are searching Please consult the QTube website for information on the use of strings and wildcards If there are search results you may click on them to display a thumbnail in the Smart Pane and also some database data for that record Placing Video Clips To place a video clip in your timeline Step 1 Ensure that you have a Pyxis Track set up see the Chapter on Video Tracks for details Step 2 Position the transport where you would like the clip to start Step 3 Double click the item in the Search Results list Fairlight QUANTUM Page 178 GROUPING November 13 2014 Grouping Introduction Grouping is a fast and convenient method of controlling more than one signal path from a single fader or parameter control There are two types of groups Link Groups and Edit Groups Link groups are designed for controlling groups of feeds in multichannel formats Link groups simplify many tasks associated with working in surround formats and share many of the oper
127. NTUM Page 3 QUANTUM OVERVIEW QUANTUM Overview Signal Flow Diagram e Ley Ley Ll Patch Record Process aE Mix Patch Edit Assign Inputs Analog 1 3 4 Digital Live Feeds E 2 3 3 4 4 MADI 1 3 A Analog Digital MADI 1 1 1 Outputs 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 A 4 Monitor Contig E Control Room Studio Speakers Main Main Alt Alt1 Alt2 Alt2 Fairlight QUANTUM Page 4 November 13 2014 1 I O Configuration 2 Patching connects paths in the system see page 55 3 Recording see page 0 4 Editing see page 91 5 Processing see page 196 6 Bus Assignment assigns channels to Buses see page 194 COND TACTILE ALL SOLO 7 Mixing see page 189 8 Bus Format mono stereo 5 1 etc see 190 Mix Automation see page 236 COND 9 Monitor Configuration sets up speakers for control room and studio see page 280 EJ QUANTUM OVERVIEW November 13 2014 QUANTUM is configurable with up to 192 disk recorder tracks up to 212 physical inputs and outputs It integrates recording and editing capability with a fully featured fully automated mixing engine capable of delivering multiple final mixes in any format up to 5 1 surround In addition it provides recording and basic editing of video in a variety of formats up to and including HD Signal paths may be configured in formats from mono up to 5 1 Surround Tracks and Live Feeds For CC
128. NTUM system must know which MIDI devices to expect These are written into the file HUISetup txt which is normally found here C Program Files Fairlight FMC Data Open the HUlSetup txt file It already contains the necessary setup for three HUI devices a Roland Edirol interface a MOTU Microlite 4 port MIDI interface and a Tranzport controller this is for wireless control of basic functions only If you want to make life easy for yourself buy an Edirol or a MOTU Microlite and just enable it by removing the hashes in front of the lines in HUISetup The following procedure assumes you have some other kind of HUI controller Your task now is to find out the names of its MIDI ports and write them into the HUISetup file in the same way as the existing entries If this sounds too complicated get your Fairlight service provider to help it s a one time setup in most cases First you ll need to identify the MIDI devices attached to your system Connect your HUI controller via MIDI or USB To see a list of the MIDI devices seen by Post V5 0 we ll use our debugging program MSAT Start MSAT before starting FMC the Mixer program If Post V5 0 is already running stop FMC as follows Fairlight QUANTUM Page 350 HUI SLAVE MODE November 13 2014 Step 1 Click on the Mixer screen to give it focus Step 2 Type ctr1 Shift Q Step 3 Type y to confirm closure of FMC Start MSAT using Start gt All Programs Fairlight gt FMC FMC Utils gt
129. O 00 15 11 00 00 02 20 Track 2 2 OO 00 10 29 00 00 14 02 O0 00 03 03 Track z 1 O0 00 12 02 O0 00 14 11 O0 00 02 09 Recorded Audio 3 As the transport moves to different places or as you select different tracks the Takes display updates at regular intervals to show the current stack of clips at the cursor position The top layer is selected but you may move the selection downwards using the Jog Wheel or the and buttons Pressing the pop soft key or clicking the on screen pop button brings the selected clip to the top of the stack making it audible Other soft key commands in the Takes menu Rotate sends the top clip to the bottom Reverse Rotate brings the bottom clip to the top On Off toggles Clip Layering on and off Note you can use all the commands whether or not Clip Layering is displayed The Track Menu QUANTUM offers a group of commands that work between tracks called the Track Menu To access the Track Menu hold down Mode and press Track Menu Swap This command uses a range exclusively It swaps all layers of audio between the source and destination tracks Step 1 Select the source track for swapping Step 2 Create a range in which you want to swap the audio with another track using the From and To buttons Step 3 Press the swap soft key Step 4 Choose the destination track for swapping The audio in the range all layers is swapped between the source track and the destination track you selecte
130. Out 4 of 5 name Microsoft GS Wavetable SW Synth GDB 09 43 00 gt MIDI Out device 4 GDB 09 43 00 gt manufacturer 1 GDB 09 43 00 gt product 102 GDB 09 43 00 gt version 5 10 GDB 09 43 00 gt name Microsoft GS Wavetable SW Synth GDB 09 43 00 gt Using MIMidi Out 0 A number of MIDI devices may be presented not necessarily with useful names this depends on the driver for the device At the end the line GDB 09 43 00 gt Using MIMidi Out 0 tells you which MIDI device the system is using If this is clearly not your HUI device nothing is going to work In the example given it is possible to see that Microsoft GS Wavetable SW Synth has not been selected Remap File If you want transport control or any other key events to work you must place a file called remap txt in the following folder Fairlight QUANTUM Page 352 HUI SLAVE MODE November 13 2014 C Program Files Fairlight F MC Data User username Where username is the log on name used on your computer The remap file takes keys coming in from the HUI device and routes them to keys on your Post V5 0 system Here is the text in one remap file CID_SW_MACKIE_STOP CID_SW_STOP CID_SW_MACKIE_REWIND CID_SW_REW CID_SW_MACKIE_FAST_FWD CID_SW_FF CID_SW_MACKIE_PLAY CID_SW_PLAY CID_SW_MACKIE_RECORD CID_SW_REC CID_SW_MACKIE_ALT CID_SW_BLUE_1 Blue key CID_SW_MACKIE_ENTER CID_SW_ENTER CID_SW_MACKIE_ZOOM CID_SW_ZOOM CID_SW_MACKIE_LEFT CID_ SW_RNG
131. Page 89 ADR November 13 2014 00 02 19 19 00 03 19 19 Bill froggs are really cool 00 04 57 07 00 09 42 18 Do not look now Fairlight QUANTUM Page 90 EDITING November 13 2014 Editing Basic Concepts the Audio Clip An Audio Clip plays audio from a single Media File It may play all of that file or only part Audio Clip a ee 00 04 20 08 MURIE ETAT OO0S 0000 00 05 16 00 oo 0S Audioallip 1 Haate h Poem ein te A A Media file on disk the highlighted section is played by the clip The Audio Clip has properties that you can change by editing Audio Clip 1 a8 0 dE J Name Head trim Fade in Fade in Fade out Fade out Tail trim Curve Point Point Curve e Head Trim the first audio sample of the media file played by the clip e Tail Trim the last audio sample of the media file played by the clip e Clip Sync Point one of the clip s audio samples is locked to a timecode position e Fade In Point the place where the Fade In is completed e Fade Out Point the place where the Fade Out starts e Fade Curves the shape of the Fade In and Fade Out e Clip Level a single level value for the clip e Clip EQ a four band parametric equaliser for each clip Fairlight QUANTUM Page 91 EDITING November 13 2014 e Also clip Name Colour Grouping Multi channel format etc Other Clip Types Video Clips Video clips are much the same as audio clips but have fewer editable properties e Head
132. REW controls work in a similar manner to a tape machine Press FF and REW multiple times to accelerate through 8 24 60 150 and 360 times play speed To enter record press the REC and PLAY keys together To exit record press any other transport button Hold down Record to display special commands on the soft keys Jog Commands Jog is a mode where the transport moves as you turn the Jog Wheel Both video and audio move along in sync To enter Jog mode do any of the following e Press the Jog key e Click the Jog button above the Edit Screen a Holding the BLUE key while jogging increases the jog speed by five times Loop Jog Loop Jog is a unique transport mode where jogging becomes a playspeed loop which is moved backwards and forwards It s great for detecting pitch changes in music sibilance in speech or other changes in tone To toggle this on and off hold down the Jog key and press the Loop Jog soft key to choose Loop On or Off Other options in this menu Follow Zoom Toggles follow zoom on and off When on the gear ratio of the jog wheel is affected by the zoom setting this is the default mode Gear this setting affects how fast the Jog Wheel needs to be turned to achieve a particular transport speed Mouse Jogging The mouse can also be used to move the transport Simply right click anywhere and drag horizontally to move the transport Audio is heard while this takes place IF the transport is in Jo
133. T Bank and Macro keys FAIRLIGH This key is used to display the selection bank for mix parameters in the Pad It can be used in latched or momentary style Latched example Step 1 Press and release the Pad button quickly The Pad enters Edit Mode and the following display appears Fairlight QUANTUM Page 14 CENTRAL TACTILE CONTROL November 13 2014 Track Track Track Track Track Track 6 T m g 10 11 Tk 2 Tk amp Tk Tk 3 Tk i0 Tk ii Band 1 2 Band 3 4 Filters Plug ins Page 1 Page 2 Page 3 Control Parameter Sub Groups Pages The five buttons at the lower right are used to choose the parameter group for the encoders The buttons at the lower left choose pages of controls for the parameter group Step 2 Press the Path button and observe changes in the encoder values and the page buitons at left Step 3 Press the Page 2 button and observe changes in the encoder values Step 4 Press the Pad button again to exit Momentary example Step 1 Following on from the previous routine Press and hold the Pad button The Pad enters Edit Mode again and the same display appears Step 2 Continue to hold Pad down and press EQ The changes are the reverse to the previous set Step 3 Release the Pad button NOTE While the Pad is in Edit Mode the upper fixed keys still select tracks Each time you select a track if it wasn t already selected it becomes the Current Track and its parameters appear in the pad
134. TER Sample Rate Conversion Sometimes the files you import are at a different sample rate than the project When this happens Post V5 0 automatically turns on real time sample rate conversion to ensure the audio has the same pitch and duration as the original Clips subject to sample rate conversion are marked with a black sr label The quality of sample rate conversion may be varied using the dialog Setup General Preferences gt General Live Sample Fate Conversion f Fast High Quality Fast Puts a small load on the computer system but doesn t sound so good Very useful when there are a lot of clips to be sample rate converted or a lot of plug ins in the project High Quality Sounds good but loads down the CPU If you need good quality and have lots of clips to sample rate convert you can localise the media which performs the best quality sample rate conversion and re references the clip Step 1 Select the clips that need to be sample rate converted Step 2 Issue the command Process Localise Audio Use handles if the clip has been edited and might need to be re extended Select all clips using this media before localising and the system will only produce a single piece of media which they can all reference Export Exporting Audio You can export audio from a Project in the following formats Fairlight QUANTUM Page 331 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT November 13 2014 e WAV e Broadcast WAV e Aif e AES 31
135. The Nudge function is normally in Clip mode i e clips are nudged To toggle it into Sync mode press the Nudge Sync soft key so that its colour changes to bright cyan Fade and Crossfade The fade button allows fades to be applied non destructively to the heads and tails of clips The fades are performed by the system in real time as the audio is output from the machine Fades can be created on the fly relative to the playhead or they can be created and or modified on multiple clips at once Fades are applied from the picture keys soft keys and from the PC screen E r i 3 0 set Duration Trim 6 _ 00 00 00 20 do IV Shape Duration 10 00 00 00 08 10 Fade Presets 15 Duration AS 20 20 50 50 The Editing screen displays fade information in the Smart Pane at the top of the monitor This is used to issue commands as well as illustrate fade shapes curves Using Picture Keys Fade Head One of the simplest fades can be achieved as follows Step 1 Select a track and move a clip under the cursor Step 2 Press the fade button if not already on Step 3 Press the fade head button This creates a fade from the start of the clip to the cursor position The shape of the fade can be seen above this will be described later but the Duration is not used Instead the duration is set by the cursor position If you are happy with your current fade shape using fade head is a fast and simple way to
136. Trim the first audio sample of the media file played by the clip e Tail Trim the last audio sample of the media file played by the clip e Clip Sync Point one of the clip s audio samples is locked to a timecode position e Fade In Point the place where the Fade In is completed e Fade Out Point the place where the Fade Out starts e Also clip Name The properties above can be edited by the same methods as audio clips and at the same time For these edits selecting a video track makes its clips into targets for editing They are fully described in the chapter Pyxis Track starting on page 294 Editing Methods There are two editing methods commands and mouse dragging Commands are further divided into tactile edits button pressing and Jog Wheel turning and mouse edits menu items and toolbar button clicking This section describes tactile editing while the next one describes mouse dragging and mouse edits Editing Tutorial This section takes you through some common editing procedures Cut and Paste Overview In this menu we cut audio to the clipboard then paste it using the Enter key The cutting action is performed by the cut head cut tail and cut clip or cut range buttons Note copy and paste is performed exactly the same way as cut and paste except that you start by pressing the copy mode button instead of the cut mode button Note erase Is similar to cut without the paste except that the clipboard
137. UG INS REWIRE AND EXTERNAL PROCESSING November 13 2014 Track insert Insert Bypass es ee oo Use the mouse to select one of the plug ins Click on the Move Up Of Move Down icon to change the processing order Click on the Insert Bypass icon of any plug in to bypass its processing Using the Library Saving a Plug in preset in the Library is a great way of managing plug ins You can save any plug in or chain of plug ins with their current values as a Library preset This makes it very easy to load plug ins into any track or live feed partly because the Library page shows an array of named presets at the same time For instructions on using the Library see page 233 Sending an Aux to a Plug in Patch an Aux Output to the Input of a Live Feed using the Patch I O screen Use a stereo Aux and two Live Feeds if the Plug in is stereo shown schematically below a Aux 3L Sux IR Sux 4 Aux gR Multi Patch AUx BLUS Out Add a Plug in to the Live Feed using the method described above Now all channels feeding the Aux will be routed through the VST Plug in to the output of the Live Feed Assign the Live Feed to the Bus where the Plug in output is required Fairlight QUANTUM Page 271 PLUG INS REWIRE AND EXTERNAL PROCESSING November 13 2014 Controlling Plug ins on the Pad When the Plug in button is pressed the Pad rotary controls are focused on the current Plug in Each rotary contro
138. UI SLAVE MODE November 13 2014 fae MSAT_O 5 x Fie View Hel Miz Meg All Filter Te 0z m Hees Sus Para Para ster E Cl ae ttl Gib FEEEE e om B we it eo 14252220 Error ShortMsg 14 52 24 Error Shorthsg 14252229 Error ShortMsg 14 52 33 Error ShortHsg 14252237 Error ShortMsag 14 52 42 Error ShortMsg Type ctrl SHIFT 0 then turn on Control message display using the Debug Switch Control dialog as shown below set the switch value to 1 Then close the dialog Debug Switch Control Debug Switch Control Msg display bi a Switch Value hil Press a HUI key and observe the MSAT display It will show you the name of the key lol x File View Help is Msg All Filter Te Mig Meg All Filter Te bk Lil oll e Sys Para Para ster m Gen Sys Para Para ster k a note tly thy Set Set Get Test e n B we it g DB 14 55 25 gt Ctrl CID SW MACKIE Fl gt 0 DB 14 59 30 gt Error from ShortHsg 5 DB 14 55 32 gt Ctrl CID SW MACKIE Fl 1 DB 14 59 32 gt Ctrl CID SW MACKIE F1 a DB 14 59 33 gt Ctrl CID SW MACKIE Fe 1 DB 14 59 33 gt Ctrl CID SW MACKIE Fe J DE 14 59 34 gt Error from ShortHsg 5 Stopped z Ready ackets Tx 197 Z In the example shown the keys CID_SW_MACKIE_F1 and CID_SW_MACKIE_F2 have been pressed and released hence two events per key Fairlight QUANTUM Page 355 HUI SLAVE MODE November 13
139. Unassigned Unassigned Unassigned OMNI Unassigned Unassigned Patching is done in three steps 1 Load an instrument and patch a controller to it 2 Patch the instrument s audio outputs to tracks or lives so you can hear it 3 Patch a controller to be recorded on a track and patch the track s output to an instrument to play it Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 On the input left side load an instrument using the Add command Choose any of your installed instruments from the dropdown menu that is displayed The GUI for that instrument will appear on the screen Now assign a MIDI controller MIDI Device In and choose the MIDI channel or OMNI that the instrument will play it will not respond to other MIDI channels from the controller The MIDI controller you assign will play the instrument live To hear the output of that instrument it must be patched to one or more Track or Live Feed inputs This is done on the Patch I O page in the normal way The output right side shows all the tracks you have converted to MIDI Choose the MIDI controller MIDI Device In to be recorded on each track Normally this is the same controller for all tracks which would be your MIDI keyboard Patch the track output to any instrument you have loaded Metronome To set up a metronome use Setup gt Bars and Beats Setup Fairlight QUANTUM Page 309 MIDI TRACKS November 13 2014 Bars and Beats Setup T
140. Us UL O08 We 10 2 e0 Mm Turn the Jog Wheel so that the Duration is increased The Yellow region expands accordingly You may also change the X Point value labelled or the X Level value labelled dB This can be done by tabbing to those fields and using the Or by MATER n Oo Soo O00 00 00 h Ogee 00 O0 08 fe Second clip To apply the specified crossfade press or click the button in the dialog See more details about crossfading later in this chapter Fairlight QUANTUM Page 153 EDITING November 13 2014 Clip Equalisation QUANTUM provides clip based four band parametric Equalisation plus shelving which can be applied to a single clip or range of clips within a Project EQ is performed by the system on a copy of the original media therefore applying an EQ change does not affect the audio data on disk The clip based EQ is independent of the track feed mixer EQ Note Clip EQ is a multi track operation Applying EQ Step 1 Click the clip EQ button in the Edit Toolbar or click view Smart Pane Clip EQ e Clip EQ Button Step 2 Locate the cursor over the clip or define a Range of clips Step 3 To start editing drag one of the curve points in the EQ display see below Step 4 Change parameters as you like listening to the changes by playing the transport over the clip you may use solo and mute or fader levels to concentrate on a one or a few Clips Parameters can be changing
141. Using the track arming buttons you can have individual control of which tracks are in record The methods for arming and disarming tracks are described earlier in this chapter on page 71 Auto Recording Overview QUANTUM allows you to record sections of track automatically with the transport doing the pre roll punch in and punch out This is done by making a range using the From and To keys then using the Record Range command on the Record menu Patch inputs to one or more tracks and arm them Auto Rec uses a Pre Roll For information about setting pre roll see earlier in this chapter page 77 Auto Rec Operation Make a range as follows Locate to the desired in point and press the From key Locate to the desired out point and press the To key Hold down the Record button to display recording options on soft keys Press the rec range soft key to do an automatic recording of the range Recording and Editing Multiple Takes Introduction In many situations we need to record multiple takes of the same audio in sync to picture or existing audio Examples are Post Sync dialog ADR Foley and music recording QUANTUM allows you to record multiple takes on a single track then easily audition and edit them into shape Recording Multiple Takes When recording a section of audio in sync with picture you can punch in and out on the fly or use a range to set the start and end point of the recording To do this use the Auto Recor
142. age 340 The Pan Theatre The Pan Theatre offers a combination of the 3D panner with the Pyxis window as shown below F My y l i NJIJ npa P Pi 7 This allows you to adjust surround panning directly in front of the pictures You can use the mouse to move the yellow or red balls or use the regular panning controls and joystick To enable the Pan Theatre first enable the 3D panner using the System Variables dialog Step 1 Type The System Variables dialog box is displayed Fairlight QUANTUM Page 305 Step 2 Step 3 PYXIS TRACK System Variables November 13 2014 E Allow Call by Solo Allow Call by In Line Panel 6 Allow Call by Fader Touch 6 Allow Call by Fader and Pan Touch No Call by Touch Softpanels Allow channel keyboard softpanels E Allow softpanels on touch Enable joystick zoom 3 Softpanel active seconds Meters Off Peak hold mode 5 0 Peak display limit dB 10 0 Seconds to retain overload Clear Peak on Record 7 Play All Meters use same meter point Launch on screen meters at Bootup Mixer Requires Restart EQ On Busses Check the 3D Panner checkbox Close the System Variables dialog MADI Channels Automaton Enable automation 10 Glide in time Frames 10 Glide out time Frames 0 Mix Edit Handles Frames Enable automation optimisation Save automation with project Target Both as Default Oscillator O
143. ahicdutaataacaaabeckas dbeaNauasaleetaits 352 Advanced using Scripted Macros 356 INTRODUCTION November 13 2014 Introduction QUANTUM is a large audio production system with very strong support for video recording and editing About the Software Fairlight Post V5 QUANTUM runs Fairlight Post v5 software Many other Fairlight products also run this software Reference will be made throughout this document to the capabilities of Post V5 which implies that the software has the capability and all the Fairlight products running Post software also have tt About This Manual The QUANTUM User Manual provides all the information necessary to rapidly become proficient at operating the system in a professional audio environment This manual is designed to familiarise sound editors and engineers with the facilities provided by QUANTUM The terminology and concepts used in this manual assume a reasonable knowledge of audio principles and studio procedures Finding the Information You Need Read through the chapters in the order presented to learn all the features of the system or use the Table of Contents or Index to quickly find the specific information you require What Else You Need to Know Installation If you need to install or re install the system please read the manual QUANTUM Installation Configuration and Service manual pdf This manual is installed on your hard disk in C Program Files x86 Fairlight
144. al Preferences Projects General Preferences Uptions Audiobase Playback Video Capture Projects Scrallers Audio Plugins Autosave Load Last Project on Startup Protiles Delete Ka The default is set at 90 days but you may change that to any time you like Revealing the Project File To display a Windows Explorer Window containing the currently loaded project use the command File gt Reveal Project File Backup Files Each time a DR2 file is saved an optional backup of the previous saved version can be made This will only happen if your system is set up correctly To enable backup saving issue the command Setup General Preferences and go to the Projects tab Fairlight QUANTUM Page 321 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT November 13 2014 General Preferences x Options Audiobase Playback Video Capture Projects Audio Plugins Number of Backups 5 Aubosave E Load Last Project on Startup D Set the number of backups you would like to keep The system default is 5 which means the 5 most recent saved versions of your file will be retained Automatic File Saving Automatic File Saving allows you to save your project automatically at regular time intervals To set this up issue the command Setup General Preferences and go to the Projects tab General Preferences x Options Audiobase Playback Video Capture Projects Audio Plugins Number of Backups
145. alled before starting Post V5 0 software File Compatibility IMPORTANT Project files containing MIDI tracks CANNOT BE LOADED by earlier software Project files created by v3 1 software that do not contain MIDI tracks can be loaded by earlier software If all MIDI tracks are converted back to audio tracks losing all MIDI data the project can be saved and then loaded into earlier software NOTE v3 0 software has a prototype version of MIDI tracks using the Add MIDI Track command in the Track Menu This is incompatible with the MIDI implementation in v3 1 and you are advised NOT TO USE IT Convert Tracks to MIDI Each non video track in the system is either audio or MIDI By default all tracks are audio You can convert from audio to MIDI or vice versa by selecting tracks in the Editor and issuing the command MIDI Convert to or From Midi Tracks If you select some audio and some MIDI tracks before issuing the command all the selected tracks will end up the same majority rules The audio and MIDI tracks are distinguished visually by a new pair of icons in the bar at the left Fairlight QUANTUM Page 308 MIDI TRACKS November 13 2014 MIDI Audio Patching to MIDI Tracks To patch MIDI inputs to tracks and their outputs to instruments use Setup Instruments on the Edit Screen Instrument Setup x Instrument MIDI Device In Instrument USB Audio Device Church Organ 2nd USB Audio Device OMNI ack 2
146. alog Digital MADI Dir Out Send Dir Out Dir System Return In Back Outputs Outputs Outputs CR Mon i j Analog Dynamics Out i Inputs Sidechain mabl Source categories Destination categories Inputs Input Source Categories Categories of signal paths are selected in the lower part of the screen Slee Source categories Selecting a category of sources expands the category in the upper left of the screen Fairlight QUANTUM Page 56 PATCHING SIGNAL PATHS November 13 2014 ssh So ba a EEEEEE EEBEEE EEBEEE EEBEEE EEE ERRE In this case Analog Inputs have been selected Destination Categories Selecting a category of destinations expands it into the upper right of the screen Destination categories ie Fairlight QUANTUM Page 57 PATCHING SIGNAL PATHS November 13 2014 aac ALL aac Al SaO ALL SaD Al In this case Track Inputs are shown Making a Patch Select a source and a destination then click the Patch button in the center Afterwards the tiles used in the patch will show the results Source is always shown above destination Input 1 Source Cou a il l 1 Source Cy ary AT DA L A lg g EE see l i Destination Tr AL lz 1 Destination Notes You can select multiple sources and multiple destinations and patch them all with one command For example select Analog Inputs 1 to 8 and Track Inputs 9 16 then click the Patch command once A
147. ame warning applies Paste Clipboard This command pastes the clipboard at the current timecode position starting from the lowest numbered selected track Fairlight QUANTUM Page 147 EDITING November 13 2014 Note the clipboard includes a reference to the position of the playhead at the time of cutting or copying When pasting the system places that reference position in the clipboard at the current timecode This is illustrated below Clocktfa ce HES TIPTEL i LJ W J py a m epn f Is i z de EPS DNTP DESM E D Before clips are cut copied Tracks 6 and 7 are selected and there is no range Clockfa ce After the cut copy A ghost appears showing the clipboard contents Note that the sync reference is indicated by the position of the clips and the Play Head We select tracks 25 and 26 The ghost shows where the clipboard would go if pasted Fairlight QUANTUM Page 148 EDITING November 13 2014 Maid with the Flaxen Hair Kalimba After pasting the clips are synchronised in relation to the Play Head in the same way as when they were cut or copied Fade Head Inserts a fade from the head of the clip to the Play Head If there was already a fade at the head it is replaced The curve parameters of the inserted fade are the ones that would be visible in the Cross Fade Smart Pane To view this click view Smart Pane Cross Fade Fade Tail As Fade Head Split Clip This comm
148. ameter group Step 2 Press the Path button and observe changes in the encoder values and the page buttons at left Step 3 Press the Page 2 button and observe changes in the encoder values Step 4 Press the Pad button again to exit Momentary example Step 1 Following on from the previous routine Press and hold the Pad button The Pad enters Edit Mode again and the same display appears Step 2 Continue to hold Pad down and press EQ The changes are the reverse to the previous set Step 3 Release the Pad button NOTE While the Pad is in Edit Mode the upper fixed keys still select tracks Each time you select a track if it wasn t already selected it becomes the Current Track and its parameters appear in the pad To access tracks that are not currently shown in the Pad press the Bank button to move up in lots of 12 or 24 or hold down the Bank button and choose from the displayed buttons see below for more details Fairlight QUANTUM Page 197 MIXING November 13 2014 ALT Track13 Track192 TrackiS Tracl Each encoder controls two parameters the normal parameter and the ALT parameter To access the ALT parameter the ALT button must be engaged It can operate in momentary or latched modes 0 0 NA pe eke HI SH Normal Mode ALT Mode As shown above the Pad changes its lettering to show which parameters are active Use Touch for ALT Parameters Most ALT parameters are switches while most n
149. and breaks clips into two pieces This will happen to all clips on selected tracks that are touched by the Play Head Trim Head This command trims the Head of the clip s touching the cursor on selected tracks The clip is trimmed at the Play Head position Trim Tail As Trim Head Nudge The command moves selected clips forward or backward by one frame lf there is no range it will affect clips on selected tracks touching the Play Head lf there is a range it will affect all clips that are wholly inside the range on selected tracks Mute Clip This command toggles the Mute state of the selected clip s When a clip is muted it is shown darker and its audio is not heard If there is a range this command affects clips that are wholly inside the range on selected tracks Fairlight QUANTUM Page 149 EDITING November 13 2014 Name Clip Opens a dialog where you can rename Clips Clip Level Opens a dialog where you can set the volume level of selected clips Add Mark Adds a timecode Mark to the timeline This can be used for location either by jumping or by locating to Marks They can also be named To see a list of Marks rename or locate to them click view gt Marks Jump to Mark Moves the transport to the next or previous timecode Mark Jump to Point Moves the transport to the next or previous head or tail of clips on selected tracks Display Layering When clips are placed on top of each other on
150. and choosing Talk as the destination Alternatively it can be targeted via the Talkback menu Step 1 Hold down the Mode key and press the Talk Back button Step 2 To access the Patch Page with Talk already selected as the destination press the Patch Source SOft key Step 3 Now select any physical input or signal path and patch it to a Talkback circuit Setting Talkback Destination Talkback can be routed to any number of system buses To do this Step 1 Hold down the Mode key and press the Talk Back button Step 2 Select Bus destinations on the picture keys Step 3 Press exit Talkback destinations can also be set by pressing the Talk Dest button in the Mon Megamode then choosing any system bus in the Pad area Operating with Talkback To toggle Talkback on and off use the Talk button in the upper right of the Center Section The button works in both momentary hold down while talking and latched mode press talk press again to toggle off Talkback Dimming The Dim control is always activated automatically when the Talk circuit is active Talkback AutoCue AutoCue causes Talkback to come on when the transport comes out of Play or Record This is useful for sessions recording talent where a lot of discussion is needed between takes To toggle AutoCue Step 1 Enter the Talk menu by holding down the Mode key and pressing the Talk Back button Step 2 Press the Auto Cue soft key to toggle the function Fairlight QUANTUM
151. and release the Fade Head button A fade is created using the last used Fade Curve shown in the Smart Pane of the Edit Screen For double handed fades continue as follows e Press the Fade Head key e Turn the Jog Wheel to set the shape of the fade in the curve is shown on the Edit screen e Release the Fade Head key to execute the fade in Trim Head For simple use just press and release the Trim Head button at the point where your clip should start playing Double handed trims are great for extending the clip because you get to see the full extent before choosing the trim point Do the following e Press and hold the Trim button the clip s head is fully extended e Jog to the position where you want the clip to start e Release the Trim button the clip is trimmed or extended to that position Fairlight QUANTUM Page 26 CENTRAL TACTILE CONTROL November 13 2014 Nudge Commands There are two sets of Nudge commands The simple commands move the selected clips by a single frame These keys are marked like this This shows the amount of nudge in subframes eightieths of a frame Press this button repeatedly as it cycles through the possible values Nudge Sync Normally clips are nudged as objects but it s also possible the nudge the sync of the audio within the clip without moving the edges To do this press the Nudge Sync button Hwee Nudge SYNE SYNC Note there is a limit to how far the Sync can b
152. any one of these a second time to reverse sort ADR Preferences Once you have entered all the cues that you want to use you may set up your preferences by clicking the ADR Menu and selecting ADR Preferences The following screen is displayed Fairlight QUANTUM Page 86 ADR November 13 2014 The main purpose of this dialog is to control beeps and the streamer The streamer is a pair of vertical lines moving across the Pyxis screen during the Preroll to the cue At the same time as the audible beeps the line extends upwards and downwards briefly The two lines come together at the cue point and a large cross is shown The extensions and cross can be given a different colour to the lines Note the number of beeps and corresponding streamer crosses is controlled in this dialog but the Preroll must be long enough to accommodate them If the Preroll is too short some of the beeps will be omitted See below for instructions on setting the Preroll The text referred to is that shown on the Decklink output from the Pyxis Track The font colour height control and Wrap Text control are used to customise the text display Note this text display is not shown on the Edit Screen Pyxis Window only on the independent monitor fed by your Decklink card if fitted Use the ADR Display described below to show text over the Edit Screen If you wish to set your beeps at a particular frame interval select Spacing frames in the dialog shown abo
153. arameter control to display its curve for the selected tracks Press and release to display the Curves menu See Automation Curves below for details Preview Menu Opens a menu with Preview commands See below for details Copy and Paste Mix The Copy Mix and Paste Mix soft keys are used for mix copying IT ALWAYS WORKS WITH A RANGE Multiple channels source channels can be copied and multiple pasted destination channels Offsets may be used The rules are as follows Only enabled parameters are pasted The copied channels are pasted into the selected destination channels in numerical order For example if the source channels are 1 5 6 and the destination channels are 44 102 and 126 1 gt 44 5 gt 102 6 gt 126 If there are more destination channels than source channels we cycle again from the beginning of the source channels For example if the source channels are 5 8 and the destination channels are 44 56 77 and 78 5 gt 44 8 gt 56 5377 8 gt 78 Fairlight QUANTUM Page 251 AUTOMATION November 13 2014 e The source channels and destination channels can be of different types For example you can copy from a Track to a Bus or a Group to a Live In some cases the data cannot be pasted e g Lives can have an expander gate but Buses cannot e Timecode offsets may be used The amount by which the transport has moved in between copying and pasting is used as the offset The play head or cursor is used a
154. at data but Preview removes that restriction so you can play with the controls as much as you like and only write data when you are ready To free a particular mix item from motor control means putting it in Preview mode as follows Step 1 Make sure Mix is ON and Preview is ON Step 2 Enable the parameter step 3 Put the mix item into Preview in one of these ways e Press the Auto button on its fader e Press the Xstream Auto button puts the currently selected channel into Preview e Toggle Live Preview ON and select the channel on the XCS Parameters in preview can be moved freely while you get a balance Then they can be written into the automation data in a number of ways Preview to Write To take your Previewing parameters straight into Write use the In button This can be found by pressing the Punch Menu button in the Automation Megamode When channels are in Preview this is a good way to take them into Write Fairlight QUANTUM Page 252 AUTOMATION November 13 2014 For example you can play to a certain point adjusting parameter values then press the In button to put the selected parameters into Write starting at their previewed values If you wish to punch from Preview to Write automatically use Programmed Automation recording as described on page 246 The Preview Menu Parameters settings that you find while in Preview can be transferred into the Mix data in other ways as well To enter the Preview Menu press the
155. aths simply select them Select Signal paths using the buttons on the Xstream controller or using the mouse on the Edit Screen Fairlight QUANTUM Page 241 Mix AUTOMATION November 13 2014 Enabled paths do the following e They enter Write Trim Preview when a control is touched if Touch is set to Latch or Snap e They enter write when the In button is pressed and exit when the out button is pressed e They can be used in Auto Punch operations Item Status Mix items can be in one of five states Read Write Trim Isolate and Preview The current state of each parameter is displayed by coloured illumination of fader Knobs rotary encoders and switches plus parameter values in the ILP The five parameter states are described below Read When mix items are in Read the automation system takes control of their values and the physical position of their controls Controls are illuminated A mix ttem can be in Read whenever any automation data has been recorded for it anywhere in the project Write Trim Mix items must be explicitly placed in Write or Trim The write Trim key is toggled to the Write or Trim position for the whole console WRITE automation is armed for record and absolute values are written for the selected mix items Indicators are illuminated red TRIM automation is armed for record and relative values are written for the selected mix items Indicators are illuminated amber In trim mode moving a
156. atically Others eg Ableton Live need to be launched manually Open or create a project within your Rewire application demo projects that accompany the application are a good starting point Patching a Rewire Application Once your Rewire Application is launched it s time to patch Rewire inputs to track or live feeds Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Open the Patch I O page by pressing the Patch button in the Setup Megamode Click on Instrument Inputs located on the left hand side of the Patch I O page You see inputs labeled according to the Rewire applications you have installed If you have installed more than one application click Page Down on the patch I O page until you find the input for your Rewire application Select the desired instrument input e g If using Reason select the inputs labeled Mix L and Mix R for a stereo mix Select Track Live or other patch destinations located on the lower right hand side of the Patch I O page Select destinations to patch in the upper right and click the Patch button to complete the patch Fairlight QUANTUM Page 277 PLUG INS REWIRE AND EXTERNAL PROCESSING November 13 2014 Click on Patch to complete See Select instrument P Select live inputs pippe You should now be able to hear a stereo signal generated by your Rewire application on Live feeds 1 and 2 Alternatively you can patch instrument inputs to track feeds but make sure the
157. ation data whilst editing the audio For Clips or Ranges of Clips their corresponding mix data can be Copied or Cut to another position if Data is included on the Edit Target key Step 1 Press the Mix Menu button Fairlight QUANTUM Page 254 Step 2 Step 2 AUTOMATION November 13 2014 Press the Target soft key until both is selected Edit audio in the usual ways and all enabled automation data for the sections of track you are editing will also be edited Note When a range is selected automation data is cut copied and pasted for the entire range whether or not clips are present Undoing the audio edit will also undo the automation change Copy Project Segment This command in the Edit Menu copies all audio and automation data on all channels in the system from a range to the cursor position To do this Step 1 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Make a range around the segment you want to copy Locate to the sync point in the range which corresponds to the place you want to paste the segment For example choose a scene change or notable event which will be easy to locate at the destination Click Edit gt Copy Project Segment This copies the specified range into the clipboard including all clips and automation Locate to the timecode event where you want to paste Paste the clipboard using any of the following Click Edit gt Paste Press Enter on the Xstream panel Type ctrl v on a qwerty ke
158. ational features of surround format buses Link groups can include up to eight members The simplest link group has two members and fulfils the function of a stereo channel Fader Groups are similar to other VCA or DCA grouping schemes and allow a master fader to control a group of signal paths Fader Groups can include any number of members Summary of Groups Type Member Type Master Fader Link Group Live Feedor Link Group Track Feed Master level equal to first member Fader Group Live Feedor Fader Group Track Feed Master Link Groups Selection to Stem Structure Fold on Channel Panel Creation Select Master Yes Yes Fader Group No No menu key and soft Speaker Set key Link groups allow the control of up to eight feeds with one fader They can only include track feeds or live feeds not a mixture of both If the system is equipped with CC 2 Link Groups may contain either full tracks OR live feeds OR playback tracks not any mixture of these Link groups can be created in any standard multichannel format or without any format Link Group Format When a link group is created you have the option to apply default pans If you do this the number of members determines the format of the link group If default pans are selected each member of the group is panned to one element of the system bus that has the same number of elements Normally the factory bus formats are used and this works out as follows If 2 Feeds are li
159. ator Setup button to display this small layout Freq Level Patch 1000 70 dB OSC Fairlight QUANTUM Page 28 CENTRAL TACTILE CONTROL November 13 2014 The Frequency and Level buttons will cause the Numpad to display when pressed You can type in the required number then press Fregency or Level again to accept the new value and exit To exit the Oscillator Setup layout press Oscillator Setup again Fader Set Button The Fader Set button allows you to choose which Fader Set to display on your faders It also includes a Map button which begins mapping on the currently chosen fader set Automate The Automate layout is only useful when Mix On is toggled on At this time the Automate layout gives you all the active controls needed to automate your mix Parameter Auto Setup All Read Soft keys Enable eater heo Param Auto Target copy paste wir ite jog auta i ey Enab Sewp Audio mis mix JE recall mix curves menu Punch Preview recat Punch AUTO Path Menu mix Order Prime Common Mix Mix Auto toggle Modes Prime Parameter Enable Parameter Enable opens a layout where you select which parameters are ready for automation write or trim Parameters can be selected individually or in groups Common Mix Menus The common mix Menus include the Mix Menu and the File Menu which would be familiar to experienced Fairlight users For others the chapter on Automation in the user manual is recommended reading Auto S
160. ats Setup This displays a dialog with the following parameters Fairlight QUANTUM Page 45 CHANNELS November 13 2014 Tempoa Time Origin time Oo 00 00 00 Set 1 1 1 Snap to fize Mumber Bars 1 BPM From Range Tempo Expressed as beats per minute The box on the right allows you to choose the beat value used in specifying the tempo In some cases you may wish to specify beats differently from the time signature Time This is the time signature expressed in the usual way Origin Time This is the timecode where the first bar starts To set it locate to the timecode of the first bar and click the button labeled Set 1 1 1 You may move the transport earlier than the first bar which is negative bar territory Note there is no zero bar the number goes from 1 straight to 1 Snap Snap editing is used when dragging clips with the mouse You may set the snap points to any musical interval in the bar To switch snapping on click Edit gt Snap Editing Note that several types of snap may operate at the same time e g clip and beat This can lead to conflicts if two snap points are in close proximity BPM from Range The system will calculate accurate tempos based on fitting to a range To do this mark the In and Out points of the range using the From and To keys Now enter the number of bars that should fit in the range and click the button labelled BPM from Range Scrollers Audio Scrollers
161. ber 13 2014 Ifts_O412 Track 143 i NENG ete A LO IMa 0415 000 name IMG 0419 To select track colours Step 1 Select tracks you want to colour Step 2 Use the menu Tracks Set Track Background Colour Fairlight QUANTUM Page 34 CHANNELS November 13 2014 Tracks Add Pyxis Track Delete Pyxis Track Convert To or From Midi Tracks Set Audio Track Count Rename Track Set Record Seed Name Add Clip Set Display Level Set Track Clip Colour Click to choose a colour for all selected tracks ESS salt T Click to display a mixer 2010 irac i Mute Tracks E for special colours Safe Tracks BSS ea Reset All Track Heights Hide Selected Tracks Unhide Between Selected Tracks T 4 Unhide All Tracks A Reset all colours to Select All Viewed Tracks Custom Colour factory defaults Path Naming Reset Colour Track Clip Colour Each track also has a colour given to new clips that are recorded or imported to that track To do this Step 1 Select tracks whose clip colour you want to change Step 2 Use the menu Tracks Set Track Clip Colour When you choose a new track clip colour all clips on the track that currently have its old colour are given its new colour Clips coloured differently from the old track clip colour are not affected this could happen if you coloured the clip individually see below or copied it from another track with a different clip colour Fairlight QU
162. ble in the Edit Megamode or while holding down Mode Step 2 Choose a path to name by pressing its button in the Pad Step 3 Now press the Name Track button the QWERTY keyboard will be displayed Step 4 Use the QWERTY keyboard to type a name and press ENTER When you are choosing a name it is advisable to use no more than two words of eight characters each separated by a space Fairlight QUANTUM Page 52 CHANNELS November 13 2014 If you do the complete name will be displayed on the QUANTUM Pad keys making it easier for you to choose signal paths If you use more than one space character the first one becomes a breaking space and the others are put on the second line Naming More Paths Press the Next Path to select and name the signal path above the currently selected one The Name List can be used to name a lot of paths in one place To use it click Setup Path Naming Fairlight QUANTUM Page 53 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 CHANNELS November 13 2014 Scroll down to the signal path you wish to name You can use the search box in the upper left of the dialog to narrow the list of displayed paths Click the current name of the path Type in a new name Accept the new name by selecting another path or by closing the dialog Alternatively to name a single track select it then click Tracks Rename Track Fairlight QUANTUM Page 54 PATCHING SIGNAL PATHS November 13 2014 Patching Signal Paths
163. by holding down ctrl and clicking it Events that are marked with an R will not be recorded even if they are selected Each time the system performs a recording the events that successfully record are automatically marked this way You may also click in the checkbox for any event to mark or unmark it manually Capture Settings Handles you can capture more audio than indicated by the EDL event This can be very useful for adding fades or capturing ambience around the event for use in smoothing Preroll sets the time that the source machine will run up to the recording Set this value to suit the type of source machine being used Typically tape based machines require at least 3 seconds to lock properly Postroll sets the time that the source machine will keep running after the recording Set up Patching Connect the source machine outputs to some of your POST V5 0 inputs and use the Patch I O page to patch them through to the recording tracks The Patch I O page is discussed in detail in Patching Signal Paths on Page 55 Set up Destination tracks for Conform The Destination tracks are those to which the audio will be copied to match the Rec Start time for the EDL events You need only specify the first destination track the software uses the Fairlight QUANTUM Page 337 t Aiz 45 34000 13 17 18 28 C A 34 CLOSE 1 48 26 0 43 J m J m m n 16 E i a l a P i I PP es lm 3 D A 34 1 CLOSE
164. c Level soft key may be chosen All track feed faders now control the level prior to the disk recorder This can be used to control the level going to disk during recording Note that live feed faders are inactive when Faders To Rec Level is selected This fader control cannot be automated Faders to Direct Output While the Faders To layout is active the Direct Output soft key may be chosen All channel faders now control the direct out level The Mute key toggles the direct output ON and OFF The fader control may be automated and will record data for the direct out level parameter Use the enable key next to the Master fader to enable this parameter for automation Fader To Boom While the Faders To layout is active the Boom soft key may be chosen All channel faders now control the boom level The Mute key toggles the boom ON and OFF The fader control may be automated and will record data for the boom level parameter Use the enable key next to the Master fader to enable this parameter for automation Faders To under Automation While Faders To is active the parameters controlled by the individual control elements Fader Panpot Mute Switch are recorded into the automation as usual The Enable buttons associated with those controls are used to enable the currently controlled parameters not the normally controlled ones Fairlight QUANTUM Page 232 MIXING November 13 2014 The Library Introduction The Libra
165. ccccccseseeeeeeseeeeeees 256 Automation CUFVeS ccccssecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 257 Data Strae a E N NN 261 MiX TANMAG eie te reset ree mn earns rrr ete 261 Recording MIXES vias cviuerte taint iiuatinetvaviteiws 262 Offline Rendering ccccceeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeees 262 PLUG INS REWIRE AND EXTERNAL PROCESSING sassnsnnannonnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnan 264 MIOdUCU Oanes t vdasrancuveacoleeeeost 264 General Capabilities ccccccseseeeeeeeeeeeees 264 Voorand VSTi oeie a eee ete aes 264 Using VST Effects in QUANTUM 265 Plug in Latency and Compensation 266 PAStANMAU ON assia eters anceune ct 267 Selecting PIUG INS ccccececeessseeeeeseeeeeees 269 Controlling Plug ins On Screen 0 0000 269 Controlling Plug ins on the Pad 0 272 Automation of Plug ins cccseeeeeeseeeeeeeees 272 CODVING PIUQHIAS ncrs a 272 Clip based Plug ins cccceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 272 Using VST Instruments in QUANTUM 274 PION WRC t ioe den tenet dast R 2 5 External Processing cccsssseeecesseeeseeeees 278 MONITORING AND TALKBACK 280 set Monitor Levels Mute and Dim 280 The Monitor Megamode cccecseeeeeees 281 Toggle Main and ALT Speakers 0 282 Configure Monitor Speaker Sets 283 Change Monitor Listening Format 284 Configure Monitor SOUrCeS
166. cer VST Instruments can still be played live through the system This can be useful for e Foley using a VSTi sampler e Live musical performance e Tuning vocals with a VSTi sampler and MIDI controller with pitch wheel e Live effects triggering with a VSTi sampler Fairlight QUANTUM Page 274 PLUG INS REWIRE AND EXTERNAL PROCESSING November 13 2014 VSTi s can easily be recorded to tracks or inserted on Lives depending on your needs ReWire About ReWire ReWire is a software protocol jointly developed by Propellerhead and Steinberg It enables remote control and data transfer among digital audio editing and related software Originally appearing in the ReBirth software synthesizer in 1998 the protocol has since QUANTUM ved into an industry standard The ReWire Mixer The ReWire protocol is designed to allow a number of ReWire Clients to communicate with a single ReWire Mixer Only one ReWire mixer can be active at a time Post V5 0 is always the ReWire Mixer The ReWire Mixer can accept up to 256 inputs from each of the connected ReWire clients Post V5 0 currently supports 96 of these ReWire inputs When a ReWire Mixer and ReWire Client are connected together transport controls and position information are automatically transmitted in both directions between the Mixer and Client s Diagram of a running ReWire session ReWire DLL Client Application Reason RT Thread Mixer Application Dream II RT Thr
167. cise but it s very fast XFade New Method Making a crossfade between two clips requires that they overlap The new Crossfade method creates the overlap at the same time as the crossfade Operation Locate the transport so that the cursor crosses the middle of at least one clip Identify the track containing that clip and double press its button to make it the only selected track If necessary use the Bank key The target clip should now be the only red clip on the screen Red means ready to edit Hold down Mode and press the green Edit Basic Megamode button Press the cut erase button and then the split clip soft key This will split the clip into two pieces butt edited together We will make a crossfade Fairlight QUANTUM Page 97 EDITING November 13 2014 OOF S400 00 07 00 O00 0000 PIRENEA Press the button Press the soft key 00 00 podad 00 O08 ie 10 _ 20 m ee The Xfade dialog appears showing the last used parameters The Duration is depicted with a yellow overlay to show the region of overlap Fairlight QUANTUM Page 98 EDITING November 13 2014 SUL JU Us UL O08 We 10 2 e0 Mm Turn the Jog Wheel so that the Duration is increased The Yellow region expands accordingly You may also change the X Point value labelled or the X Level value labelled dB This can be done by tabbing to those fields and using the or by O0 0F S400 Doe Soo O00 00 00 h Ogee 00 O
168. cluding a close box and several icons Track 1 Insert 1 FLOORFISH init Bc amp x Close Button FLOORFISH expander noise gate al Lock detect Freq Insert Bypass AS Opens Plug in E Control Box expansion Plug in Name www digitalfishphones c Close Channel Name Clicking the Close button makes the Plug in window disappear but does not unload it You will continue to hear its effect After closing the plug in window it can be restored to the screen by pressing another Pad Mode button Path EQ Dyn or Aux and then pressing the Plug in button again or by double clicking that plug in name in the QUANTUM Mixer Screen screen Lock Clicking the Lock icon prevents that window from disappearing it will continue to display that Plug in for that channel regardless of other selections you make until you unlock it then close or delete it Insert Bypass By default Plug ins are inserted in the channel where you instantiated load them By clicking the Insert Bypass icon you can bypass a specific plug in Note that other plug ins in the channel will remain inserted To bypass all plug ins use the channel Insert control which can be found in the Mixer Screen Plug in Control Box If more than one plug in is inserted into a channel you can change the order in which they process the audio To do this click the Plug in Control Box Icon The following window is displayed Fairlight QUANTUM Page 270 PL
169. code Then next column is the character default is Then next column is the text Example 23 58 39 03 00 02 58 19 Andrew Haven t seen you before 00 02 19 19 00 03 19 19 Bill froggs are really cool 00 04 57 07 00 09 42 18 Do not look now Commas occuring in the text field will confuse the software unless the field is surrounded by quotation marks e g 00 02 19 19 00 03 19 19 Bill froggs are cool really cool Adding Cues Manually Step 0 Optionally create a range covering the cue you want to add This is probably the quickest way to set the In and Out times for your cue If there is no range the cue will be created with the transport position as its In time and 5 seconds duration Step 1 Click Add or press the add cue soft key A dialog appears for writing the text of your cue Enter the text for the ADR Step 2 Enter the text and click ox Fairlight QUANTUM Page 84 ADR November 13 2014 Step 3 If necessary set the In Point of the cue locate the transport to that point and click From Your current position will be shown in a dialog You may accept this by clicking OK OR Click From type the timecode you want and click ox Step 4 If necessary set the Out Point of the ADR cue in the same way The cue is shown as below From To Dialogue Character 00 00 09 25 00 00 11 14 Ihope you don t mind Andrew There 0000 10 11 0000 15 11 Sunrise and sunset Feter 00 00 11 15 00 00 13 06 It s always been th
170. control applies an offset to the values already recorded for that mix item For example in trim mode increasing a fader level by 10dB will add 10dB to the previously recorded fader levels retaining all the relative changes in the previously recorded data In Trim mode the control continues to move as it follows the previously recorded data As soon as the control is touched it becomes stationary and any changes made to the control s position are written as offsets to the underlying data If the control is touched but not moved no changes are made If the control is moved then released when not in Touch Snap the system continues to playback the original moves at the offset or trimmed level If the system is in Touch Snap the system drops back into Read Isolate When mix items are Isolated the user can manually control them and the automation system does not affect them The controls have no illumination All mix ttems are effectively isolated until data is written for them When you turn Mix On to the off position all mix items are isolated To isolate Signal paths Step 1 Press the Isoil button in the Automation Megamode Step 2 Click on the screen to choose signal paths for isolation Note that all parameters on the isolated signal paths become isolated There is no way to pick specific parameters for isolation Fairlight QUANTUM Page 242 AUTOMATION November 13 2014 Preview Preview is a combination of isolation and enable
171. couple of seconds a layout appears showing all the possibilities for alternate fader function Step 3 Choose one of the alternate options then release the Faders To button Fairlight QUANTUM Page 231 MIXING November 13 2014 Faders to Aux While BLUE Faders To Is active any of the Aux bus selection keys may be selected and the Aux key will be illuminated All channel faders now control the level at which their signal path is sent to the selected Auxiliary bus Bus Master faders are excluded The MUTE key now controls the aux send ON OFF control The alternative controls may be automated and will record data for the aux bus send level pan and ON OFF parameters Use the normal enable functions to enable these parameters for automation For details see page 240 Faders to Reduction Bus While the Faders To layout is active Sub buses which are configured for bus reduction may be selected All channel faders now control the level at which their signal path is sent to the selected Sub Bus For more details about Bus Reduction see page 190 The MUTE key now controls the bus assignment to the selected Sub Bus The panpot is inactive The mute and fader controls may be automated and will record data for the bus send level pan and assignment parameters Use the normal enable functions to enable these parameters for automation For details see page 240 Fader To Record Level While the Faders To layout is active the Re
172. ction of the entire dynamics section The display also includes gain reduction signal meters for all three sections If the dynamics are switched IN the graph is highlighted if switched OUT the graph is dimmed e The insert send and receive I O patching is displayed If the insert is switched IN the insert display is highlighted if switched OUT the display is dimmed e The main fader level for the signal path is displayed with a numeric display of the fader gain This is an active control e The direct out level pre post status and output patching is displayed If the direct out is switched ON the direct out display is highlighted if switched OFF the display is dimmed The direct out level is shown with a horizontal bar If the direct out is switched ON the bar is yellow if switched OFF the bar is violet The section of the bar above OdB of gain is shown in red Fairlight QUANTUM Page 207 MIXING November 13 2014 e The Auxiliary bus display shows the status of each aux send The send level is shown with a horizontal bar If the send is switched ON the bar is yellow if switched OFF the bar is violet The section of the bar above OdB of gain is shown in red e The pan display offers a sophisticated representation of the signal path panner The display always shows a 5 1 sound field as the panning information for any path can be applied to any format bus to which it is assigned The red circle indicates the current pan position If a link g
173. d If you have more than one track selected the group clip will look like a multi channel linked clip Editing of a grouped clip is the same as all other clips Double clicking a grouped clip shows it temporarily as separate clips allowing editing inside the group Double click again to restore the group Use gt to ungroup permanently Fairlight QUANTUM Page 151 EDITING November 13 2014 XFade New Method Making a crossfade between two clips requires that they overlap The new Crossfade method creates the overlap at the same time as the crossfade Operation Locate the transport so that the cursor crosses the middle of at least one clip Identify the track containing that clip and double press its button to make it the only selected track If necessary use the Bank key The target clip should now be the only red clip on the screen Red means ready to edit Hold down Mode and press the green Edit Basic Megamode button Press the cut erase button and then the split clip soft key This will split the clip into two pieces butt edited together We will make a crossfade Press the fade button Press the Make Xfade soft key or Issue the command Fades Xfade I L SUL IHIH EHI l miem clip The Xfade dialog appears showing the last used parameters The Duration is depicted with a yellow overlay to show the region of overlap Fairlight QUANTUM Page 152 EDITING November 13 2014 SUL JU
174. d Test 4 44 GLTO9DLYDO0O Baway audio OO000000 00000000 E9640 IQhkAW Projects New Projecte MedialFl Reccord Test 3_a3 GLTOSDLYDDO Gaway audio OO000000 00000000_E9640 iGhtAL Projects i Wew Project2 Media FL_ Reccord Test 2 a GLTO9DLYDO0O Bway audio O0000000 00000000 E9640 IQhkAW Projects Wew Project MedialFl Reccord Test 1_al GLTO9DLYDDO Fiway audio 00000000 00000000 E9640 IQhtAW Projects ew Project2 Media Fl_ Reccord Test _a GLTO9DLYDLO_F way audio O0000000 00000000 E9640 iGhtALW Projects ew Project Media Fl_ Reccord Test 9 a4 GLTO9DLYDLO Haway audio 00000000 00000000 E9640 IQhkAL Projects ew ProjecteiMedialFl_ Reccord Test 8 a3 GLTOS0LYDLO_Gvway audio 00000000 00000000 E9640 IQhtAW Projects ew Project Media FL_ Reccord Test 10 a5 GLTO9SDLYDLO Jiway audio O0000000_00000000_E9640 S Oe Select one file then click on the commands at the bottom of the dialog as follows Reveal File Opens Windows Explorer at the folder containing the selected file Fairlight QUANTUM Page 328 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT November 13 2014 Locate Moves the transport to the start time of the original recording Paste Here Creates a clip using this media at the current timecode position on the current Edit Track Refresh The display is updated to include the latest recordings to have been erased or pasted not normally necessary as the display updates automatically Preview Plays the selected recording through the monitor system Press the same b
175. d in Step 4 Fairlight QUANTUM Page 128 EDITING November 13 2014 Numbers This command swaps the positions of two tracks including their names and all audio It does not swap the automation data Step 1 Select the first track Step 3 Press the numbers soft key Step 4 Select the second track Move This command uses a range exclusively It moves all layers of the audio from the source track to the destination track replacing the audio that was there Step 1 Select the source track Step 2 Create a range in which you want to move the audio to the destination track using the From and To buttons Step 3 Press the move soft key Step 4 Choose the destination track The audio in the range is moved from the source track leaving it blank within the range and placed on the destination track replacing the audio that was there Copy This command uses a range exclusively It copies all layers of the audio from the source track to the destination track replacing the audio that was there Step 1 Select the source track Step 2 Create a range in which you want to copy the audio to the destination track using the From and To buttons Step 3 Press the copy soft key Step 4 Choose the destination track The audio in the range is copied from the source track to the destination track replacing the audio that was there The Move Menu QUANTUM has a new menu designed to quickly move clips between tracks To use the Move menu the system
176. d in the menu above the Edit screen You will see a dialog where the number of tracks can be changed WARNING If you remove tracks containing clips the contents will be destroyed with no UNDO Fairlight QUANTUM Page 31 CHANNELS November 13 2014 Displaying Channels Audio and MIDI tracks are displayed on the Edit Screen Live Feeds and Buses can also be displayed but only when mix automation is active Mix On is on The latter is intended for displaying automation graphs All channels are displayed on the Mixer Screen They are fixed in width and can be scrolled from side to side Number of Tracks on Edit Screen Using Buttons Select the number of tracks to display by pressing or holding down the Bank button Then select from the view buttons that appear wt Eii W l Ey W l Ey Wa j Eyy 1 tk tks 4 tks tt Eyy W l Ey Wa j Eyy 16 tks 24 tks 49 tks W l Eii W l Eiir M j Eiri 96 tks 192 tk All tes Using Jog Wheel Hold down the BLUE key and turn the Jog Wheel to change the number of tracks on the Edit Screen Using Mouse Wheel Hold down the ctri key and turn the Mouse Wheel to change the number of tracks on the Edit Screen Inclusion of Pyxis Track The Video Track known as Pyxis Track appears at the top of the track display It is not counted when choosing how many tracks to display There are two options for its appearance e t may be permanently placed above the audio tracks regardless of
177. d is determined by the On Stop menu item in the Mix Menu If On Stop Hold Is selected all the following mix events are deleted so the last written value remains in force for the rest of the project If On Stop Return is selected the parameter ramps to the previously recorded value at the end of the Glide Out time see page 244 If On Stop Event Is selected the last written value remains in force until a previously recorded event is encountered To set the On Stop value e Press the Auto Setup button in the Automation Megamode the press the On Stop button until it displays the value you want e Click one of the On Stop values in the Automation panel of the Mixer Screen On Stop Touch Enables On Stop buttons Automation Automation Playback The NAME automation system ensures that your mix will always play back exactly as recorded There are two main forms of automation data recorded in a project The first is the static snapshot of all parameters which is recorded whenever a mix is saved The second type of data are the dynamic auto mation events that are recorded every time a parameter is modified while the system is writing or trimming mautomation Once a dynamic event has been recorded on a feed or bus that parameter will be in READ whenever Mix ON is engaged and the transport is in PLAY When the system detects that a parameter control has changed while in Write or Trim a dynamic event is recorded that stores th
178. d keys in some cases are arranged in Layouts Each Layout includes some or all of the available keys dictating their appearance and their function The factory software automatically loads and unloads layouts as part of the normal editing and mixing technique you do not need to think about it But if you want to make your own layouts Xstream is designed to allow it See the later chapter on layout design and implementation The Pad The Pad consists of a screen area and six encoders The buttons immediately above and below the Pad are used to select functions displayed by it A lot of the time the Pad shows 24 of the project Signal Paths known as paths These include Tracks Live Feeds Buses and Group Masters Selected Current Armed track Unselected path bright signal path red text and path dull background blue panel border background Chabter sixteen an Stereo Atmos 0 0 Tk 1 Fred kd el Track Track Track Z Track Track Track 13 4 15 i 1a 19 Tk 13 Tk 14 Tk 15 Tk 16 Tk 1 Tk 18 Tk 19 Syste User Solo indicator Mute indicator m Name green red Name Fairlight QUANTUM Page 13 CENTRAL TACTILE CONTROL November 13 2014 Another important use for the Pad is displaying the mixing parameters of the Current channel Stereo Atmos Encoder ALT Current Dynamics Bus Assign EQ Plugin Aux Pan values Encoder channel user Graph indicators graph list send graph values name graphs Pad AL
179. de Out Curve point Fade In Curve point Trim Tail ae point Trim Head Clip Level point point Trim Points The Trim Head and Trim Tail points can be dragged horizontally to expose or hide more of the recorded media for the clip When you first click a Trim point the clip expands to its maximum possible extent in that direction i e shows all the media at that end of the original recording After you drag the mouse to the point you want and release it the clip is trimmed to that position Fade Points Dragging a Fade In or Fade Out point horizontally lengthens or shortens the fade at that end of the clip Fade Curve Points The Fade In Curve Point and the Fade Out Curve Point can be dragged vertically to change the X Level of the fade and horizontally to change the X Point of the fade Clip Level Point The Clip Level point can be dragged vertically to change the playback level of the clip The waveform of the clip will change to reflect this new level Double Clicks e Double click on Trim point extend to maximum e Double click on Fade point remove fade e Double click on Curve point make fade linear e Double click on Level point set Level to 0 dB Edit While Playing All QUANTUM edits can be performed while the transport is in play If the clip you are editing is actually being played at the time it will take a second or two to update and resume play To make editing easier while playing you can view the tracks as stati
180. details see Bus Assign later in this section In addition you can offset the level of a channel going to the Reduction Bus compared with its level going to the Main Bus To use Bus reduction click the Reduce checkbox on any Sub bus In Reduction Mode a Sub Bus has an independent fader on each channel These are controlled using Faders To see Faders To later in this chapter Sub Bus faders may be set pre or post the Main channel fader using Bus Params see Bus Params later in this chapter All reduction faders default to OdB in post fader mode they offset Reduction fader levels from Main fader levels Custom Bus Formats You can create new Bus Formats as follows Step 1 Exit from the QUANTUM software Step 2 Open the Fairlight Setup Utility by clicking Start and then typing setup into the edit box then select Fairlight Setup Utility from the list of matching applications Step 3 Click the Bus Format tab Fairlight QUANTUM Page 191 MIXING November 13 2014 _ 5 1 Bus Elements 7 io O Eata T1 Be ini i mu on ce amp 100 100 Add Remove Up Down The Bus Format tab shows all the currently available formats in your system The factory formats are shown in grey and cannot be edited Clicking on an element as shown above displays its position in 3D space as a red square with numerical equivalents below Step 4 To create a new format press
181. dge Commands Trim Trim HEAD TAIL Clips One touch commands Fairlight QUANTUM Page 130 EDITING November 13 2014 Nudge Commands Mudge SYNC The 1 fr and 1 fr buttons move selected clips earlier or later by one frame The Var and Var buttons move the selected clips by a smaller Variable amount Press the var button to cycle through the values for Variable nudging in subframes Use the Nudge sync button to toggle between nudging whole clips or nudging the audio inside the clips Trim Head Tail Trim Trim HEAD TAIL These keys combine the Jog Wheel and the Trim function To use the Trim Head button Step 1 Start with the cursor touching a clip whose head you wish to trim Step 2 Press and hold the Trim Head button This will cause the head of the selected clip to extend fully Step 3 Use the Jog Wheel or any transport control to locate to the point where you want to trim the head Step 4 Release the Trim Head button to make the edit Note Clips on multiple tracks can be trimmed at the same time Fade Head Fade Tail These keys combine the Jog Wheel and the Fade function To use the Fade Head Curve button Step 1 Start with the cursor touching a clip where you want the Fade In point Fairlight QUANTUM Page 131 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 EDITING November 13 2014 12 122 123 124125 126 127 128 129 130 nail 132 133 134135 136 137 128 139 140 igi 142 143 144 145 TEET 0002 1000 OO e20
182. ding methods described on page 78 To record more takes of the same audio the easiest way is to use the Record Again function To do this use the method described on page 77 Viewing Takes To see all the layers of audio on your tracks turn on Display Layering This can be done as follows e Hold Mode then double press the Takes button Fairlight QUANTUM Page 78 RECORDING November 13 2014 e Click the Layering button in the Toolbar Layering button e Select view gt Display Layering from the Menu Bar The Takes Menu The Takes menu allows you to bring different takes to the top of the stack for auditioning and editing To display the Takes menu e Press the Takes button in the Editor Megamode e Click View gt Smart Pane Clip Takes The system displays a Smart Panel showing the individual layers on the current editing track at the cursor position Clip Color Track Layer Stark Time End Time Duration Recorded Audio 5 Track 2 4 00 00 12 02 00 00 15 05 00 00 03 03 Recorded Audio Z Track 2 3 O0 00 12 20 00 00 15 11 Oo 00 02 20 Recorded Audio 4 Track 2 2 00 00 10 29 00 00 14 02 00 00 03 035 Recorded Audio 3 Track 2 1 00 00 12 02 00 00 14 11 00 00 02 09 As the transport moves to different places or as you select different tracks the Takes display updates at regular intervals to show the current stack of clips at the cursor position The top layer is selected but you may move the selection downward
183. do this Step 1 Step 2 Step 2A Step 3 Step 4 Locate to the Bend Point using the Jump Keys Bend points must be selected as a Jump Target To do this click Hold down either of the Jump keys and select Bend Points from the Pad or Click Edit Settings gt Jump To gt Bend Points Press the offset Soft key to Offset the selected Bend Point or Press the Warp Soft key to Warp the selected Bend Point Jog to the left or right to the new desired position for the Bend Point Press ENTER or repress the same Soft key as In Step 2 or 2A above The same thing can be done with the mouse as follows To offset the Bend Point hold down ALT and Cirl then click and drag the Bend Point to the left or right To Warp the Bend Point hold down Shift and Ctrl then click and drag the Bend Point to the left or right If you offset the selected Bend Point the audio between it and its immediate neighbours is retimed Jogging left causes the audio left of the selected Bend Point to be speeded up and the audio right of it Fairlight QUANTUM Page 162 TIME DOMAIN PROCESSING November 13 2014 to be slowed down and vice versa If there is no Bend Point between the selected one and the end of the clip the end is used as a Bend Point If you Warp the selected Bend Point the audio between it and the previous one is retimed All the audio between the selected Bend Point and the Tail of the clip is not retimed so it must slip by the same amou
184. e e t may be permanently placed above the audio tracks regardless of which numbered tracks are displayed To select this option select View Show Pyxis Track Lock e t may be placed above the audio tracks only when Track 1 is displayed To select this option deselect View gt Show Pyxis Track Lock External Monitor Display If you have a Decklink card installed it will feed an external monitor directly It is also possible to output to an external monitor directly from your PC graphics card To do this click Setup gt General Preferences Playhack Original Size Bumt in Timecode xl o E BITC Transparent Avid OMF View Both Fields Small View Display Both Fields Field 1 Field 2 Either Large View Display Both Fields Field 1 Field 2 Either Pyxig Pro PAL NTSC Jog 2 Fields Field 1 Field 2 Either E Display Video Underun Message Video on second monitor T Identity Show Special Video Info Auto Fades microseconds Select Display Video on Second Monitor then choose which monitor to use Click Identify to see the monitor numbers in place not necessarily the same as Windows numbering Video Track Display Offset When using a monitor with an inbuilt display such as an LCD or plasma screen the picture may be one or two frames late at play speed You can adjust for this using the General Preferences dialog To do this click Setup gt General Preferences Playhack Fairlight QUANTUM Page 296
185. e s duration when it reaches the Crossover Point Attenuation X Level controls how loud the fade is compared to the full Level of the clip at the Crossover point Fairlight QUANTUM Page 116 EDITING November 13 2014 Duration the total length of the fade in frames Duration is not really part of the shape but its control is close by Example Percentage 30 Attenuation 3 dB Duration 20 This means that the fade will last for 20 frames The crossover point will be 6 frames into the fade at which time the level will be 3 dB compared with full Level NOTE The fade shape can be changed directly with the mouse by dragging on the red buttons in the graphs Fade Tail Same as Fade Head but the fade is applied to the end of the clip Fade Clip If both Head and Tail are selected when you click Apply both ends of the clip can be faded at the same time Fade Across a Range If a range is present when the Apply key is clicked all clips that are wholly inside the range will be affected by it Fade Presets The system provides nine convenient fade shapes as presets These can be recalled instantly by clicking on the keypad at the left Having recalled a preset it can be applied to the Head and or Tail of the currently selected clips using the Apply button Presets A preset is a saved shape for head and tail Factory presets are provided for your use Custom presets are saved by you To load a factor
186. e Project Bin using Clip gt Copy Clips to Bin OR Clip gt Cut Clips to Bin The command will target the currently selected clip s If a Range is present only wholly included clips will be copied To access them open the Clip Search dialog as follows e Press GoTo gt Clip e Click view gt Clip Search In the Clip Search dialog there is a checkbox for Bins When this is checked the dialog shows all the clips in the Bin which can be auditioned previewed and pasted in the normal way Note the Bin can only be seen by the project from which it was created Dragging Directly from Windows Sometimes it is useful to place audio in bins before it has been used in the project This can be done by dragging files from a Windows Explorer Folder window directly into a open Bin in the Clip Search Window or you can drag them to the Bin Tab which will also display the Bin ClipStores ClipStores work in a similar way to Bins but can be located anywhere on your network and are accessible to all users ClipStores can be created at any time using File gt New Clipstore Clipstore files have the extension CLIPS To open a ClipStore use File 3 Open Clipstore and browse to the file you want The project remembers which ClipStores have been used recently these can be accessed via the File Menu also Multiple ClipStores can be opened at the same time and by multiple users To place clips in a ClipStore select them then use Cl
187. e QUANTUM Monitoring system has eight channels so buses with more than eight elements must be monitored using special control setups The system provides a fixed number of elements which depend on your operating licence and the system capability These elements are consumed by the buses according to their format e g a Stereo bus uses two elements while a 5 1 bus uses 6 Bus Types QUANTUM supports four types of buses MAIN The main mixing destination for the system often used to create the final product of a project Cannot be turned off Fairlight QUANTUM Page 189 MIXING November 13 2014 Sub Buses 1 to 8 Sub Buses are extra buses to which channels can be assigned In turn they can be assigned to feed into the Main bus Fader send the same levels to all Subs and Main at the same time When preparing mixes in multiple formats simultaneously e g Stereo and 5 1 Sub Buses can be configured as Reduction Buses which allow different levels and panning to different formats For details see Setting Bus Format Auxes 1 to 12 Aux buses are typically used to create independent mixes for effect sends and for headphone mixes The sends to these buses are controlled from each channel and can be sent pre post fader also pre post mute Auxes can take any available bus format For details see Setting Bus Format below Multi Track MT MT buses were created to allow traditional multi track tape busing There can be up to
188. e available media for the clip The two clips below therefore have different widths of yellow highlighting In this case the resulting crossfades would also be different Good name IMa _0 19 Good name Its 0419 Xfade can shorten clips as well as lengthening them as shown below Good name IMa 0419 Good name IMG 0419 Fade Options Layers On all layers is not supported in Fade Mode Razor razor IS not supported in Fade Mode Soft Edit Every clip has a small fade at the head or tail to make it sound smoother This is called a Soft Edit and you can control its length To do this click the Setup Menu on the Track screen and select General Preferences In the dialog that is displayed click the Playback tab Fairlight QUANTUM Page 122 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 EDITING November 13 2014 Click the Setup Menu on the Track screen Select General Preferences Click the Playback tab Change the value for Soft Edits The current value for Soft edits is shown in the Audio Options group A value of 72 samples is generally useful when the Project sample rate is 48 kHz but you may set this according to your own taste Creating Smooth Level Changes By pasting a copy of a section of a clip onto itself you are able to change the level of the copy to create a level change If the copy is cross faded with the original a smooth level transition results When using the copy and paste functions be sure to be in stop
189. e current channel Solo safe means cannot be muted by soloing another channel Channels can be prevented from being soloed in the following ways Fairlight QUANTUM Page 51 CHANNELS November 13 2014 e Using the Virtual Channel double click a channel s Name Plate in the Mixer Screen to open this Solo safe Naming Naming Inputs and Outputs Inputs and outputs are named outside the QUANTUM application This is because they are a permanent fixture in the studio and it s best to have their names in a separate file WARNING what follows is a technical operation which can result in loss of resources Please follow the instructions carefully The naming file is called l O Config txt and can be found in the following folder C Program Data Fairlight FMC Data It contains information other than names and this should not be disturbed The instructions for naming are contained in the file itself which can be opened and edited with any text editing application System Ports System output ports can only be accessed from the Monitor Setup Patch Outputs menu Using system ports for control room monitors prevents the operator from inadvertently patching signals direct to the power amplifier inputs To define a system port enter an attribute value of 1 as described in the I O Config file Naming Paths The Name Track command allows you to name Tracks Live Feeds Buses and VCA Masters Step 1 Press the Name button availa
190. e nudged eventually the end of the playable media is reached Track Up Down See previous section Range On Off See previous section Mixer This layout is where you access the common Mix commands not including Automation Fairlight QUANTUM Page 27 Scroll Mixer control CENTRAL TACTILE CONTROL Mix On Toggle Oscillator Setup Target Lopy paste Patch Audio mix mix jain ALTA Pat A mix Order Mix Auto toggle Common Mix Modes Mix On November 13 2014 Soft Keys ria i te recall jog auto pv ie mix CUPVes menu Fader Set The Mix On button activates the automation system When it is off all channels are under manual control but when on channels with automation data will play back that data unless isolated The Mix Auto toggle is only available when Mix On is toggled on Common Mix Menus The Menus accessed here are commonly used for mix setup The exception is the Mix Menu which ts largely concerned with automation Scroll Mixer Button The Scroll Mixer button is used to select which channels are visible on the Mixer Screen Hold it down and use the arrow to scroll the Mixer Screen by 24 places left or right Toggle the Auto Scroll button on if you wish the Mixer Screen to always display the Current Channel Oscillator Setup Oscillator Setup is used to toggle the Oscillator on off set its level and frequency and access its patching to signal paths Press the Oscill
191. e previous value and the new value FROM value and TO value of that specific parameter at a specific timecode location When Mix ON is engaged and the transport is located to any position on the time line the automation system looks back and forward in time to find any events previously recorded for the parameter If no dynamic events have been recorded for the parameter the parameter is free meaning you can move it manually The current value for any parameter is determined in the following order Fairlight QUANTUM Page 245 AUTOMATION November 13 2014 1 The parameter is set to the TO value of the most recent previous event or the current event if the transport is right on top of a data change 2 If no previous event exists the parameter is set to the FROM value of the next future event 3 If no future or previous event exists the parameter is not changed If the project was just loaded it will be at its value in the saved snapshot Touch Write Touch write is a super fast way to automate your mix When properly set up you can simply grab the controls you want to change and write the changes straight into the automation For a parameter to go into write when you touch it the following must be true The parameter must be enabled Use the Param Enable layout in the Automation Megamode or an enable button on the Mixer screen The channel must be selected OR Touch Auto Enable must be on Channels can be selected
192. e recorded on one or more parameters or channels at a time More moves may be added with each pass resulting in complex and detailed mixes that can be played back identically every time the project and mix are loaded This chapter does not cover basic operation of the mixer Refer to the chapters on Patching and b 19 7J 19 Routing Faders On Screen Mixing and The InLine Panel for a complete overview of mixer operation Automation Basics below provides an intro to the fundamentals of the automation system Example procedures are detailed later in the chapter Automation Basics Write Trim and Read In Automation we use the terms Write Trim and Read e Write means to record absolute values of parameters e Trim means to record changes to stored values of parameters e Read means to play back the parameter values that have been written The word record is used in this chapter to mean Write or Trim The Mix Item A mix item is one parameter for one signal path Examples are Track 47 Main Bus Fader Level Live 11 EQ Band 1 Q factor Sub Bus 2 Mute There are literally thousands of mix items in the QUANTUM system The automation system can write the changing values or states of every mix item over the duration of your project and read it starting at any position These written values and states are called mix automation data Mix ON When the Mix on key is OFF all mixing and rout
193. e selection Variations There are a few extra keys which change the functions of Cut and Paste All Layers Sometimes clips are stacked in layers Of course we only hear the top layer or crossfades between the top and second layers more about crossfades later You have the choice of cutting only the top layer or all the layers The all layers key controls this choice When it is on you will cut all the layers and they ll be placed on the clipboard ready to be pasted When it is off you will cut only the top layer Note that all layers only works with a range Hint if you want to see all the layers hold down the Mode button and double press the takes button Razor Sometimes it is useful to cut the time out of a track not just the audio This is similar to cutting tape To cut time as well as audio turn on razor by holding down the BLUE key and pressing Razor This will automatically turn on range and all layers When you cut audio the time it occupied is removed from the track and everything afterwards moves earlier When you paste audio the time it occupies is inserted into the track and everything afterwards moves later This is true even if razor was not ON when the clips were cut to the clipboard cut and paste are really independent commands each responsive to the razor setting Fairlight QUANTUM Page 108 EDITING November 13 2014 Track Up down Button Track Up Down button A handy device for mo
194. e the desired format for this speaker set Step 3 Select all its Elements Left Center Right etc at the top left Step 4 Click Analog or Digital outputs at lower right Fairlight QUANTUM Page 283 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 MONITORING AND TALKBACK November 13 2014 Choose the right number of free outputs to match the number of speakers Click Patch Click Name if you want to name the Speaker set Press the Mon Setup button again to exit Change Monitor Listening Format Overview You can tell the system to play into a narrower format than your current speaker set This is called folding down For example you can listen to your 5 1 mix in stereo without changing speaker sets by changing the Listening format This guide will show you how to choose a listening format Step 1 Step 2 Press the Mon button Choose Stereo Comp Or Mono Comp Configure Monitor Sources Overview The standard source for monitoring is the MAIN system bus You can choose many other sources including other system buses or External Source Sets which are used for your CD player video machine etc External Sources come directly from physical inputs to the system The system remembers the last non standard source you chose and calls it the Alternative Source This can be toggled using ALT SOURCE in the Mon layout press Mon then ALT SOURCE This guide shows you how to choose an alternative monitor source and configure External Sou
195. e them active Step 3 Perform the punch explicitly using Punch or implicitly by playing over the active points Details To set In and Out points step 1 press the Mix On button in the Mixer Megamode to turn on automation then press the Mix Auto button to select the Automation Megamode Step 2 Move the transport to the required In point and press the From key to capture the In point Step 3 Move the transport to the required Out point and press the To key to capture the Out point To make the In and Out points active Step 1 Press the Active In button to make the automation In point active The Auto Punch key appears Step 2 Press the Active Out button to make the automation Out point active The Auto Punch key appears if not already displayed Note you do not need to activate both In and Out points See below for consequences To enter record explicitly step 1 Press the Auto Punch Key The transport will preroll the In Point go into automation record when it reaches the In Point if active then exit record at the Out Point if active If the In Point is not active the transport will still preroll and pass it allowing you to punch in when ready by pressing the rn key If the Out Point is not active the transport will go into record at the In Point then stay in record until you manually exit Fairlight QUANTUM Page 247 AUTOMATION November 13 2014 The transport continues to play after the Out point until you s
196. e three kinds of selection in the QUANTUM system selection One or more signal paths When a path is selected it responds to mixing automation commands like IN and OUT and is available for Touch Write If it is a track it also becomes a target for editing commands like cut clip and fade head Called Channel One path i e Track Live Bus Group or Monitors Also Known as the Current Channel The Current Channel is the target of all signal processing commands like changes in panning and EQ It appears in the QUANTUM Pad Current Track One track only the last one that was selected In most cases it is also the Current Channel It becomes the target for some special edit commands that can be performed on only one track How to Select To select do one of the following e Press a QUANTUM path button in the rows above or below the Pad e Click a track number in the Editing Screen e Click in the body of a track on the Editing Screen but avoid clips The last track you select in this way becomes the Current Track How to Call To Call a channel do one of the following e Press a QUANTUM path button in the rows above or below the Pad It it s already selected you will need to turn it off first then turn it on e Press the cauL button on a fader e Inthe Mixer Screen click on a channel name e Inthe Mixer Screen double click on a channel s Pan EQ Dynamics Aux or Plug in graph Fairlight QUANTUM Page 11 CENTRAL TA
197. ead GUI Thread driven by CC 1 96 Channel Audio Bridge from Fairlight CC 1 Engine Client Application Ableton RT Thread GUI Thread Fairlight QUANTUM Page 275 PLUG INS REWIRE AND EXTERNAL PROCESSING November 13 2014 Using ReWire Devices in QUANTUM p es i 1 vi 11 4 0 Joe or be site ake pie w 7 E a a 2 N M2 WT Me N M 3I A B W OO D W a d a as dF aS ST ae 1 gyinosa cacy LS ME e a _ ________i rr a et ____ Setup and installation Step 1 Install your software as outlined by your the manufacturer Step 2 Run the software at least once in standalone mode Step 3 The software should now appear in the list of available ReWire devices Launching a Rewire Application In order to patch a Rewire device a Rewire application must be installed first e g Reason Ableton Live Step 1 Click on Setup in the Post V5 0 toolbar Step 2 Select Setup Instruments to launch the dialogue box Your Rewire application should appear in this list Step 3 Click on the name of the desired Rewire application so it is highlighted Fairlight QUANTUM Page 276 PLUG INS REWIRE AND EXTERNAL PROCESSING November 13 2014 Highlight rewire application Step 4 Step 5 Instrument MIDI Device MIDI Channel Ableton Live Reason Adapted Click Edit to launch Click on Edit at the bottom of the dialogue box Note Some programs eg Reason will launch autom
198. eeaeees 129 QUANTUM s Quick Edit Layout 130 Importing from Other Projects 0008 134 Gating Cups eisa 135 Replacing Audio Media ccccccecseeeeeees 137 Undo and ECO cei 292 piesa 138 Mouse Based EGiting ccccceeeseeeeeeeeees 141 TAGE TOOID aM taciic sci Mea vaeei Scie Sieieeetet chet 146 Display Layering cccccseseeesseeeeeceeeeeeeseees 150 Group CIOS Aenea es ts cee et 151 Clip EqQualiSation cccccceeeeceeessseeeeeessaeees 154 a 62 play See Pe me Pn eee Om 154 Mouse Edit Menus ccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 157 TIME DOMAIN PROCESSING 160 Bo 16 E BEER EES EE ene a re ert atin te ee pene 160 Using VocAlign Processing ceeeee 166 REMOVING CIICKS cccccseeeeeceeseeeceeeseeeseees 167 Serato Pitch n Time cccsceseeeeeeeeeeeeees 168 AUDIOBASE CLIP SEARCH CLIPSTORES QTUBE 000 170 PUCIOB ASS cick ease eee cee kee 170 Clip SC ANGI cect teeth a atin 173 OID BINS ocak aa uae dad ee ee 175 CID SIONS faiteced coset ttle N 175 TM Cs a festa acest ec aeein anecene ds nactietebaxannae nde 177 GROUPING i siiisccsstctncatnitininaciaceecica 179 MOGUC IO Meier enemestan eee a ete mete ie 179 Summary Of GroupS ccceeceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 179 HNK GROUPS es a nua ichuisisealauias 179 Fader Groups VCAS seseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 185 Naming a GOUD eniran 188 MIXING
199. eft and right Left and right movement is bounded by the next and previous events The value of the highest point is shown in the display above e Deleted using the Del key e Create a new event by clicking where there is currently no event e Combine moving and creating by clicking above or below the line If there is no point at the timecode where you clicked one will be created but if there is one within a quarter frame of where you clicked it will be raised or lowered to your mouse position Drawing Drawing allows you to create automation data using the mouse To begin drawing click the Draw button Now click and drag on any selected track to create or replace automation data Glide Make a range and click the Glide button This will create a smooth ramp between the values at the beginning and end of the range Undo Automation changes made by editing or redrawing can be undone using Undo in the normal way An unlimited number of undo steps is provided Data Storage All the mix data of the current mix is stored in system memory This data must be explicitly saved to disk as a named mix If a new project is loaded the previous mix data is retained in memory and may be saved as a mix in the new project Mix Thinning QUANTUM offers a Mix thinning algorithm that ignores identical static mix data This is especially useful for large amounts of mix data as it can largely reduce the actual number of mix events When automati
200. elatively by the Group Master fader To do this you must either e Add the Group Master to a fader set e This is done using the Mapping software See page 228 e CALL the Group Master then control it with the Pad Level control To call the Group Master click on its Name Plate on the QUANTUM Mixer Screen e Use the mouse directly on the Mixer Screen by moving the Group Master faders Fairlight QUANTUM Page 185 GROUPING November 13 2014 Displaying Group Membership The QUANTUM Mixer Screen screen always displays VCA group membership as shown below Track Track Track Track Track Arack ack Track Track Track Track Track Track Track rat 4 oo 26 aE 0 29 a al Ie 4 a4 35 36 Assignment to Fader Groups Global Assignment Fader Group membership can be controlled globally using the Grouping Window To open this Click gt Fairlight QUANTUM Page 186 GROUPING November 13 2014 Gi 1 m om m m dfgh TRACKB bewxbx 3k3 I L bzvxbx 3k3 c bewxbx 3k3 I R bzwxbx 3k3 bewxbx 3k3 bzvxbx 3k3 I B Ungroup 1 Track 13 L Track 13 R Track 13 C Track 13 B Track 13 Ls Track 13 Rs Track 19 Track 20 Track 21 Track 22 Track 23 Track 24 Grp 7 Ungroup Track 25 Track 26 Track 27 Track 28 Track 29 Track 30 Track 31 Track 32 Track 33 Track 34 Track 35 Track 36 ALL T Grp 2 Grp 2 Grp 2 Grp 2 Track 37 Track 38 Track 39 Track 40 Track 41 Track 42 Track 43 Track 44 Track 45 Track 46 Track
201. elected QUANTUM is the MIDI Machine Control master e Pyxis selecting Pyxis Track as one of your machines allows you to take it offline the same way as physical machines See Editing with Machine Control on page 346 to see how this works e VITC Chase will chase VITC Vertical Interval Timecode including at low speed e Rewire Mixer e No Port No port selected Note You can have only one Master machine at a time but you can have as many slave machines as you like limited only by available ports Master and Slave machines can be used concurrently Press M1 and or M2 keys or use the Online checkbox or click the M1 M2 M3 screen buttons to place machines online Enter an Offset if desired Use the red Video Analog and Digital LEDs to arm tracks on your remote device as required Note The master Video Arm Enabled box must be checked and each video Arm En box must also be checked on the desired device before the Video arm LED can be used to arm the video track Click the Eject button to eject tape from the desired device Note that controls will only appear if they are relevant to the selected device type Config Click the Config button to set transport ballistics for the different machine types TC Master When a machine M1 or M2 with this setting is placed on line it means that QUANTUM will control the transport of a 9 pin machine but will chase the position of that machine in all tran
202. ent clip The current clip is the one currently touching the play head on the active track Having captured those values you can apply them to any other red clip by clicking the Clip button Untick shape or length if you don t want to apply it Cross Fades If a fade is placed on a clip and there is another clip layered underneath a cross fade between the two will automatically be induced Cross fade parameters can be modified with the soft key menu functions Induced crossfades are complementary that is to say the clip underneath is faded with exactly the opposite shape to the clip on top If the clip underneath already has its own fade overlapping the time of the upper clip s crossfade then no induced fade occurs In the following illustration clip layering has been turned on double press the takes button or View Display Layering Fairlight QUANTUM Page 118 EDITING November 13 2014 Induced crossfade note lower curve No induced fade lower fade overlaps XFade New Method Making a crossfade between two clips requires that they overlap The new Xfade method creates the trim overlap at the same time as the crossfade The resulting crossfade is centred around the cursor This work is done in the Xfade dialog To open tt e Press the Make Xfade soft key or e Issue the command Fades Xfade The Xfade dialog allows you to specify a Duration X Point expressed as a and X Level in dB Clic
203. er Use audio After gating with the audio broken up into multiple clips NOTE As with many other editing functions in Post V5 0 the original audio is not affected by clip gating only the clips that reference it Any audio removed by gating can be recovered using the Trim function see Trim Function under the chapter on Editing You have the choice to use the profile or the audio to calculate the levels used by the gate function Using the audio is absolutely accurate but takes a little longer to scan Replacing Audio Media As mentioned elsewhere in this manual a clip is a reference to a piece of media on disk Editing the clips is non destructive to the media it simply changes the portion of the media being played by the clip Sometimes it is also valuable to change the media played by a clip This can be done in two ways e Replace the media of the selected clips e Replace the media of all project clips using a particular piece of media at the moment Step 1 Select one or more clips by the usual methods You can use All Layers to affect the clips on all layers and you can use a Range to select multiple clips horizontally in this case only clips lying entirely inside the range will be affected Step 2 Issue the command Process Change Media Selected Clips The system displays a dialog where you can browse for a media file Fairlight QUANTUM Page 137 Step 3 EDITING November 13 2014 Choose ne
204. et access to the material stored by the background recorder When you press Harvest the current contents of the destination holding tank are moved to the project s media folder The media folder is opened so you can see the new recordings From there you can drag them into the project or just leave them for later use If background recording was in progress when you clicked Harvest the current recording is terminated to allow its media to be moved and a new recording started immediately Note Harvest is NOT available when recording into MT files only DR2 files This is the same as Harvest except that it also puts the recorded material into clips on the clipboard one clip for each recording You will see the ghosts of the recorded clips hovering over the selected tracks Clipboard is available for MT and DR2 projects This places a copy of the clipboard at the current cursor position It s exactly the same as pressing the Enter button when you are in the Cut or Copy menu Go Stop button Go Starts the background recording This button is only available when the background recorder is stopped Fairlight QUANTUM Page 81 RECORDING November 13 2014 If there is a recording already in the destination holding tank it will be discarded This could happen if you are recording then click Stop then click Go without using Harvest or Clipboard in between Stop Stops the background recording This button is only ava
205. ether a Range is active or some other state Clip Head Tail Keys These keys execute the most basic functions of the current Menu For example when the current Menu is Erase they erase the Clip Head or Tail of the current selection The current selection is usually the clip s touching the cursor on the selected track s Selected clips are shown in red When a range is present the Clip key changes to a Range key executing the basic Menu command on all clips in the range The Clip Head Tail keys display the name of the current Menu to remind you what will happen when they are pressed Fairlight QUANTUM Page 24 CENTRAL TACTILE CONTROL November 13 2014 sometimes the Clip Head Tail keys display a Jog icon This means that you can hold down that key and turn the Jog Wheel to influence your edit The edit is completed when you release the key For example pressing Cut Head and Jogging forward will move the head of the selected clip s forward in time to be pasted when you release Cut Head Clip Head Tail Menus Holding down Clip Head or Tail as opposed to quickly pressing and releasing them opens a layout displaying the group of commands that can act on a Clip a Head or a Tail respectively When a Range is present the Clip button displays commands that can act on a Range For example holding down Clip displays the commands that can be executed on a clip Mame CLIP Holding down the Clip button displays most of CLIP
206. etup is a new menu containing automation parameters Fairlight QUANTUM Page 29 CENTRAL TACTILE CONTROL November 13 2014 Auto Auto Wlr ite Stop Touch Glide Setup Enab Trim Event Cit 10 tr Punch Menu Punch Menu accesses commands for instant or programmed automation write entry for all selected channels p p Stive Pinch Ut Menu ET to Purch For many users this is the easiest way to manage automation sessions Prime Prime is a state where automation write entry is linked to recording This allows users to make a live recording of their mix punching in on a finished audio track while simultaneously recording all mixer moves needed to create that mix Preview Preview is a mixer state where controls can be adjusted freely without disturbing the written automation data Once the desired settings have been discovered it s easy to punch them into the data either live or by overwriting existing data All Read All Read is your panic button It instantly drops all channels out of Automation write or trim Fairlight QUANTUM Page 30 CHANNELS November 13 2014 Channels Introduction QUANTUM provides six types of channel e Video Tracks include record and playback capability plus basic editing e Audio Tracks include record and playback capability plus full editing and mixing e MIDI Tracks can record and edit MIDI parts e Live Feeds bring audio straight from an input to the mix with full
207. eview is toggled ON selecting any signal path puts it into Preview Read to Preview Pressing this soft key while signal paths are in Preview status will load the current Read value of enabled parameters into the control fader or pot It can then be used to fill range glide range or as the basis for starting an automation pass Fairlight QUANTUM Page 253 AUTOMATION November 13 2014 Clipboard to Preview This is a way of copying automation data from any point to any other The clipboard is loaded in the Path Copy menu by pressing the copy soft key Then in the Preview menu pressing the Clipboard to Preview softkey loads the copied value of enabled parameters into their controls fader pot or switch for all signal paths in Preview status From there it can be used to fill range glide range or as the basis for starting an automation pass Flood range This command is also in the Path Copy menu and is connected to the above After copying a channel s parameters to the clipboard you can flood fill them directly into the automation range for another path To use make a range and select the source path Copy the mix parameters from the selected path by pressing the copy soft key Now select the destination path and press the flood range soft key All the enabled parameters will be pasted to fill the range with automation values from the source to the destination Automation with Link Groups Link groups are useful for dealing
208. f the EQ parameters Saving EQ Presets The system allows you to save the current EQ settings and later retrieve and apply them To save an EQ setting do the following Step 1 Type a new name into the Presets field or use an old name if you want to change its settings Step 2 Set the EQ values to the ones you want to save by editing or simply by picking up the values by touching an existing clip Click the Save button To retrieve an EQ setting select it from the Preset drop list It can then be applied immediately to the currently selected clip or range of clips A saved EQ setting can be deleted by first selecting it from the drop list then clicking the Delete button A special preset can be created called default Whenever the Clip EQ display is opened for a clip with no EQ this preset will automatically be loaded into the display Mouse Edit Menus The screen Edit Menus provide many commands that are available elsewhere in the system and some that are not The mouse can be used to access these commands Fairlight QUANTUM Page 157 EDITING November 13 2014 Edit Menu Undo Ctrl F Undoes the last edit Redo Ctray Redoes the last edit that was undone Undo List Shows a list of the edits that can be undone Redo List Shows a list of the edits that can be redone Undo History Shows a list of the edits that can be undone Cut Ctrlax Cuts the selected clip or range to the clipboard Cut Head Cut Tail Copy Ctrl C
209. fe mode Step 1 Press the Auto Safe button in the Automation Megamode Step 2 Click on the screen to choose signal paths and make them safe Active Zone In addition the Safe menu defines an Active Zone outside of which no automation data can be written for ANY signal path To set the Active Zone Step 1 Enter the Auto Safe menu as described above Step 2 Use the In and out soft keys to set the timecode range that you wish to automate Step 3 Toggle the Active Zone soft key on When the Active Zone is on the mixer receives no timecode outside the selected range This means it cannot read or write automation But inside the selected range automation functions work normally Recording Mix Data Mix Events Mix data is recorded as discrete events Each event occurs at a specific timecode location and relates to a specific mix item When a new mix Is started there are no events recorded and all controls will remain Static as the project is played Once mix data is recorded it is played back or read when the transport runs past the timecode at which the event is recorded If the transport is located to any point in the project the mixer state will reflect the result of all the events that have occurred from the start of the project to the current timecode Fairlight QUANTUM Page 243 AUTOMATION November 13 2014 The static snapshot recorded with every mix preserves the basic setup and balance of the mix Dynamic move events are added
210. ff 20 0 Oscillator level dB 1000 Oscillator frequency scam Gh Wakes GF Cede A Meron Noise White Pink ies Main VU Follows 20 0 WU reference level dB 0 0 VU Trim left dB 0 0 VU Trim right dB Digital VU meters Now open the 3D Panner by double clicking the Pan Graph in QUANTUM Mixer Screen right clicking the Pan graph in FMC or double pressing the Path button in QUANTUM XCS Fairlight QUANTUM Page 306 Pyxis TRACK November 13 2014 FX Stereo 1 and click the video button The Pyxis Window will now display the Pan Theatre Fairlight QUANTUM Page 307 MIDI TRACKS November 13 2014 MIDI Tracks Introduction A licence is required to access the MIDI features so what follows only applies if you have purchased tt Any number of tracks on the Edit Screen can be made into MIDI tracks by default they are all audio tracks The software can e Create MIDI Tracks e Record MIDI events in realtime e Load MIDI song files e Cut and paste MIDI clips e Edit the contents of MIDI clips Setup A registry entry is required for MIDI commands to be visible Your Fairlight distributor should set this up for you when your licence is purchased The registry entry is as follows HKEY CURRENT USER Software FairlightAU Dream II Global Setup midiTracksEnabled Its value must be 1 You will need a MIDI controller keyboard or other and at least one MIDI instrument to play out These must be inst
211. folders is copied into the Media folder for the current Project file as new WAV files Once a project is localized it is much easier to move it to another system or back it up because all the media is in one place To localize files in a DR2 project select the Localize command from the Process Menu above the Editing screen The displayed dialog will ask whether you want to localize all files or just the selected ones Selected Clips Only Handles in Seconds Head 1 0 Tail E Handles Localizing only copies those sections of the original recordings that have been actually used in the project Anything that has been edited out will not be present To provide insurance for future editing you can save Handles on each piece of audio These are extra pieces of audio that can be exposed using the Trim menu Its advisable to use handles unless the edit is absolutely final Recovering Lost WAVs If a DR2 project has not been saved recently any recordings made since the last save will not appear in the project next time it is opened These recordings can be recovered and resynced as follows Step 1 Open the DR2 Project Step 2 Open the folder in Windows Explorer that contains this project Open its Media folder Step 3 Identify the WAVs that are missing from the project These will normally be the most recent ones i e the ones with the latest modification date step 4 Drag the missing WAV files from their folder to t
212. fore it can be heard Note Insert sends and returns are only heard if patched to physical outputs inputs or to other paths Sends can be sent to the input of any path in the system and returns can come from the output or send of any path This is done in the Patch I O screen press the Patch I O button Fairlight QUANTUM Page 210 MIXING November 13 2014 Panning Post V5 0 supported surround formats are Stereo LCRS LCRSS 5 1 6 1 and 7 1 Panning IN OUT Boom send ON OFF Boom While operating the pan controls the Pad gives a visual representation of the pan position and divergence A complex example is shown below Panning of 6 way Link Group showing Rotation and Divergence Basic Panning Use the L R and F B controls for basic panning If the Main Bus format does not have surround channels the F B control will still be shown but will do nothing Spread Only available when a link group is selected The spread control adjusts the perceived size of a Surround mix Diverge Spreads the signal of an individual feed across more of the adjacent loudspeakers making the perceived size of the sound source larger Rotate Rotate controls the left right and front back pan control to rotate the surround mix around the centre of the room Using the panner Step 1 Call a signal path to the Joystick panel by pressing the caii button on any fader Step 2 Adjust the control to achieve the desired result B
213. g Clicks Clicks in audio media can be removed by rewriting waveform data using a simple linear smoothing algorithm Step 1 To enter the Wave Menu press the WAVE key Step 2 Select the track where the click is found Step 3 Identify the click by zooming in very close and position the click exactly under the cursor Step 4 Press the Remove Click soft key Step 5 The Width soft key becomes active This should be set to match the number of samples occupied by the click To do this turn the Jog Wheel until the red range on the screen matches the width of the click Step 6 When the width is correctly set press the Enter key to execute the command Note that the click must not be in the fade in or fade out area of a clip and that the command does not work on linked clips i e Multi Channel clips Undo is available after using the Remove Click command Fairlight QUANTUM Page 167 TIME DOMAIN PROCESSING November 13 2014 Serato Pitch n Time Serato Pitch n Time FE has been available in Fairlight systems for many years as a paid option For owners of this option the software continues to work as previously This is described below Serato can change length without changing pitch or pitch without changing length and hear the result in real time as you jump from clip to clip Note Pitch n Time FE requires an iLok USB Security Key and a valid license Licenses can be purchased at http www serato com Step 1 To enter
214. g Mode i e Jog has been pressed Shuttle To shuttle the transport hold down the BLUE key and press Jog The jogger wheel will then increase and decrease the transport velocity in forward and reverse Press the FF or REW keys to reverse the shuttle direction To shuttle at normal speed press PLAY then hold down the BLUE key and press Joc Fairlight QUANTUM Page 61 TRANSPORT November 13 2014 The transport key LEDs reflect the current speed and direction For example if shuttling reaches play speed the play light comes on Looping Overview Looping means playing the same section over and over There will normally be a pause at the start of the loop while the system loads audio from the hard disk ready to play The loop uses a start and end timecode which can be set in a number of ways Looping can use a preroll and postroll See below for options Loop Commands To set Loop parameters visit the Edit Loop menu by holding down Mode and pressing Edit Loop The following soft keys will become available Pre Roll Used to set the system Preroll Press this soft key then choose a number of seconds to be the system Preroll Post Roll Used to set the system Postroll Press this soft key then choose a number of seconds to be the system Postroll Use Rolls If you toggle this option on the loop will add the system preroll and postroll to its start and end points Clip Uses the clip under the cursor on the current Edit
215. g the current value will be held until the next change in automation value Here is how it looks when On Stop is set to HOLD U4 TRACK IN In this case the red line continues at the same value to the end of the screen because this value will be written to the end of the project 4 TRACK IN TO DI 16 bit 0 Editing Automation Curves Automation data can be edited graphically using the mouse To do this click the Edit button There are two ways to edit Events and Draw Events To edit Events click on the Events button Events are shown as red squares Note that each event is a value of the parameter After an event the value stays constant until just before the next event when it ramps up or down to the next value When events are close together as shown above they are joined by a smooth line reflecting this ramp Otherwise the values are held constant and shown with a horizontal line While Events are displayed you may do any of the following e Move an individual event with the mouse Fairlight QUANTUM Page 260 AUTOMATION November 13 2014 You may change the event value move up or down or its timecode move left or right The timecode position is bounded by the next and previous events The timecode and current value of the event are shown in the Automation Edit group of the Smart Pane e Select one or more events by making a box marquee with the mouse Selected events may be e Dragged up and down or l
216. g to expand them Fairlight QUANTUM Page 182 GROUPING November 13 2014 Destroying a Link Group Link groups are destroyed from the Link Group menu Step 1 Hold down Mode Step 2 Press Link Group button step 3 Select a Link Group Step 4 Select unlink Panning Link Groups When a Link Group is the Current Path the pan controls act on each Link Group member at the same time The system maintains a Spread Box for each Link Group which affects panning behaviour Fairlight QUANTUM Page 183 GROUPING November 13 2014 T babr 33 bzvxbx 3k3 Link Group with default panning Spread box is set to maximum size so Link Group members are panned as wide as possible Cntr 100F Library bzvxbx 3k3 Spread box is set to 70 so members are brought inwards Now the whole Spread box can be moved LR and FB Library The Spread Control The spread control is only available when a link group is selected The spread control adjusts the perceived size of a surround mix The spread control range is from 0 to 100 At 0 the display reads POINT meaning point source At 100 the display reads FULL meaning full surround At FULL spread Fairlight QUANTUM Page 184 GROUPING November 13 2014 the LR and FB pan controls have no effect as each member of the link group is hard panned to their respective bus elements As the spread is reduced the panning of each link group member is made to converge with the location of
217. gt product 65535 GDB 09 43 00 gt version 1 1 GDB 09 43 00 gt name USB Audio Device 3 GDB 09 43 00 gt Midi IN 3 of 4 name USB Audio Device 4 Fairlight QUANTUM Page 351 HUI SLAVE MODE November 13 2014 GDB 09 43 00 gt MIDI in device 3 GDB 09 43 00 gt manufacturer 65535 GDB 09 43 00 gt product 65535 GDB 09 43 00 gt version 1 1 GDB 09 43 00 gt name USB Audio Device 4 GDB 09 43 00 gt Midi Out 0 of 5 name USB Audio Device GDB 09 43 00 gt MIDI Out device 0 GDB 09 43 00 gt manufacturer 65535 GDB 09 43 00 gt product 65535 GDB 09 43 00 gt version 1 1 GDB 09 43 00 gt name USB Audio Device GDB 09 43 00 gt Midi Out 1 of 5 name USB Audio Device 2 GDB 09 43 00 gt MIDI Out device 1 GDB 09 43 00 gt manufacturer 65535 GDB 09 43 00 gt product 65535 GDB 09 43 00 gt version 1 1 GDB 09 43 00 gt name USB Audio Device 2 GDB 09 43 00 gt Midi Out 2 of 5 name USB Audio Device 3 GDB 09 43 00 gt MIDI Out device 2 GDB 09 43 00 gt manufacturer 65535 GDB 09 43 00 gt product 65535 GDB 09 43 00 gt version 1 1 GDB 09 43 00 gt name USB Audio Device 3 GDB 09 43 00 gt Midi Out 3 of 5 name USB Audio Device 4 GDB 09 43 00 gt MIDI Out device 3 GDB 09 43 00 gt manufacturer 65535 GDB 09 43 00 gt product 65535 GDB 09 43 00 gt version 1 1 GDB 09 43 00 gt name USB Audio Device 4 GDB 09 43 00 gt Midi
218. h for a desired plug in to be used on this clip Press the Edit soft key to display the plug in controls Park the timeline on the clip that you would like to process and press the Preview softkey The clip will automatically start looping and you can now adjust all parameters in real time Fairlight QUANTUM Page 272 PLUG INS REWIRE AND EXTERNAL PROCESSING November 13 2014 Lelis Ilmila Lelis ilm i 7 10 01 10 02 Opin Master 5X20 Internal SURI RS P2561 Top Layers D 178 18 56 Step 6 When the clip sounds the way you want press the render softkey This will directly render your plug in processing to the clip the original clip is still there on an underneath layer so that you can quickly go back to the original recording if required Lells imio Bass Pre_04 24 bit 23 46 40 14 ec Opin Master SX20 Internal PREC OR Sepa Top Layers D 178 15 17 el 23 52 43 10 Ce a fos Fairlight QUANTUM Page 273 PLUG INS REWIRE AND EXTERNAL PROCESSING November 13 2014 Note POST V5 0 systems provide full native processing on every channel including EQ Filters Dynamics and surround panning This means plug ins can be reserved for special applications The Clip FX Smart Pane The Clip FX Smart Pane shows a history of the plug ins that have been rendered into the current clip i e the clip under the cursor on the Current Track This pane is shown whenever the Wave menu is current
219. h to save On the screen click the preset you wish to load select the destination signal path s Click the Apply button If you choose an all console preset it doesn t matter which signal path is selected because the whole console will be loaded Fairlight QUANTUM Page 234 MIXING November 13 2014 Deleting a Preset Unwanted library presets can be deleted by following these steps Step 1 Press the Lib key to display the library menu and screen page Step 2 Press the chan EQ chan dyn all chan Or all console soft key to select the type of preset you wish to delete Step 3 Turn the jog wheel to scroll through the list of available library presets for the selected type Step 4 Press the Delete soft key then press the Yes soft key to confirm the operation Fairlight QUANTUM Page 235 AUTOMATION November 13 2014 Automation Introduction The QUANTUM automation system provides simple flexible and comprehensive facilities for recording and editing mix automation data All feed and bus mix parameters can be automated and played back in perfect synchronisation with the project audio In addition to the channel parameters bus assignments inserts and direct outs may also be recorded The QUANTUM automation system is designed to allow the operator to record all the static and dynamic parameter changes involved in balancing the mix of tracks played back from the disk recorder and live feeds from external sources Mix moves may b
220. h types of track have the full complement of processing options namely native EQ Dynamics and Delay plus up to 6 VST plug ins and can feed into all the system buses COND Live Feed A signal path channel fed from a live real time signal that has been brought from a physical input and can be processed and routed to mix buses and monitoring Bus Destination of a mixing operation Feeds are usually routed to buses via a multiformat surround panner Buses may be configured with various multichannel formats such as stereo LCRS or 5 1 Multitrack buses provide bus paths for summing feeds to be recorded to disk or other I O Bus Element One component signal of a bus e g left right centre or surround Bus elements are automatically allocated to individual buses as they are created Each system has a finite number of bus elements which will limit the format of buses as they are created A full sized QUANTUM has 72 available bus elements allowing for example 1 X 5 1 main bus 4 x 5 1 sub buses 2 X 5 1 auxes 12 X stereo auxes and 3 multi track buses Anything Missing If you find there s some aspect of QUANTUM that is not explained or Xplained adequately please let us know You can email documentation fairlight com au With new releases of software you ll sometimes get a new version of this manual that adds more information You can also download the latest version from Fairlight s website www fairlightau com Fairlight QUA
221. haracters e g dog means anything starting with dog o Stands for one character e g dog means starts with dog and contains one more character o amp means AND e g dog amp cat means contains dog and also contains cat o means OR e g dog cat means contains dog or contains cat Fairlight QUANTUM Page 172 AUDIOBASE CLIP SEARCH CLIPSTORES QTUBE November 13 2014 Clip Search Clip Search is useful for handling clips in your current project your attached library project your project Bin and any ClipStores you can access It does not require any database setup or software Clip Search incorporates the following capabilities e Search for clips by name within the current project and attached libraries e Search within Clip Bins and ClipStores e Preview or audition found clips e Paste found clips into the project e Locate to found clips e Pop change layers of clips within the e Export clips Accessing Clip Search project Clip Search can be accessed in the following ways e Press GoTo Clip e Click View gt Clip Search a a 3 4 3 1 2 2 4 1 1 2 1 1 3 1 1 2 i Bin O1 i D FairlightAU Audio Clipstore Andri While the Clip Search dialog is open you can Fairlight QUANTUM Page 173 0002 20 23 00 02 29 01 00 48 09 18 00 48 45 18 00 49 46 14 00 16 07 15 00 48 11 17 00 49 14 12 00 51 05 10 00 55 27 06
222. he Call button puts that channel into the Pad It does not select the channel for editing or mass channel mixing operations Its action is NOT equivalent to pressing the channel s selection button on the QUANTUM surface because e The selection button selects the channel as well as calling it e The selection button can TOGGLE the channel on and off The CALL button makes the channel the current Pad channel and only asserts does not toggle Auto button The Auto button changes the automation state of the channel that owns the fader strip If Preview is on the channel is toggled in and out of preview Otherwise if Write is selected the channel is toggled into and out of Write or if Trim is selected it is toggled into and out of Trim Fader Function The standard fader function is to control the send level of the channel to its assigned buses i e Main Bus and sub buses Faders To Faders can also control a number of other parameters At any time there is an alternate fader function To activate the alternate fader function Step 1 Select the Mixer Megamode on the QUANTUM surface by holding down Mode and press Mixer Step 2 Press and release the Faders To button It lights up to show the the alternate function is active To select the alternate function for the faders Step 1 Select the Mixer Megamode on the QUANTUM surface by holding down Mode and press Mixer Step 2 Hold down the Faders To button After a
223. he POST V5 0 track display and drop them there Step 5 For each WAV file that you have dropped select it and notice the track number embedded in its Fairlight QUANTUM Page 320 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT November 13 2014 name Place it on that track Step 6 For each WAV file select it by moving the transport until it is underneath the play head then issue the command Edit Resync to Record Time This will place the clip at the time where it was originally recorded Open Project Like Last One There is an option in the New Project dialog called Retain attributes of Existing Project If selected the new project is created using the last project as a template which means the new project retains the track count rates and the track names from the last project Waveform Profiles Post V5 0 stores waveform profiles for all the media in your projects allowing it to display full screen waveforms at any zoom range The waveform profiles are extracted and stored in the background during and after any recording or import function or whenever a piece of media does not have a profile If a number of clips have no profiles selected ones are given preference during calculation and display After some time the number of profiles can get quite large and use a lot of space on your computer The system automatically deletes profiles if they have not been used for a certain number of days To control how many days use the command Setup Gener
224. he Solo button Step 5 Press exit Gating Clips The Gate Clips function is a rough but quick and useful way to remove unwanted silence or near silence from clips Using the Gate Clips Function First you will need to select the track s using the track feed keys and select the clip s either by selecting a range or by parking the playback head over the desired clips You are now ready to perform the Gate Clips function To do this Step 1 Hold Mode and select Basic Edit Fairlight QUANTUM Page 135 EDITING November 13 2014 Step 2 Press the button The gate preview window is displayed automatically Step 3 Move any of the or select the or soft keys and turn the See below The threshold controls the level below which audio will be removed The grey areas show that will be erased by the gate The Tail Handle adds extra audio of the length you choose AFTER the level has dropped below threshold The head handle adds extra audio of the length you choose BEFORE the level drops below threshold Step 4 When you are happy with the amount retained versus the amount removed from the graphic representation click the button press to process your settings All pink areas in the clip will be removed retaining the grey areas Fairlight QUANTUM Page 136 EDITING November 13 2014 Threshold dB 11 5 Tail Handle fr 24 Head Handle fr 2 2 Threshold Source Use profiles fast
225. he full frequency range available on each of them Filter Type Choices are P Band pass filter gt High pass filter lt Low pass filter Each band can be set to any filter type Mouse click on the button to cycle amongst the choices Frequency The centre frequency of each band Gain The gain of the band Range 99 to 20dB Q This displays the Q of the band or indicates the type of shelf Range 0 99 Enables Used with the Apply command Only the Enabled bands are applied to the selected clips Value Grid Fairlight QUANTUM Page 155 EDITING November 13 2014 The Value Grid shows all the current parameters of the EQ being changed Changing a Parameter To choose a parameter numerically click with the mouse in the cell you would like to change You may move across the grid using the Tab key going towards the right or Shift Tab going towards the left There are several ways to change the value of a parameter once chosen Type a number on the QWERTY keyboard If you type a number that is out of range the field background turns red In this case use the Backspace button to remove digits until the red colour disappears The minus sign can be used in the Gain fields Use the up and down arrows to make small changes The Frequency and Gain values can directly be chosen and changed with the mouse by dragging the red dots in the graph area There is no limit to the frequency Range for each band so you can have yo
226. he metronome is created by the Oscillator To hear it use the Patch 1 0 page to patch the output of the Oscillator Noise channel to an open track or live feed Recording MIDI Clips Arm the MIDI track by clicking on the record button at the left of the screen Put it in record using the normal transport commands MIDI clips can be recorded on top of each other just like audio clips As usual the top layer is heard Fades and crossfades have no effect Fairlight QUANTUM Page 310 MIDI TRACKS November 13 2014 00 00 47 21 OOO 4200 OO 00 45 00 OOOO 45 00 i MIDI clips show black and white notes at their relative pitches Editing MIDI Clips MIDI clips can be edited using the Cut Copy and Erase menus just like audio clips Head tail clip and range are all understood in the same way The Trim head and tail commands plus the Slip Clip command work as expected In addition the clips can be mouse dragged individually or in ranges and edited with QWERTY shortcuts in the same way as audio Clips Each copy of an original MIDI recording is independent so if MIDI Note Editing see below is used on one of them the other one will not change MIDI clips cannot be pasted on to audio tracks or the video track nor vice versa Names can be added to the MIDI clips then changed if desired using either the Name Clip command from the QUANTUM Editor Megamode or the Clip gt Rename command MIDI Note Editing The syste
227. hich is visible in the Edit Megamode You can press it at any time in any transport mode Marks are shown above the track display in the Edit Screen as yellow pointers SS lc SS a T os 635 00 00 10 02439 00 0 u 10 02 40 01 To locate to a Mark Step 1 Press the Go To button Step 2 Press the mark soft key Step 3 The Marks dialog appears on the Edit Screen Fairlight QUANTUM Page 67 TRANSPORT November 13 2014 Index Time Line Marker 00 02 56 18 00 03 28 09 00 04 06 10 00 04 25 11 00 04 39 11 00 04 51 01 00 05 15 09 00 05 46 2721 00 0200 18 00 04 03 10 00 07 57 12 my mark Mark 4 Video Locator 0 Video Locator 1 Video Locator 2 Video Locator 3 00 06 42 01 Video Locator 4 00 05 55 05 Video Locator 5 i4 00 06 13 2721 BREE eww oe WNI m There you can choose a Mark with the mouse or scroll down to it with the Jog Wheel or step down to it with the key Step 4 Having chosen your Mark press the Go To button again or ENTER to locate to the displayed timecode or Play to locate and go into play immediately or press Esc upper left key to close the dialog without locating anywhere anywhere While the Marks dialog is open you can do all sorts of other things to Marks like rename them change their timecode location remove them from the list and so on This requires mouse clicking and uses familiar dialogs Note
228. ialog box enable Use Mouse Wheel The Mixer Screen must be in focus if the Editor Screen is in focus the mouse wheel causes zooming of the tracks To get the Mixer Screen in focus simply click anywhere on the screen For mouse wheel control of any fader or rotary knob in any of the Mixer Screen displays hover the mouse pointer over the control and turn the wheel Fairlight QUANTUM Page 208 MIXING November 13 2014 For fine control hold down the SHIFT button while turning the mouse wheel Virtual Channel All other functions can be controlled using the POST V5 0 Virtual Channel shown below tek OO Eee DREAM II irtual Channel ow boom 5 stim m Dynamics Aux Sends Buy Assign amp YCA NINE fn Click on any Click on any knob Hover the mouse over Click and Click switch to toggle it and drag around it any box or knob and drag the and to to change its use the mouse wheel fader change value to change its value channels e To open the Virtual Channel double click a channel name in the EVO Mixer Screen screen In the above example we have selected Track 8 e To close the Virtual Channel right click anywhere inside it e While it is open you may move to the next or previous channel by clicking the and buttons next to the channel name Click to select next or previous channel Fairlight QUANTUM Page 209 MIXING November 13 2014 Input Section 48 V and Mic Control
229. ies pan settings to each member to set the link group into a surround format as described above under Link Group Format Default Fairlight QUANTUM Page 181 GROUPING November 13 2014 pans affects the pan parameter only feed params applies the feed parameter values of the first member of the group to all the members excluding pan This is true even if Relative Groups is selected Parameters modified are fader level EQ dynamics aux sends inserts and direct outs no defaults no feed parameters are modified Alternative fast method for creating Link Groups Step 1 Hold down the BLUE key Step 2 Select a Track Or Live in the Pad This will be the first of a Link Group Step 3 Select a format from the picture keys below For example Stereo or 5 1 This will create a Link Group starting at the track or live you selected with the number of feeds needed to make up the selected format If you choose a format that is too large for the number of unlinked feeds after the selected track nothing will happen Note that Blue Track will also remove linking if the selected track or live is already part of a Link Group Link Group Display If composed of Track Feeds a Link Group is shown in the Editing Screen like this Double click here to collapse or expand the linked tracks You can collapse linked tracks down to the width of one track by double clicking any of the linked tracks close to its left side Do the same thin
230. iion 189 AIPOCUCTION ertir caster Sani 189 BUSING oira inden weir Avni 189 Signal Processing Using the Pad 196 Signal Processing Using the Quantum In Line Pane UEP 2 atarna tania viviaiie 198 Screen Mix Controls cccccccseseeeeeeeeeeeees 200 LOOM PanE Saamen e 214 Processing Order the Path Order Menu 220 Pall CODY aaa eee eee 221 NAS CUMS EE asa ie ace ase ea tenes ke 221 DiFeCUOULDUTS ienie a eats ssdces a 222 OS CIN AION enste adn tected aesatdonc Becocisnes 222 Using Quantum Fader Packs cc0008 224 TENG LIDIA Y aeae 233 AUTOMATION 0ccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeees 236 LPOG UCHOR is eiio enka tneeiee st 236 Automation BaSICS ccccssscceesseeeeeneeeeeseees 236 How to Use Automation cccccseeeeeeeeees 237 Enabling Mix ItOMS ccccccseseeeeseeeeeseeeees 240 Mix Item Status 0 20 0d cent levkcetic ede daceee 242 TOUCA WM Ecci 246 Programmed Automation ccseeeeeeeeee 246 Saving and Loading Mixes ccceeeeeeees 248 WI GO meara cere caer cee eamcesnec as 249 System Mix Save function c cece 250 The Mix M nu ccccceeeeesseeeeeeeeeseeeeesaeees 250 PrEVIEW asida i a ara a 252 Automation with Link Groups 06 254 MIX EGNING ereatione e 254 Copy Project Segment cccccsseeeeeeseeeeees 255 Import Automation from Another Project 255 Automation on SCIreen
231. ilable when the background recorder is recording Apply Allows you to change the number of armed tracks to the recording while it is in motion or change the size of the recording cache This button is only available when the background recorder is recording and after you have changed the number of armed tracks using the Armed Tracks slider or changed the size of the cache using the Cache Length Slider Notes about the Background Recorder lt uses system resources a the audio channels are sent to the disk via AudioBridge channels so those channels are not available to plug ins or virtual instruments b disk bandwidth is used which may impact normal high track count recordings Of course you are using disk capacity as well so it s a good idea to remain aware when the recorder is on or at least to check on the holding tank now and then But by and large the recorder is self cleaning because it throws away old recordings when you click the Go button COND Fairlight QUANTUM Page 82 ADR November 13 2014 ADR Introduction QUANTUM provides the ability to automate recording using a list of In and Out points with a simple interface The ADR menu includes functions for setting pre and post roll and features for automatic dialogue replacement The ADR List The ADR List allows you to set up a list of recordings cues that you want to take Each one has a controlled In and Out point and text that can be displayed on the
232. ime Dragging Directly from Windows Sometimes it is useful to place audio in Clipstores without using it in the project This can be done by dragging files from a Windows Explorer Folder window directly into a open Clipstore in the Clip Search Window The dialog that follows will allow you to choose which of the open ClipStores to target Preview from Windows Explorer Audio files can be previewed directly from Windows Explorer To do this click File gt Import Audio File s This allows you to open up a custom Explorer window allowing Preview Auto Preview click and hear and Audition of individual audio files on the Windows file path You can then either drag drop multiple files directly to the timeline select Paste to place the selected media at the playhead or select Import to place the media at the playhead and exit the dialog Fairlight QUANTUM Page 176 AUDIOBASE CLIP SEARCH CLIPSTORES QTUBE November 13 2014 t Computer Media M WAV2 gt 5 Search WAV2 Organize New folder J I E Desktop Name Title Contributing artists Album mi Downloads J Jan 2012 Recent Places adr wav n t Cybernetic waw Libraries 3 t SWISH 02 Bamboo f g cuments a ve t SWISH 03 Bamboo Music m E Pictures Videos ae Homegroup JE Computer B 5 Local Disk C ca Media Mi G2 This Year fs05 El rr mannit Auto Preview Preview Paste Audition Filename Cybernetic wav
233. ime variation with the ability to set break points like key frames in the audio It works on a single clip at a time The basic method is as follows Step 1 Create Bend Points within a clip These are used as divisions between different rates of time compression Step 2 Pull the Bend Points to another location this is done in two possible ways with different results as explained below Optionally add a Pitch offset which will also be heard when you play the clip Step 3 Play the audio The changes you have requested will be heard immediately Adding Moving and Removing Bend Points All ClipBender operations can be performed in the Wave Menu To access them Step 1 Enter the Wave Menu by pressing the WAVE key in the Editor Megamode Step 2 Press the ClipBender Soft key To add a Bend Point e Press the Add Bend Soft key or e Click the following menu item Process ClipBender gt Add Bend Point Bend points are shown as an orange vertical line in the clip To remove an existing Bend Point Step 1 Locate to the Bend Point using the Jump Keys Bend points must be selected as a Jump Target To do this e Hold down either of the Jump keys and select Bend Points from the Pad or e Click Edit Settings gt Jump To gt Bend Points Step 2 Press the Remove Bend Soft key Alternatively Step 1 Locate to the Bend Point using the Arrow keys Bend points must be selected as a Jump Target To do this click Edit Settings gt Jump To gt
234. ing Overlap again will bring it back to zero To use the 111 function Step 1 Copy or Cut the desired audio to the clipboard The cursor s sync point will be maintained Step 2 Create a Range encompassing the area to be filled Step 3 Press the 111 soft key When multiple copies of the clipboard are needed to fill the range the Overlap value is used to determine the length of crossfade between copies If Overlap is set to zero the copies will be butt edited together Razor Soft Key Functions When Razor Is ON the soft keys menu change insert fill insert b f fill overlap insert space Fairlight QUANTUM The filled audio is inserted into the track not layered over the original audio in the range The backwards forwards filled audio is inserted into the track not written over the original audio in the range Controls the length of overlap between pieces of audio used in the 111 command Silence will be inserted from the start of a Range for the duration of the Range Page 110 EDITING November 13 2014 Paste Special Instead of pasting the clipboard contents at the cursor position it is possible to paste characteristics of a Clip into other clips Step 1 Copy some clips to the clipboard using the Copy menu the mouse or the keyboard shortcut ctrl c Step 2 Select the destination clips for the paste They can be on multiple tracks and may use a range You may select All Layers or only the to
235. ing functions are manually operated and the mixer will not write or read automation When the Mix on key is ON all mix items for which automation data is written will read that data and the user has no manual control of them Mix items with no written automation data can be manually controlled by the user In addition most automation functions are hidden until Mix On is turned ON To toggle Mix On you may do any of the following Fairlight QUANTUM Page 236 AUTOMATION November 13 2014 e Press the Mix On button in the Mixer Megamode hold Mode and press Mixer e Hold down BLUE and press the Mix On button e Click the Mix On button above the Mixer Screen e Click the Mix On button above the Edit Screen Solo Theme only Note In all methods described below it is assumed that Mix On has been selected Mix Duration The automation data for a project starts at a timecode location one frame after timecode midnight and finishes one frame before midnight However the system requires a minimum preroll of at least one second and it is advisable to start projects at a location of at least one minute after midnight to provide adequate preroll Static Snapshots Project Snapshot Every project contains a snapshot of the state of the mixer when the project was last closed When a project is opened the mixer state is updated and all parameters are recalled Mix Snapshot Every saved mix contains a snapshot of the state of the mixer when
236. int of the clip Step 4 CUT Or COPY the clip to the clipboard Step 5 Place M1 online the transport will relocate to the video at the desired frame Step 6 Press lt Enter gt to paste the clip Fairlight QUANTUM Page 346 SYNC AND MACHINE CONTROL November 13 2014 Timecode Setup Introduction The Setup Menu is used to configure the Project s synchronisation setup Step 1 Press the Setup key or click View gt Smart Pane gt Sync Setup Step 2 The following dialog is displayed i Li hai Sample Rate This value can only be set when creating a new project Frame Rate Can be changed at any time Normally it is best to choose the frame rate of the Master video device in your system or of the timecode being chased if any Changing frame rate is an undoable event so you can undo it in the usual ways Record Bit Depth Can be changed at any time All subsequent recordings will have this depth Video Resolution This is the format of the external video reference applied to the SX 12V or SX 20 It must be set to match the incoming video signal for correct sync Pull Up Down Allows setting of Pull Up and Pull Down often used in NTSC video setups Detailed explanation below Sync Source The system sample rate is synchronised to its clock source There are many choices but normally you will use the SX20 as a sync source and lock it to whichever sync signal your studio is running Synchronization Indicators
237. io edit and will be undone in a single step Mouse Based Editing The mouse can be used to move the transport select and zoom tracks make ranges and edit clips This can be done irrespective of which editing or mixing mode is selected Transport Transport buttons are provided in the Solo theme To select this click General Preferences Display Active Theme Then select Solo from the drop down menu With this theme active you may click on the transport buttons at the top of the screen gt EalnL gt lealeie Clicking REW and FF multiple times will increase the speed of movement each time Clicking the Loop button when a range is present will cause the transport to loop the range if any is present The spacebar on your qwerty keyboard can also be used to toggle between Play and Stop Right click in Timescale locate transport to that time and center that time on the screen Dragging and Scrolling the Transport Very fast locating is possible using right click and drag horizontally anywhere inside the track area of the Edit Screen To scroll the tracks up and down right click and drag vertically anywhere inside the track area of the Edit Screen Fairlight QUANTUM Page 141 EDITING November 13 2014 PEE E ENI AA P E i lil Lal HEENA WAN Right click r and drag Kalimba vertically to scroll the Kalimba tracks oF Right click and drag horizontally to move the transport The tracks can al
238. ip gt Publish Clips to Clipstore While this dialog is open you can choose which of the open ClipStores to target If you have selected multiple clips you can save them as a Grouped Clip and give them a name Fairlight QUANTUM Page 175 AUDIOBASE CLIP SEARCH CLIPSTORES QTUBE November 13 2014 If your ClipStore is to be shared on a network the Publish Media as Well checkbox should be used so that the media is placed in the appropriate folder under the ClipStore file This will allow users from anywhere on the network to audition and paste the audio Multiple users can publish at almost the same time to the same ClipStore Because the clip metadata is very small the ClipStore is only opened for Write for a short time making clashes between users relatively unlikely If a clash occurs the later publish command will be held off until the earlier one is finished which will hang the late publishing system for a short period To access audio from an open Clipstore open the Clip Search dialog in one of the following ways e Press GoTo gt Clip e Click view gt Clip Search In the Clip Search dialog there is a checkbox for each open Clipstores When this is checked the dialog shows all the clips in the selected Clipstores which can be auditioned previewed and pasted in the normal way Group Clips can be auditioned and pasted as well This allows the possibility of collecting complex effects into the Clipstore and reusing them at any t
239. ip with no EQ this preset will automatically be loaded into the display Editing on Multiple Layers Clips in Post V5 0 form layers on each track with the most recently pasted or recorded clips sitting on top of the others During playback and record only the top layer is heard or a crossfade between the top and second layers In the above example the sections that are played are indicated in red and orange this is just indicative not part of the user interface The orange sections form a crossfade between the top and second clip in the stack Fairlight QUANTUM Page 127 Recorded Audio 2 Recorded Audio 4 EDITING November 13 2014 This layered view can be toggled on and off by double pressing the Takes button or by the command View gt Display Layering Many editing functions target only the top layer and some can target all the layers To perform an edit on all layers toggle the All Layers button on To access a particular clip below the top layer we use the Takes Menu Takes menu To display the Takes menu Hold down Mode and press Takes The system displays a Smart Panel showing the individual layers on the current editing track For the configuration shown above the Takes display looks like this when the cursor runs through the middle of all the clips Color Track Layer Start Time End Time Duration Recorded Audio 5 Track 2 4 O0 00 12 02 00 00 15 05 O0 00 03 03 Track z 3 O0 00 12 20 O
240. irlight QUANTUM Page 287 METERS November 13 2014 ________ c oo oo oo a cn Oo q i oo to Choose a meter set here Click here to define the current Define meter set ALIX Click here to display Meter Set ee instead of meter sets Metering History The Master Screen Meters keep a history of the ten loudest peaks for each meter with the timecode where each peak occurred The peaks camn be displayed in order of loudness Overshoots of up to 8 6 dB are shown although the audio is actually clamped to 0 dB at the channel output To display history click in the Peak or RMS level display for a meter Fairlight QUANTUM Page 288 METERS November 13 2014 Click here to delete 100 100 Ste See history and start again Also clears 100 100 100 100 peaks and displayed maximum values Click any one of these fields to display or hide Peak or RMS history Peak History Main R 00 09 02 14 gt 2 4 dB 00 09 02 14 gt 2 1 cB 00 09 02 13 gt 1 7 dB 00 09 02 00 09 02 12 00 08 59 13 gt 3 2 dB 00 08 53 07 gt 3 4 dB 00 08 54 20 gt 3 5 dB 00 09 01 11 gt 3 6 dB 00 08 49 2722 gt 3 6 dB Click on any timecode to locate there Meter Sets A meter set contains eight sources which cqn come from a combination of any signal paths in the system These can be displayed the Master Screen Meters There are 9 meter sets in the system There are two ways to choo
241. is way Peter 00 00 13 01 00 00 15 25 The long and the short John W Enable Beeps W Show Streamer Handle E Fr Prerall 2 SEC Postrall fo SEC Cue Delete All Rehearse Early In PreR oll From CYCLE STOF keep Playing Rec Out To Rec Playback ADR Characters Your project may contain a list of characters and the cues assigned to different ones Creating characters Step 1 Click in the Character box which normally shows lt Show all gt Character lt Show all gt Step 2 Type the name of a new character Step 3 Click the Add button Filter by character To show only one character s lines use the Character drop down menu to select one character Fairlight QUANTUM Page 85 ADR November 13 2014 Character Sort by character To sort the list by character click the Character tab at the top of the ADR list box Dialogue Character 00 00 09 2725 00 00 11 14 Ihope you don t mind Andrew 00 00 10 11 0000 15 11 Sunrise and sunset Peter O0 00 11 15 O0 00 13 06 It s always been this way Peter John 00 00 15 01 00 00 15 25 The long and the short lv Enable Beeps I Show Streamer we Loop Handle j fr Preroll 2 Sec Postroll fo SEC TUE Early In Rehearse CYCLE STOP Keep Playing T at 7 2 TI g D efi E cL cL ci tat m5 at ci a I ReciPlayback In the same way you can sort by From time To time or dialog alphabetically Click
242. iscarding Unused Media lt is possible to create a number of recordings which end up not being used To remove these from your hard disk automatically select a project and use the command Setup Media and Project Management Discard Unused Media Fairlight QUANTUM Page 326 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT November 13 2014 Empty Recycle Bins SubFolders Di FairlightAUProjects Comment NLY Diana frango Pyxis HLY v2 0rce 24000 clip project DRZ Dream II 1 50 3 Big Import DRA Dr 0 T l Frank Mix05 DRZ E rcli Testing New Project Y3 DR 2 Dream IT 1 60 0b29 New Projegizo DRZ Dream II v2 1 0b5 Plugin bujfider RZ MN sex File De Fairlight amp UProjects Plugin builder DR SoftwayeException DRZ Dream IT v2 0 1 New Project9 MT MT Project verf large MT MT MT Project r p jLocalise test fal i List Media Discard Unused Media View Backup Projects Selected Project Discard command This command moves the unused media into a recycle bin of which there is one for each media device Specifically it removes media in the selected project s media directory that is not used by any project in the selected project s current directory t will only remove native recorded or localized media not files that have been imported from other systems The device list has a column reporting how much space a device s recycle bin is taking up To clean up the recycle bins there is a button on the dialog called Empty Recycle Bi
243. ist for the whole project To undo the last edit press Undo This can be done as many times as you like right back to the first edit since the project was opened To redo the last undone edit hold down the BLUE key and press undo This can be done as many times as you like right back to the first edit that was undone To work with a list of the undo steps available do the following Step 1 Hold down the BLUE key and press the Undo button OR hold down the Undo button A dialog box is shown with a list of the undo and redo events in the project Fairlight QUANTUM Page 249 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 AUTOMATION November 13 2014 The red items are those which have been undone already Use the Jog Wheel to move the highlight up and down the list You may press the Undo Or Redo button at any time You may press the Enter button at any time to execute the undo or redo step that is highlighted This will also close the Undo dialog box For the purposes of automation an undo step is recorded each time the system enters or leaves write or trim or when undo data is changed by graphical curve editing System Mix Save function System Mix is a way of making sure that the last Automation pass loaded or recorded will be saved with the project automatically This means you can return to the point where you left off previously even if you forget to save the mix When loading a project with a System Mix simply turning on automation
244. ize sound or play back sampled audio VSTi s have rapidly replaced hardware synthesizers and dedicated samplers due to their flexibility repeatability and low cost Using VST Effects on Fairlight systems Some typical scenarios include e nsert a VST Compressor or EQ plugin directly on a track or live input buses and Auxes Fairlight QUANTUM Page 264 PLUG INS REWIRE AND EXTERNAL PROCESSING November 13 2014 e Patch an Aux Output to a Live Input then insert an VST Reverb or Flanger on the Live input Now all channels feeding the Aux will be routed through the VST Effect Please note that Fairlight supports VST effects from Mono to 5 1 and beyond These can be inserted on mono channels or on Link Groups If a stereo VST Effect is inserted on a LCR LCRS or 5 1 Link Group the left and right channels will be allocated to left and right Link Group channels automatically Using VST Effects in QUANTUM Setup and installation Step 1 Install your plug ins as outlined by your plug in manufacturer The plug in will generate a file with extension DLL in the folder that your plug in has been installed most commonly located in C Program Files VSTPlug ins Step 2 Copy the DLL file and paste into C Program Files Fairlight Dream II Effects VSTs Step 3 Restart the QUANTUM PC Block Size You can control the size of blocks sent to your plug ins over the AudioBridge The AudioBridge connects the real time CC 1 audio environme
245. ject If you are unsure of what file a clip is stored in you can find out by selecting view gt Clip Search from the Post V5 0 menus You will see the filename associated with each clip in the list and you can click the Reveal File button to display a file in Windows Explorer Note that you can rearrange columns in the clip search window by dragging and dropping column headers You may need to scroll to the right to view all available clip search columns Always take great care not to delete files associated with your MT Project You may not be able to recover files once they have been deleted DR2 Projects DR2 projects are a new project format designed specifically for Post V5 0 DR2 files are not backwardly compatible with older Fairlight products although they can be converted to MT projects with FUF files as described above The DR2 file format provides enhanced capabilities compared with the legacy MT file format and all future development will focus on the DR2 file format Recording in DR2 When using the DR2 format new audio recordings are stored as industry standard Broadcast WAV Files QUANTUM Broadcast WAV Files are stored in the Media subfolder of the DR2 Project folder The WAV files are created when recording starts and they are refreshed at regular time intervals during recording When this happens all but the last part of the recording is safely on disk This means that audio recordings in DR2 format are quite
246. king the xfade button or pressing Enter completes the operation Fairlight QUANTUM Page 119 EDITING November 13 2014 Navigation with Picture Keys Simple Example a butt edit odo JU Ue Ul WILD tes tte 0 mM WD O DD 60 70 S0 20 100 1 3 When the Xfade dialog is opened it shows the last used parameters The Duration is depicted with a yellow overlay to show the region of overlap As you increase the Duration the yellow area widens After you press the crossfade is built around the cursor position Second clip Fairlight QUANTUM Page 120 EDITING November 13 2014 Note the crossfade is not symmetrical about the cursor because X point was greater than 50 Xfade Looping You can automatically loop across your crossfade while building it This helps you to get the best settings To start looping e Click the xFade amp Loop button A Few Rules Xfade can work on multiple tracks It will try to create crossfades of equal length on all selected tracks Xfade can work on clips that are not touching as long as there is sufficient media to extend across the Good name mdi 0419 gap l Good name IMa_0419 Xfade preserves clip coverage In the above example the selected red clip remains underneath the unselected clip IMGeh4 19 Good name Good name IMG 0419 Fairlight QUANTUM Page 121 EDITING November 13 2014 The yellow highlighter will not expand beyond th
247. l has two functions one normal function and one ALT function which is executed by holding down the ALT button and operating the rotary control The controls are assigned to the encoders in an order determined by the manufacturer s numbering of the controls If more than 12 controls are present they will be arranged on multiple pages that you can select in the Pad Automation of Plug ins Enabling Plug in parameters for automation is described on page 241 Copying Plug ins Plug ins may be copied from one channel to another with all their settings followed faithfully To do this Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Select the channel containing the plug in to be copied Open the Config Plug ins menu by pressing the purple Plug ins button in the Mixer Megamode twice then pressing the Config soft key lf there is more than one plug in in the selected channel use the Next soft key to select the right one to be copied Press the Copy soft key select the destination channel for the plug in Press the Paste soft key Clip based Plug ins Plug ins may be separately applied to individual clips The sound is written into new media on the hard disk and a new clip is placed on top of the original To do this Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Hold down Mode and press the Wave button Press the Plug ins soft key This will allow you to load a plug in for the current clip Use the Jog Wheel to searc
248. ld cutlass from T254 Auto 91 old cutlass from T255 Auto 91 old cutlass From T256 aera Suto 91 old cutlass from T257 Auto 91 old cutlass From T258 Auto 91 old cutlass From T259 Auto 91 old cutlass from T2 60 Auto 91 old cutlass from T2 61 Auto crash car approac fr T183 Auto crash car approac fr T283 Auto crash car off ram fro T1 86 Auto crash car off ram fro T286 Auto crash car skid an fro T1169 Auto crash car skid an fro 71170 Auto crash car skid an fro T2169 Auto crash car skid an fro T2170 Auto crash car smashes fr T1171 Auto crash car smashes Fr T2171 Auto crash crash into fro T179 Auto crash crash into fro T181 Auto crash crash into fro 1182 Auto crash crash into fro T279 Auto crash crash into fro T281 Auto crash crash into fro T282 Auto crash head on col fro T1 84 Auto crash head on col fro T185 Auto crash head on col fro T2 84 Anka crash head nn rnal fro T2 AS Pa 4 gt Opin Master 00 03 01 16 Top Layers E 245 49 01 Sess 00 05 16 15 Step 1 After searching the database a list of matching clips is displayed Ensure the transport Is in STOP then use the Jog Wheel or the and buttons to highlight the clip you want Holding down the Shift button allows you to scroll faster Step 2 Press the Preview soft key or click the Preview button While Preview is lit the highlighted WAV file in the
249. lect the 3D Panner checkbox Fairlight QUANTUM Page 218 MIXING November 13 2014 Step 3 Close the System Variables dialog The Video button toggles the Pan Theatre Having enabled it here open the Pyxis Window to use the Pan Theatre The Pan Theatre The Pan Theatre offers a combination of the 3D panner with the Pyxis window as shown below This allows you to adjust surround panning directly in front of the pictures You can use the mouse to move the yellow or red balls or use the regular panning controls and joystick Fairlight QUANTUM Page 219 MIXING November 13 2014 The Aux Panel Track 21 Processing Order the Path Order Menu Overview The Path Order Menu allows you to change the order of the Equaliser Dynamics and Insert Point in any Track or Live Feed To use this Step 1 Hold down the Mode button Step 2 Press the Path Order button It is also available in the Mixer Megamode Step 3 Select the source path Step 4 Press one of the soft keys to set the processing order The FMC2 screen changes to show the order Fairlight QUANTUM Page 220 MIXING November 13 2014 Path Order I gt E gt D Path Order D gt E gt l Path Order D gt I gt E Path Copy Overview Path Copy allows you to copy all or part of the settings from one path to another lt works by first copying the all the settings from a source path into a clipboard then pasting the desired parts into a destination path
250. light QUANTUM Page 75 RECORDING November 13 2014 The maximum value is 30 frames if you type a number larger than 30 the system will truncate it back to the most recent digit You can also change the Handle size by selecting Setup gt Record Settings and changing the number in the Handle group Note if the transport has not been rolling for as long as the handle before you issue the record command the system will create a shorter handle Auto Name Clips Overview Every clip is given an automatic name when you record it This name consists of a seedname and a number The seedname is applied first then a number is appended incrementing by one for each new clip Each Track has its own seedname You can change the seedname for each track and also set the starting number at any time Press the name menu button in the Edit Basic Megamode or in the Mode display to display naming soft keys Select the track s whose seednames you want to change Press the seedname soft key to display the seed name dialog Use the QWERTY keyboard to type the name then Tab or click the Starting Seed Number and use the keyboard to set it Using the Mouse The Seed Name dialog can be accessed at any time by selecting Tracks Set Record Seed Name The Seedname Dialog Enter the seed name you would like use for the selected tracks Recorded Audio Starting Seed Number 1 _ Add Track name to head of dip name Use the QWERTY keyboard to
251. limited Sub Buses and Aux Buses can be assigned to the Main Bus but not to each other Main and MT Buses cannot be assigned to any other bus Step 1 Hold down Mode and press the Bus Assign button The Bus Assign Screen The Bus Assign screen is operated with the mouse Fairlight QUANTUM Page 194 MIXING November 13 2014 m m l TRACK6 All Tracks i ASLONGA g a m fi dfgh R FX Stereo FX Stereo fl fl fv ful ful ful ful fl ful fl fu 13 The 14th Track 15 Track 16 Track 17 Track 18 Track 19 Track 20 Track 21 Track 22 Track 23 Track 24 fl ck medah E track is E makis Tra c l All Lives Pee Pr i T 3 S M M M NM iM MI i Mi Mi M MI M Track 25 Track 26 Track 27 Track 28 Track 29 Track 30 Track 31 Track 32 Track 33 Track 34 Track 35 Track 36 E Track 46 Track 47 Track 48 Deassign All Oo oO oO oO oO na mn aa nw AH EN in aun un an Track 37 Track 38 Track 39 Track 40 Track 41 Tra k 42 Track 43 Track 44 Tra A ono Ae aN ono Am on O nm A un rs om A on ho nw eH un ono ATO D ono AT on ono ATO E on nm un J mog ATO om AT on mn E mi Tra g Tra Tra Tra Tra 3 Tra Tra Tra Tra Tra 8 Tra Tra mm mm mm mn mm mm mm oo on ho oo ATO T QJ oo AT a D mm om J L Track 61 Tra Tra Tra Track 65 Track 66 Track 67 Track 68 Track 69 Tra E 70 Tract l Tra E om J E J ts
252. lips always one file per clip regardless of selected Channels Check Selected Tracks Only to only export selected tracks Check Align to Video Frame Boundaries to align exported file s with the video frame edges Check Export Empty Tracks to export blank files for empty tracks if Multiple Mono files have been selected Then select the location you want the exported audio to go and hit OK Channels Allows you to select the format of the files being created by export Channels Single Multichannel File all selected tracks Mono Files 1 per track Stereo Files 1 per track pair rie Mono Stereo Files automatically choose SHAE Mix Tracks to a single Mono File o o4 2o 2qMix Tracks to a single Stereo File Sor Oooh Tracks bo Mono or Stereo automatica eeetiee 2ingle Multichannel File all selected tracks 1 Tracks Mono files 1 per track Creates a single mono media file for each track in the export i e all tracks or selected tracks depending whether the Selected Tracks Only checkbox is selected Stereo files 1 per track pair For each pair of tracks in the export a single stereo media file is created Mono Stereo files automatically choose If a track is mono and contains no multi channel clips its contents will be exported as a stereo media file If a pair of tracks are linked as a Link Group their contents will be exported as a stereo media file If a track contains a two chan
253. lips are under the cursor or make a range using the From and To keys The clips should be red Step 3 Use the menu item clip gt Set Clip Colour Fairlight QUANTUM Page 39 CHANNELS November 13 2014 Clip Level p Click to choose a colour for all selected red clips Normalize Clip Level LR Stereo Swap Phase Invert Clips Rename Resync to record time Reverse Clips Click to display a mixer Set Sync Point for special colours BYE Flip ideo Clip Field Cut Clips To Bin Rue Rn caai Click to return the selected clips to their copy Cips To pin Follow Track track clip colour Publish Clips To Clipstore Multichannel Clips Multichannel clips are linked for editing operations They are displayed with no separating line anda little smaller in height The picture below shows two stereo multichannel clips ea sit o Sheet Sakon You can create multichannel clips in two ways e By importing a multi channel Wave or other file e By Recording into a Link Group of tracks Once a clip has been defined as multichannel operations on one channel of the clip eg EQ affect all other channels Multichannel clips can be broken apart using the command Edit gt Cleave Multi Channel Clips Clips that have previously been cleaved can be restored using Edit Restore Multi Channel Fairlight QUANTUM Page 40 CHANNELS November 13 2014 Selecting Channels Selecting channels makes them the target f
254. lowing e Click its name on the Mixer Screen If not visible scroll the mixer screen Note a Group Master is only visible if its group has members Fairlight QUANTUM Page 188 MIXING November 13 2014 Mixing Introduction This chapter describes everything you need to know about mixing in the QUANTUM system The information is organised in sections as follows e Busing types formats assignment e Signal Processing using Tactile controls e Screen Mix Controls e Inserts and Direct outputs e Faders e Preset Library Busing Definitions Bus a mix destination where many channels are summed in desirable proportions Bus Format the number and order of outputs that a Bus addresses Typically the format matches that of a soeaker set in the final listening environment Common format examples include Mono Stereo and 5 1 Newer 3D formats can also be addressed QUANTUM provides all the commonly used formats ready to go You can also create custom formats for special speaker sets and the NAME panning system will follow your instructions for distributing energy between the speakers QUANTUM can also be licensed to allow 3D formats In this case you would set speaker positions including a Down Up parameter for the third dimension and the system will display and enable a set of Down Up pan controls Bus Element one output from a Bus e g Left or Center Buses may have any number of elements up to 24 Note th
255. ly replace those in the new fader set Press the fader set key without holding a fader to resume the normal fader set Mapping Fader Sets Step 1 Press Blue Map in the fader buttons or the Map Faders button in the QUANTUM Setup Megamode the Fader Sets button must be enabled before Map Faders will appear Fairlight QUANTUM Page 228 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 MIXING November 13 2014 Alternatively select the Mixer Megamode press the Fader set button choose a Fader Set and press the Map F Set button Or hold down Mode and select the Map Faders button This immediately starts mapping the current fader set Select a fader set to map or continue with the currently selected one The CALL key on the first fader will flash to indicate that it is ready to be defined The Channel Select window will appear on the screen Use the mouse to select any feed for your first fader The next fader is automatically selected and the path assigned to it flashes Continue to assign faders in order or select a fader out of sequence by pressing its CALL key and making a selec tion on the selection panel Use the buttons at the bottom of the window to select more tracks lives and buses You can stop changing the current map at any time by pressing the Map Faders button again or by selecting any other system mode Fairlight QUANTUM Page 229 Step 5 MIXING November 13 2014 You can fill the remaining faders in the set by holding down c
256. ly the uppermost is heard or at most a crossfade between the top and second layers The software allows you to see all the layers as follows e Select Display Layering from the View menu Display Layering Locators Tracks po Video Track Clip Search Statistics Performance Background Tasks e Click the Display Layering button in the Toolbar Sain OE EO LO Be xX i lt i ioe Display layering e Double press the takes button in the Editor Megamode The layers of clips are shown on all tracks with the clips becoming thinner as needed to fit the available space Fairlight QUANTUM Page 150 EDITING November 13 2014 MRIG HI AET OOS 0000 ia IMG 0419 IMG O41 IMG 0419 The mouse can be used to change the order of clips To do this simply click and drag a clip from one level to a higher or lower level Changing levels in this way can be combined with dragging a clip to a different track or timecode Note that there is always a space at the top of each track equal to the width of one clip This is to allow room for you to drag a clip into the top position To prevent a clip from changing its sync while dragging it to another layout hold down the key while dragging it Group Clips QUANTUM can create grouped clips that behave like individual clips To do this Step 1 Create a range containing the clips you want to group Step 2 Use the command gt A grouped clip appears in green when not selecte
257. m page Arm Single click toggles Arm Mute Single click toggles Mute Fader Level Fader Set level with mouse Double click to set 0 dB Colour indicates automation status Channel Meter Link Group metering is shown MIXING November 13 2014 Pan Clicking on the Pan display toggles Pan Defeat in and out When Pan Defeat is on the red and yellow indicators disappear The column at the left represents Boom level It is brighter when on and darker when off Double clicking on the Pan graph brings the Pan Zoom display to the screen Clicking on the EQ display toggles EQ in and out When EQ is out the graph line goes dull grey Double clicking on the EQ graph brings the EQ Zoom display to the screen Dyn The blue lines on the Dynamics display indicate Limiter at the top Compressor in the middle and Gate Expander It is possible to have all of them on Double clicking on the Dyn graph brings the Dyn Zoom display to the screen Aux The Aux graph shows only sends for Aux buses with non zero format The bars represent the amount of level being sent to the active aux buses Where the send is muted the bar is dark as shown at left Double clicking on the Aux graph brings the Aux Zoom display to the screen Fairlight QUANTUM Page 204 MIXING November 13 2014 The FMC me sisi Screen Diret Tiles A Tile shows basic information about the Feed it represents Bus tile
258. m will only note edit MIDI clips containing a single MIDI channel If you have recorded or imported notes from multiple MIDI channels into one clip you can separate them using the command MIDI Separate MIDI Notes by Channel The system creates one clip for each channel and places them on the tracks below the selected one For this to work there must be sufficient MIDI tracks to take all the clips MIDI clips can be edited in detail using MIDI Edit MIDI Notes Another way to do this is view Smart Pane MIDI Events then click the Edit Events button Either way one MIDI clip at a time can be edited the one on the current track blue name and blue tab at left under the cursor the clip must be red MIDI Note Editing opens a piano roll editor where each MIDI event note ON note OFF is shown as a clip like object Only mouse editing is available in this window Note NO AUDIO OR VIDEO PLAYBACK OCCURS WHILE THE MIDI NOTE EDITOR IS OPEN Fairlight QUANTUM Page 311 MIDI TRACKS November 13 2014 The Edit Events button toggles the Edit Screen between the MIDI Note Editor and the normal Track Display MIDI Events Play head Current length of MIDI clip being edited The Play Head is set to Unlocked when you enter the MIDI Note Editor This is to allow easy editing of MIDI events while in Play The lighter background shows the current length of the MIDI clip Notes can be outside this area if you have trimmed the original MIDI cli
259. mber 13 2014 Export Cue Sheet You can export the clip data from your project as a comma separated CSV file To do this Step 1 Issue the command File gt Export Cue Sheet Step 2 Use the Save dialog to select a destination for the file Step 3 Press Enter EDL Management Introduction EDL Management supports three activities associated with EDLs Edit Decision Lists produced by other editing products Capture records the material needed by the edit list from original sources such as video tape Conform edits the source audio recorded in the capture process placing it at the destination locations indicated by the edit list Reconform re edits an existing POST V5 0 project according to a cut list usually representing a re edit of the pictures in a video project Loading an EDL The first step is to load an EDL file step 1 At the top of the Edit Screen click File gt Import gt EDL Step 2 Navigate to the file location of an EDL file and click the Open button This will cause the display of the EDL dialog Fairlight QUANTUM Page 335 EDL Tool PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT Process EDL EE ee EDL BSEP 42 1 to 4 ed dle Capture and Conform ao November 13 2014 1 8 Cap Event Type Tracks Trans Reel fps Source Start iB Source Stop Rec Start Rec Stop a es E E a ee Gi ee GIA All Audio Trac E 1 C Al ANIMAL 00 06 47 00 00 07 17 00 00 02 00 00 00 02 30 00 0 2 C
260. mbers to that value For switches which cycle through a number of values pressing the switch will set all members to the next value of the Group Master Fairlight QUANTUM Page 180 GROUPING November 13 2014 Absolute If linking is absolute any move made by the Master fader knobs and switches results in immediate adoption of the same values in the slave members For example if the Master fader moves from 10 dB to 5 dB and a slave is set to 20 dB it will rise to 5 dB the relative difference is destroyed The adoption of identical values occurs when faders or knobs are moved It is also possible to set identical parameter values on creation of the Link Group See Creating a Link Group below Link Group Features Linking feeds in link groups has the following effects e Selecting one member selects the entire link group e There is only one fader for the group When the group is created the group master fader adopts the level of the first fader in the group When the fader is adjusted the members fader behaviour depends on the setting of Relative Link Groups as described above e When a group is created the master pan control is centred The Spread and Rotate controls become active when the link group is called These pan parameters offer unique and flexible panning controls to multichannel link groups See The Spread Control below e Holding down BLUE while touching controls for faders and aux sends sets them to 0 G
261. ment The mix items that are in preview are not controlled by the automation system so they respond manually to their controls But when the console enters automation record they all go into Write or Trim Typically preview is used to audition new mix settings for one section of the project while other sections already have automation data It prevents the automation system from moving the controls that the user is trying to balance for the new section As soon as the user is happy with the new balance it can be written to the new section Preview state is engaged on enabled mix items by first pressing the Preview key and then enabling mix items using Touch Latch for individual parameters or the auto key next to a fader to enable the mix items for all parameters on the selected feed When enabled in Preview mix items are illuminated in flashing red Once in preview mode the mix items can be placed into Write or Trim by dropping in manually with the In key or automatically using the Active In and Out points see Programmed Automation below Once enabled for Preview mix items remain in that state regardless of transport starts and stops This is different from putting mix items into automation record which must be done again after each transport stop Preview is described in more detail below Safe When mix items are in Safe mode they cannot enter automation record They are always in READ or ISOLATE To put Signal paths into Sa
262. mode Pyxis Track allows an incoming video signal to be captured directly onto the timeline This requires correct configuration of both the Decklink card and Post V5 0 Configuration of the Decklink card Configure the required settings for your Decklink card by navigating to START Setting gt Control Panel Decklink Blackmagic DeckLink 6 7 1 f x Preference settings for your DeckLink HD Extreme 2 settings Processing video Levels Audio Levels Set output sor amp HDMI amp Y R Y B Y Set input S n ote E a A ETa For video and audio capture Use video setup in WTS tf 4t 7 5 IRE for use in the USA At 0 0 IRE for use in Japan W Remove Field jitter when video is paused Select 4 4 4 on video output Use 3 Gb s SDI for Single Link 4 4 4 Set black ref on video output in capture When not playing video send Black To all the video outputs Requires restarting your computer Set reference output timing H 0 Reference input nok detected covet ay _ lt is critical that you select the appropriate Inputs for your system In the example we are intending to capture video from a Digital Betacam VTR via the Decklink Component inputs If you will be consistently using the same physical inputs for all video capture duties you should be able to set and forget this value Configure QUANTUM Video Capture options With the soft
263. mport menu by holding Mode and pressing Import Choose a file from the Open dialog and click OK This opens a file in import mode The file is known as the current Library File This file is opened as read only so you cannot edit anything Move around the Import File and locate the clip s you want to import You can use a range or not and select one or more tracks The targeted clips will be red Press the Copy soft key This will copy the targeted clips to the clipboard and will re open your original file Locate to the position where you want to paste the copied clips and press ENTER The clips are pasted The system immediately goes back to the Import File allowing you to find and copy more clips It will continue to alternate between the Import File and your current project until you select another mode The clips will be sample rate converted on import if necessary to match your current project You can go back to a Library file at any time by clicking View Edit Workspace Filename The Import Menu can also be used to import mix automation This is described in the section called Import Automation from Another Project on page 255 Force Solo During Import You can force the audio to be audible only on selected tracks of your Library project as follows Step 1 Hold Mode and select Basic Edit Step 2 Hold down the solo button step 3 Press the Follow Lib soft key until the label goes to ON Step 4 Release t
264. mported into QUANTUM it is displayed as a clip The clip is a reference to the audio data stored on disk Clips can be cut copied or moved without affecting the original audio data When new clips are recorded or pasted above existing clips the clips become layered one above the other Normally only the top clip is seen and heard during play back POST V5 now allows all layers to be seen simultaneously Display Layering To do this e Hold Mode then double press the Takes button e Click the Layering button in the Toolbar Layering button e Select view gt Display Layering from the Menu Bar While Display Layering is on you can drag clips from one layer to another using the mouse The left end of the clip is known as the head The right end is the tail Clips also contain information about the original timecode location of the audio data when recorded and the current timecode location of the displayed clip If a clip shows only a portion of the associated audio data on disk it may be trimmed to show more Fairlight QUANTUM Page 37 CHANNELS November 13 2014 This picture combines a non layered view top and the same clips with layers shown below Each view has its advantages Add Clip You can create a new clip by e Recording into the system see the chapter Recording page 70 e Importing clips from other projects see page 134 e Directly adding a clip To directly add a clip use the Track menu as follows
265. n stops writing and Auto buttons are extinguished The mix items that will be recorded are those for the enabled parameters on the Current Path only the one shown in the Pad Notes e You can press Auto before or after pressing Play e You can also take a signal path out of record by pressing Auto again while play continues or take everything out of record by pressing the all read button e See Leaving Automation Record below for other ways to exit record Using Fader Auto Buttons Step 1 Enable parameter s see Enable Parameters below Step 2 Press Auto on one or more Faders this puts them into WRITE or TRIM see below Step 3 Press Play to move the transport automation data starts writing Step 4 Press Stop automation stops writing and Auto buttons are extinguished The mix items that will be recorded are those for the enabled parameters signal paths Notes e You can press Auto before or after pressing Play e You can also take a signal path out of record by pressing Auto again while play continues or take everything out of record by pressing the all read button e See Leaving Automation Record below for other ways to exit record Using Screen Auto Buttons Step 1 Enable parameter s see Enable Parameters below Step 2 Click Auto on one or more Faders this puts them into WRITE or TRIM see below There are Auto buttons in the Edit Screen and the Mixer Screen See pictures below Aut
266. n the timeline Step 3A Press the paste soft key to paste the auditioning clip at its current position on the current track This allows you to find a relevant sync point and paste the clip accordingly Notes e The AudioBase3 results pane can be displayed underneath the Pyxis Track allowing easy placement of sounds to picture e During Audition you can use the Jog wheel when the transport is not in jog or the and keys in the numpad to move the highlight up and down the list To start auditioning the new clip toggle Audition off then on again e To hide the AudioBase3 results list simply enter another mode e g Cut Dream IT v0 04 Search For fear Clip Name T283 Categor Type lal o User 1 l User Sample Rate lal o User 3 User search Results 617 Preview Description Auto crash car approac from trac File Nan as aaa a ena A pe i A 6 AO ee sa e Entering text in the Search For field causes the software to look in all the relevant fields Entering text in the more specific fields at the right like Clip Name and Description confines the search to the fields you have specified The Search For field takes precedence if you have entered text in both places e The AudioBase3 results pane can be displayed underneath the Pyxis Track allowing easy placement of sounds to picture e Wildcards can be used to aid searches These include the following o stands for one or more c
267. name for the new custom preset then press the Enter key To change the shape stored in a custom preset Step 1 Recall the custom preset as described above Step 2 Adjust the shape at the head or tail of the clip or capture new ones from a clip Step 3 Click in the Preset name field Step 4 Now immediately press the Enter key to save the current values over the selected preset This will overwrite the preset and the software will give no warning Using the Mouse and Screen While the Fade mode is active the screen displays shapes and controls for creating and editing fades x Presets AER Le Ls ILs aaa Fade Head Step 1 Select a track and move a clip under the cursor Step 2 Press the fade button if not already on Step 3 Click the Head button in the screen display it s near the upper right Step 4 Adjust the shape of the Head fade described below Step 5 Click the Apply button The fade described in the shape is applied to the head of the clip Note that the fade duration is set by the cursor position as when using the picture keys Length and Shape The Length and Shape tickboxes allow you to choose what to apply You can untick the Length tickbox if you only want to apply the shape and vice versa Fade Shape Using the mouse and screen method allows you to set the fade shape before applying it The shape includes the following parameters Percentage X Point this controls the percentage of the fad
268. nd alternative mode where the pot goes back to controlling the last used alternative parameter default FB Pan The alternative parameters are chosen using the Pan button in the Mixer Megamode next to the Proj Megamode button See PanPot Function below for details Pressing and releasing the 2 button while BLUE is pressed toggles between normal mode fader controls channel level 2 button is solid blue while BLUE is held and alternative mode where the fader goes back to controlling the last used alternative parameter The alternative parameter is chosen by holding down the Faders To button in the Mixer Megamode See Fader Function below for details lf BLUE is pressed the 3 button enters fader mapping for the current fader set The ILP screens above all ILP panels display the Fader Mapping page which the user can touch to map channels to faders During mapping the corresponding fader set button flashes blue Pressing it exits fader mapping at the point reached by the user If BLUE is pressed the 4 button toggles Bus Mode on and off When Bus mode is on the system puts non zero format buses on all faders or as many as are needed to accommodate all the non zero format buses Pressing a button from 1 to 6 returns control to the appropriate fader set lf BLUE is pressed the 5 button toggles Mixer Set on and off While Mixer set is on
269. nd Conform are performed at the same time The audio for each line in the EDL is captured and immediately conformed Before starting we must set some parameters Step 1 Set up Track Mapping Track Mapping EDL Tracks Record Trks Dest Ti 1 8 5 AS 9 17 5 A 34 9 16 5 All Audio Tracks 5 bd Rec Tracks e Track mapping chooses the tracks where you will record in your currently open project POST V5 0 lists each type of edit that it finds in the EDL e g A12 A 3 etc and allows you to choose which audio tracks to record for each type Often it will be the same set of tracks for all edit Fairlight QUANTUM Page 336 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT November 13 2014 types Click in the Record Trks column for each type of edit and choose from the drop down list The Rec Tracks drop down list provides a convenient way to quickly fill in the track mapping for a specific number of tracks per EDL track Presets allow you to save a track mapping for reuse Type a name into the field and click Save To load a preset simply select it from the drop down list Select Edits to Capture i FE E mr The system will capture only the highlighted events in the EDL display Use the mouse to highlight the required events You can select a range of events by selecting the first then holding down SHIFT and selecting the last in the range You can add or subtract an event from the selection
270. nd from the Edit Menu Track and Clip Area This area shows a selection of the available tracks and the audio clips on them A complete description of all its functions is contained in the chapter on Editing page 91 Timecode Display This line shows the timecode at the left and right of the screen and also at the centre line or Play Cursor position To the right of the timecode display are two lights which change colour as follows Sync shows green if the system has a viable sync signal otherwise red Position shows green if the system sees a viable position signal such as timecode or 9 pin otherwise red Status View This area shows information such as the Project name and status and alert messages from the system Starting the System Step 1 Start the host computer PC by turning on its power switch The PC will boot the Windows operating system and display your PC desktop Video monitor s should be powered up and displaying the Windows desktop Step 2 Power on the audio interface box es if used SX 20 and one or more SX 48s In most installations they can be left powered on all the time and will wake up when the PC starts up and the CC 1 or CC 2 board initialises Step 3 Power on the QUANTUM tactile surface Step 4 Start the QUANTUM application by e double clicking its desktop icon or e by selecting it in the Start Menu under the Fairlight group system Shutdown Step 1 Exit QUANTUM by selecting
271. nel clip its contents will be exported as a stereo media file Mix Track to a single Mono File All tracks in the export are mixed together to form a mono mix and this is recorded into a mono media file Mix Track to a single Stereo File Fairlight QUANTUM Page 333 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT November 13 2014 All tracks in the export are mixed together to form a stereo mix and this is recorded into a stereo media file Single MultiChannel File all selected tracks A single file is created with multiple linked media one for each track in the export Note The description field inside a BWave file is preserved when a clip is exported as BWF The default value for the BWF originator field can now be specified See Setup General Preferences gt Options Exporting Video You can export the video straight from a project and automatically combine it with your choice of audio from a project To do this choose click on the File Menu and choose Export then Video This box pops up je S lie pear aaike yd Step 1 Choose the video format into which you wish to export Step 2 Choose whether you want to export the whole project or a selected range Note to export as a Quicktime file you must have the latest version of Quicktime installed Note some file types require licences for export Please consult your Fairlight distributor for details Fairlight QUANTUM Page 334 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT Nove
272. nes controlled from the Smart Panel The checkboxes shown below are used to turn these on and off Fairlight QUANTUM Page 345 SYNC AND MACHINE CONTROL November 13 2014 a il LTCMTC 00 00 00 00 The timecode generators have their own offset field shown above When the In Stop checkbox is ticked a repeated timecode frame is generated when the transport is stationary Otherwise timecode is generated only in Play MIDI Timecode is always output from the MIDI port at the rear of the SX 20 sync box Putting Machines Online Machines stay in stop and are ignored by the QUANTUM system while offline To put a machine online do one of the following e Press the Mi or M2 button on the QUANTUM Center section e Select one of the Online checkboxes on the Machine Control Smart Pane mame DOMINE ID 00 00 00 00 capt 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Editing with Machine Control All the transport controls and locating methods operate with a 9 pin remote machine online The following procedure is used to place new recordings or previously used clips to picture Press the M1 key to toggle the 9 pin machine on or off QUANTUM s transport will locate to the timecode from the 9 pin machine The system defaults to M1 controlling 9 pin Port A Placing Sound to Picture Step 1 With M1 online locate the video at the desired frame Step 2 Take M1 offline Step 3 Locate the transport so the cursor lies on the sync po
273. nked they are panned L R If 3 Feeds are linked they are panned L C R If 4 Feeds are linked they are panned LC RS If 5 Feeds are linked they are panned LC RLS RS If 6 Feeds are linked they are panned LC RLS RS B If 7 Feeds are linked they are panned L C RLS CS RS B If 8 Feeds are linked they are panned LLC CRC RLS RS B Fairlight QUANTUM Page 179 GROUPING November 13 2014 lt can happen however that more than one Bus Format has the same number of elements A common example is Dolby 5 1 and SMPTE 5 1 which are both useful in different contexts In this case a soft key in the Pad will allow you to make the choice See Creating a Link Group below for details Normally each member is panned hard to one Bus Element position spread is set to maximum divergence is set to minimum and rotation is set to zero This fixed pan configuration is optionally chosen when the Link Group is created and cannot be changed afterwards If fixed panning is chosen and the link group format contains a Boom channel the assignment of the corresponding member is achieved by Stem Assignment to the Boom element only of the destination Bus See Stem Assign on page Error Bookmark not defined If you are using a link group to control a premixed stem which is delivered in a different channel order it may be necessary to edit the track order on the disk recorder or to change the input patching of the feeds if the stem is played in off an exte
274. nless you wish to remove audio from your project When copying MT projects to a compliant QDC engine you must always be sure to copy all associated FUF files Otherwise the QDC will not be able to find all of the audio data used in the MT project iol xi File Edit wiew Favorites Tools Help O Back ce Ela Search re Folders Address C D FairlightALProjects Test 1 EJ ae Date Modified 36 664 KB MT File 11 03 2008 1 39 PM 4 990 KB FUF File 11 03 2008 1 39 PM A S45 Floppy a4 a Local Disk Cs S Audio D4 9 etax2003 O etax2004 O etax2005 O etax2006 I Fairlight El Fairlight AU O Media 9 ML3_4AvT40a50 9 MLS_AYTNewPlugin E Projects The picture above shows the typical file layout with an MT file The FUF file contains the audio while the MT file contains the Edit list mix information and automation files Note The FUF file will generally get much larger up to 4 GB while the MT file already contains a full complement of mix data even if mostly zero values and will only get bigger when automation files are saved Fairlight QUANTUM Page 317 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT November 13 2014 When the first FUF file reaches 4 GB another one is automatically created Stuffing FUFs QUANTUM allows external files to be dragged and dropped onto the timeline Since these files are not recorded into the QUANTUM MT Project they are not automatically added to the FUF files associated with the MT Projec
275. ns This can be used when you are sure you do not need any media from them anymore The new recycle bins are located on each media device under the FairlightAU folder Free Space MB Recycle Bin Space Fairlight For Networked Dream IT Audia Ri 101791 MB 0 ME Ves 2500 Local Location E Dream II Video Ruy 165770 MB Ves 500 Local Cr Windows Forma Both Ruy 2668S MB Mo 2500 Local T Windows Forma Both Ruy 334316 MB Mo 2500 Shared Find SubFalders Set Device Info view CD Drives Default Project Device Audio _O v Rescan Devices Empty Recycle Bins Note the same thing can be achieved using Process Discard Unused Media with one difference this will remove unused media from UNDO files as well so UNDO is not possible afterwards This is great for recording sessions with a lot of useless takes because only the ones used in the project survive Recovering Lost Media Orphaned Media When you UNDO a recording or erase all its resulting clips the media is still stored on the hard disk you just don t have a clip in the project referencing it You can of course find it in the Windows system and drag it back into the project but there is an easier way Note this can only be used during the session where the recording was made Once you close that project the references are gone To see a list of the media that was recorded in the current session and is now unreferenced use the mo
276. nt as you jogged Fairlight QUANTUM Page 163 TIME DOMAIN PROCESSING November 13 2014 Chopper Triquois 2 Ext Approach Land Switch Off Ster Stretch 1 00 100 00 Original clip with Bend Points Chopper Iriguois 2 Ext Approach Land Switch Off Ster Stretch 1 00 After Offset audio before and after second Bend Point is retimed Clip length is the same as the original Chopper Iriguois 2 Ext Approach Land Switch Off Ster i Stretch 1 00 145 52 100 00 100 00 After Warp audio before second Bend Point is retimed Tail of clip is not retimed but has been Slipped later Add Pitch Change While the ClipBender sub menu is shown on the Pad the upper part of the Edit Screen displays a ClipBender Smart Pane Fairlight QUANTUM Page 164 TIME DOMAIN PROCESSING November 13 2014 You may display the ClipBender Smart Pane by clicking View gt Smart Pane gt Clip Bender fae General Purpose Auto Detect E Auto Remove All Settings Use the fields in this dialog to set a Pitch offset for the selected clip s This offset will be applied in real time along with the rest of the ClipBender parameters As different clips are selected this Smart Pane updates to show the current Pitch offset of the newly selected clip Auto Detect Auto Detect is a way of search automatically for transients in the selected clip To use it Press the Auto Detect Soft key Alternatively Click Process ClipBender gt Detect Audi
277. nt signal path out of record Fairlight QUANTUM Page 239 AUTOMATION November 13 2014 Using Touch Auto Enable In this mode you enable parameters but not signal paths Touching the control of any enabled parameter will do it automatically Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Select Touch Snap Or Latch as detailed above Enable parameter s see Enable Parameters below Press the Auto Setup button then toggle the Auto Enab button ON Press Play to move transport Touch the control of any enabled parameter on any signal path selected or not It enters record and starts writing automation You can touch a control and put it into record before or after pressing Play The rest is the same as the normal Touch modes Enabling Mix Items Typically mix items are recorded a few at a time often only one To put a mix item into automation record we must first enable it then put it into write or trim this is just like arming tracks before recording audio on to them Enabling mix items requires enabling their parameters and their signal paths as outlined below Enable Parameters Using the Xstream Param Enable Layout Press the Param Enable button in the upper left of the Automation Megamode Parameters can be enabled by pressing the blue Param Enable key and selecting one or more parameters some of the parameters have a red triangle in the button That means they control more than one parameter For example
278. nt to the block based audio environment in the PC where plug ins are performed Larger block size means more reliable operation but longer latency Fairlight recommends using 1024 samples To set block size click Setup gt General Preferences and click the Audio Plugins tab General Preferences f X Options Audiobase Playback Video Capture Projects Audio Plugins Latency 21 ddm Scan on each Startup Rescan Cancel Scan Use the slider to set the Block Size Latency for each block size is shown Fairlight QUANTUM Page 265 PLUG INS REWIRE AND EXTERNAL PROCESSING November 13 2014 NOTE Latency is also affected by the processing delay of the VST plug in itself i e the time it takes for the CPU to execute Block size makes no difference to this Scanning on Startup If you check the Scan on Startup button in the General Preferences dialog shown above the system will scan all your plug ins each time it starts If you have a large number of plug ins this can take a long time especially since many of them require dongle verification Another strategy is to use the Rescan button in the same dialog only when you have added or removed plug ins from the system Plug in Latency and Compensation Each plug in takes a certain amount of time to run and this effectively delays the audio in the track or live feed The delay time is called the latency of the plug in Latency has two components e AudioBridge
279. ny source can be patched to any destination For example a Bus Element can be patched to a Track Input for recording purposes To illustrate select the Category Sub Bus Out the outputs of all the Sub Buses The expanded view will show the Sub Bus elements separately and they can be selected and patched to track inputs for recording Fairlight QUANTUM Page 58 PATCHING SIGNAL PATHS November 13 2014 To deselect all the signal paths you have selected touch the Clear button The Multi Button Clicking the Multi button allows you to patch the same sources multiple times Normally after a patch both sources and destinations are deselected but if Multi is ON the sources remain selected through as many patchings as you like View Buttons E Wit The View buttons control which names appear on the tiles If you choose View System the names shown are the functional system names like Track 5 Live 3 etc If you choose View User the names will be the ones you have given to these signal paths For signal paths where you have not given a name the system name is used The Info Button eee 5x20 AIl Track 1 Input f Pressing the Info button allows you to see more detail about specific tiles To do this press Info then click on any tile The system will show a box with information about the source and destination patching associated with that tile What are the Categories Each category name has two parts The fir
280. o Track Collapsed 5 1 Link Group Link Groups For arming the Link Group always behaves as a single entity so arming any member of the group arms all For mute and solo selecting the first member the Master soloes or mutes all members but the other members can be soloed or muted individually when the group is expanded Double clicking near the left edge of the tracks expands or contracts a Link Group Fairlight QUANTUM Page 43 CHANNELS November 13 2014 Automation The Auto button puts a track in and out of Automation Record This is only available if Automation is switched on use the Mix On screen button or surface button The Mix On screen button The Graph button allows you to choose an Automation curve for each track out of Fader Mute and Pan Other choices are available in the Automation software see Automation chapter Fader automation chosen for graph display Mute automation chosen for graph display Pan automation chosen for graph display Zooming The track display represents a 24 hour continuous loop The timescale can be zoomed from a few samples across the screen to eight hours The Zoom number and screen width are shown at the bottom left of the screen To change zoom range Step 1 Hold down the Zoom button Step 2 Turn the jogger wheel to zoom in and out Alternatively Step 1 Hold down the Zoom button Step 2 Type a Number from 1 to 22 on the Numeric Keypad Alternatively
281. o Buttons Fairlight QUANTUM Page 238 Step 3 Step 4 AUTOMATION November 13 2014 Track 19 Auto Buttons Click Play to move the transport automation data starts writing Click Stop automation stops writing and Auto buttons are extinguished Using the In Button This works on all selected signal paths The In and out buttons are available in the Punch sub menu To access this press the Punch Menu button in the Automation Megamode Using Touch Snap Works on selected signal paths only unless Touch AutoEnable is toggled ON Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Press the Auto Setup button then press the Touch button until Snap is selected Enable parameter s see Enable Parameters below Select signal paths see Select Signal Paths below Press Play to move transport Touch or click and move the control of any enabled mix item it enters record and starts writing automation Release the control it leaves record The mix items that will be recorded are only those you have touched and only while you were touching them Notes e Only enabled mix items can be written by this method e See Touch Auto Enable below for a more powerful version Using Touch Latch This is the same as Touch Snap except once a control is touched it stays in record even after you release it Use Stop or other standard methods to exit all recording or press Auto to take the curre
282. o Transients Auto detection of transients is not guaranteed to work for all audio but to increase accuracy you may adjust two settings Threshold and Sensitivity To access these settings e Press the Settings Soft key or e Click Process ClipBender gt Detection Settings Threshold the audio level at which the transient detector starts looking Audio below this level is ignored Sensitivity the energy level change in dB which marks a transient A value of 1 0dB for example means that if the signal energy increases by 1dB then a transient is detected So low values will detect more transients than high values Rendering ClipBender Effects You may render clips with ClipBender effects This will create new media into which the sound of those effects is permanently recorded To do this Step 1 Select the clip s to be rendered Step 2 Press the Render Soft key Alternatively Step 1 Select the clip s to be rendered Step 2 Click the Render button in the ClipBender Smart Pane If the Clip Bender Smart Pane is not visible click view Smart Pane Clip Bender Fairlight QUANTUM Page 165 TIME DOMAIN PROCESSING November 13 2014 Rendering produces new media and places a clip referencing that media on top of the original clip which is automatically muted You can delete the new rendered clip to gain access to the original one though you will need to unmute it You have a choice of performing the renders in the background or
283. o be active All other channels will be deselected The last selection you make always becomes the Current Channel which is the target for mixing parameter changes and special editing commands Fairlight QUANTUM Page 41 CHANNELS November 13 2014 Using the Mouse Clicking Screen Track buttons additive selection Press a dark onscreen track selection key to add that track to the selection Press a lit onscreen track selection to remove that track from the selection Click and drag your mouse in the onscreen track selection pane to select deselect multiple tracks reer Click here to select track 8 for editing Click here to deselect Track 14 jt F ag ra Err a7 13 Click any track here to select the Link Group starting at track 19 To select a single track double click its number All other tracks will be deselected Clicking in a Track exclusive selection Clicking in the body of a track will make it the only selected track All other tracks will be deselected Clicking and dragging vertically will select a range of tracks but NOT if there is a clip under the original click then it will drag the clip instead You can get around this limitation by Shift Ctrl clicking i e hold down Shift and Ctrl while clicking then the clips will be ignored Note that you will also create a range if your dragging also has a horizontal component Ctrl clicking in the body of a track will add it to
284. o increase your speed practise using them with your left hand while your right hand uses the Jog Wheel Get Ready Hold down Mode and press the green Edit Basic Megamode button Press the cut erase button to access the Cut menu Press the range button until it is OFF Operation Getting the right location track selection and view use at least half of your editing time This can be speeded up as follows Jog Speed hold down ctri to jog faster Track Selection hold down Track up down while jogging Time Zoom hold down Zoom while jogging Track Zoom hold down ctrl and Zoom while jogging Locate the transport so that the cursor crosses the middle of a clip Make its track the only selected one If necessary use the Bank key The target clip should now be the only red clip on the screen Red means ready to edit Hold down Trackf and press cut clip head tail Keep holding while turning the Jogger Wheel to move to another track Release both keys to drop the cut clip on to the target track Press and hold cut clip Jog forward and release cut clip to drop the cut clip You can do the same with copy and trim These moves may feel awkward at first but remember your first mouse click and drag With practice you ll become a virtuoso editor Fairlight QUANTUM Page 102 EDITING November 13 2014 Tactile Editing Detailed Description This section goes into more detail about editing Edit Modes QUANTUM editing uses
285. o re order the locators drag and drop them with the mouse To delete a locator drag it far to the right and drop it when the delete icon is displayed Delete icon Video locators are also displayed in the Edit Marks list Locators list and can be edited there The Video Scroller The Video Scroller is a line of frames across the bottom of the screen centered at the current frame These frames cover the same width as the audio tracks The Video Scroller is useful because you can see specific frames and scene changes coming up and use it for easy location To Display the Video scroller click OR e Hold down Bank and press Sel Video Editing with QUANTUM Buttons Editing commands can be used with the video track the same way as they are with audio The copy and cut commands can be used as with audio to put video clips on the clipboard but unlike audio clips they can only be pasted back to the video track NOTE Cross fades between two video clips become dissolves Audio tracks and Pyxis track can be selected and edited simultaneously Editing with the Mouse Video clips can be dragged left and right but not up and down across tracks Fairlight QUANTUM Page 304 Pyxis TRACK November 13 2014 Using Pyxis Track as a Machine Selecting Pyxis Track as one of your machines allows you to take it offline the same way as physical machines For information about setting Pyxis as a machine see Machine Control p
286. o to input simulating the record experience Click the Stop button at any time to stop the take or use the Stop button in the transport controls Note When the ADR is in Rehearse mode double clicking a cue will select it and initiate a rehearsal Cycle Recording a cue Step 1 Click the Rec Playback button or press the RECORD PLAYBACK soft key until its label is RECORD This puts the ADR system in Record mode Step 2 Select a cue The transport will locate to its In Time Step 3 Click Cycle This will cause the transport to drive through the In and Out points recording a take then cycle through again for playback Click the Stop button at any time to stop the take or use the Stop button in the transport controls Note When ADR is in Record mode double clicking a cue will select it and initiate a recording Cycle Playing Back a cue step 1 Turn off the Rec Playback Or Rehearse button if on or press the RECORD PLAYBACK soft key until its label is PLAYBACK This puts the ADR system in Playback mode Step 2 Select a cue The transport will locate to its In Time Step 3 Click Cycle This will cause the transport to drive through the In and Out points once playing back the audio Note When the ADR is in Playback mode double clicking a cue will select it and initiate a playback Cycle Fairlight QUANTUM Page 88 ADR November 13 2014 Pre Record Pre Record automatically enters record a little earlier than the time
287. ode If you punch into record over existing Tape Mode clips shown yellow the audio media will be replaced as you record If you continue to record past the end of the clip it will be extended If you punch into record in empty track space or over an Edit Mode clip shown red or blue the system will create a new Tape Mode clip Note if you extend beyond the end of a clip you may be overwriting media that has been trimmed from the end of the clip This is illustrated below Before clip exposes only part of the original media During Tape Mode recording Media is being replaced Fairlight QUANTUM Page 74 RECORDING November 13 2014 Recording reaches the end of the clip and continues clip is extended and now the hidden media is being replaced CAUTION This media might be used by other clips in which case their sound will change To prevent this you can use Replace Mode This is a variation where the system will not punch in until it is playing over a clip and will punch out automatically when it reaches the end of that clip This ensures that you cannot overwrite any media that is not exposed nor can you create a new clip by punching in too early To select Replace Mode select Process Tape Mode Replace Mode Creating Tapes If you would like to ensure that only one clip per track is created by recording you can start by making a Tape which is a Tape Mode that is ready to overwrite step 1 Press the Record NEW Tape
288. oject Click Add Mark to make a new one Click Next Mark or Previous Mark to jump to marks For more info about Marks see Using Marks below The Sync Point is placed in a clip just so you can jump there To set the sync point locate to the place in the clip where you want it select the Editor Megamode and use Trim gt Sync softkey Enter Alternatively use the menu command Clip Set Sync Point Using Marks Overview QUANTUM allows you to create up to 100 timecode Marks which are stored in the Project file Marks can be edited and named They can also be used in Jump and Go To commands as target locations Create New Mark To create a mark press the Mark button at any time Editor Megamode This will put a Mark at the current timecode position Placing of Marks can be undone using the Undo button or the Undo command in the Edit Menu It is also possible to remove the undoability of marks This is done by clicking Setup General Preferences gt Projects and unselecting Marks are undoable Edit Marks You can display all the Marks you have made and change their names and timecodes remove them and more To display the list of Marks e Press the Go To button to display the Go To menu Then press the mark soft key e Choose view Marks The list of marks appears over the Edit screen Fairlight QUANTUM Page 64 TRANSPORT November 13 2014 My new mark 002532 12 71 Another new mark 2 00 53 13 10 No name needed
289. olling Scanned Folders You may wish to save time when the system starts by omitting the scan of some folders in your system This is particularly useful when the system is connected to a network In the Media and Project Management dialog you can display all storage devices folders and files Devices Nene _L ocation _ escrption Merta Ri _ Free space MP Recycle Bn space _ Farightau For apeed_ Networked Rec Priority Audio_D Dream II Audio RiwW 101844 MB OMB Yes 2500 Local video _E 7 Dream II Video Riw 165770 MB 0 MB Yes 2500 Local Local Disk Cit Windows Forma Both Riw 28722 MB 0 MB No 2500 Local Vault T Windows Forma Both RiwW 334316 MB 0 MB No 2500 Shared Find SubFolders Convert to Media device Set Device Info View CD Drives Default Project Device Audio_D Rescan Rescan Devices Empty Recycle Bins Scanned Folders Subfolders D FairlightAU Projects Project Type Comment o ooo D Fairlight4U Media 24 tk empty NLY Diana Frango Pyxis NLY 8 D FairlightAUProjects aaf test 24000 clip project DR2 Dream II 24048 D FairlightAU Projects New Project2 seta ae Big Import DR2 Dream II 5678 D Fairlight4U Projects New Project2 Media aachact Frank Mix05 DR2 D rcii Testing 1140 D FairlightAU ML3_AVT40a50 ML4_audio pee New Project19 DR2 Dream II 1548 D FairlightAU Medial videoImportedaudioMedi BusTest New Project20 DR2 Dream II 10 D Fairlight4U Projects New Project9 Media ChannelTest48
290. on and off Whilst in Solo Mode the following soft keys are available On Off Follow Proj Follow Lib Toggles all solos on and off When this is on all selected tracks are automatically soloed When this is on selected tracks are automatically soloed when importing from a Library file for more about importing see page 134 Whilst in Mute Mode the following soft keys are available On Off Toggles all mutes on and off Editor Screen Click a Solo button in the Editor Screen to toggle solo on any track Click a Mute button in the Editor Screen to toggle mute on any track Fairlight QUANTUM Page 49 CHANNELS November 13 2014 Mute Solo Click a Solo button and drag up or down to solo lots of tracks Click a Mute button and drag up or down to mute lots of tracks Mixer Screen Click a Solo button in the Mixer Screen to toggle solo on any track Click a Mute button in the Mixer Screen to toggle mute on any track Fairlight QUANTUM Page 50 CHANNELS November 13 2014 Track Track Track Track Track 3 f T 5 Solo ON OFF Mute ON OFF S M S M ss My Track 5 Track 6 Trae it a o iia S aa Track 21 Track 22 Track 23 a s I ey Solo Safe When a channel is soloed it works by muting all the other unsoled channels Sometimes you want to prevent this e g when channels returning reverb or other signals that affect the sound of th
291. on is written there can be events that are nothing more than a block of static information e g nothing more than an in and out point with no dynamic information in between These neutral events can nonetheless add up to a lot of data With Mix Thinning turned on multiple identical events of this na ture are only identified once therefore creating less events data in the global mix The feature operates transparently If desired this functionality needs to be turned on Instructions Step 1 Quit the Post V5 0 software by clicking the Close Box in the upper right of the Edit screen Step 2 Navigate in Windows to C ProgramData Fairlight F MC Data and open the file System_Variables TXT Fairlight QUANTUM Page 261 Step 3 AUTOMATION November 13 2014 There is a line in that file MIX_THINNING_ ENABLED 0 Set the 0 to a 1 and save the file Restart the system and Mix Thinning will be operating Recording Mixes Recording a mix in real time using the automation to drive the processing parameters is a simple way of printing it to files It also has the advantage that you can record many deliverables on separate sub buses at the same time To record a mix it is necessary to patch the output of the bus in question to a set of tracks one track per bus element For example if SubBus 1 has 5 1 format you need six tracks to record it To patch SubBus 1 to a set of six tracks do the following Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step
292. on the Edit Screen Fairlight QUANTUM Page 21 CENTRAL TACTILE CONTROL November 13 2014 Mon The Mon key opens the Monitor Megamode It works latched and momentary Monitor Controls Monitor Sources ee eee Sub 2 Sub 3 sub4 Sub 5 TLAN ed Sub 1 oe Dial 2 2 INTER ai OFF Al 15 Studio OFF Fixed 50 Main FO Mix Minus FD Music FO FX BG SyncFO Interviews wa archive Mus 5F FO SEX FD A a o E it E 1 B 4B E to E t10 E t11 E t12 MILITE DIM Monitor Monitor Talk back Speaker Mutes Speaker sets Mute and Dim setup Source destination menu setup menu menu Mono and stereo comp Monitor Menus Monitor Setup allows you to create speaker sets and set their names formats and physical outputs Monitor Source Setup allows you to create External monitor sources and set their names and physical input sources Talkback Destination this is where you choose which buses your talkback addresses Fairlight QUANTUM Page 22 CENTRAL TACTILE CONTROL November 13 2014 GoTo Go To allows location to timecodes marks or audio clips Soto Goto Grab Mark Clip Time Go to AbsoluteTimecode Press GoTo type a timecode and press GO or press Play to go there and start playing Go to Relative Timecode Press GoTo press or then type a timecode and press GO or press Play to go there and start playing The transport locates to the time first shown plus or min
293. on the Patch Page see Patching Signal Paths page 55 Note that Insert Sends and Returns may be patched to other channels within the NAME system not only sent to physical outputs Oscillator The system oscillator has three channels e Tone Fairlight QUANTUM Page 222 MIXING November 13 2014 e Noise switchable between White and Pink e Beeps used by the ADR program Each of the channels can be routed to a different point in the patching system The Tone and Noise outputs are both toggled on together while the Beeps are turned on and off independently by the ADR program The Tone and Noise channels use the same Level control see below The settings for Beeps are controlled by the ADR program To access these settings click on the menu item ADR ADR Preferences The system oscillator is controlled on its own layout in the Mixer Megamode To access this Step 1 Hold down the Mode button and press the Mixer button Step 2 Press the Osc Setup button The following functions become available Osc On Off Simply press the Osc On of f button to toggle the oscillator Tone and Noise channels on and off Frequency Sets the frequency for the Tone channel as follows step 1 Press the Freq button The number pad will appear Step 2 Type the number of the frequency you require The numbers will append to the existing number until it exceeds 10 000 and then it starts again at 20 Step 2A The and buttons can be
294. onary clips with a moving Play Head To do this click Setup gt Locked Playhead until the tick is removed Fairlight QUANTUM Page 144 EDITING November 13 2014 Sample Editing Redrawing waveform with the mouse can be done as follows Step 1 Zoom in until you can see individual samples This can be done with the mouse wheel It can also be done by holding down the zoom button and turning the Jog Wheel clockwise Step 2 Drag a sample up or down You can also drag freeform including left or right to create a new path for the corresponding sequence of samples The system displays black points to show where samples have been moved Note Sample Editing can be undone as the changed points are stored separately from the media Fairlight QUANTUM Page 145 EDITING November 13 2014 The Edit Toolbar The Edit Toolbar is shown only when the Solo theme is selected To do this click General Preferences Display Active Theme Then select Solo from the drop down menu Audiobase Meters Patch Redo Cut selected Paste Smart Smart I O reverse clips or clipboard Pane Pane page last undo range i E E Display Clip EQ Clip Undo Erase Copy layering Smart Search last edit selected selected Pane Window clips or clips or range range Fade Trim Tail Head ce Bel eth Fade Split Trim Head Clip Tail Nudge Name Not Jump to Jump to 1 frame Clip active previous mark previous point ro Ut a Nudge Mute Clip Add Jump to Jump to 1
295. only select an audio track if less than two are already on the screen While scrollers are displayed you can e Click at any point to locate to that position e Click and drag the scroller to move the transport Zoom the audio scrollers by floating the mouse above it and turning the mouse wheel Other scroller preferences e Scrollers as outline you can display the scroller waveform in solid or outline format e Scrollers on full screen video you can choose to have the scroller display present when full screen video has been chosen This is useful for moving the timeline e Scrollers follows current track the scroller automatically chooses the most recently selected track for display Solo and Mute QUANTUM has a number of ways to solo and mute Briefly here they are Fairlight QUANTUM Page 48 CHANNELS November 13 2014 QUANTUM Tactile Surface Name Fave Proj Indo Salo Menu Solo Button Range Mute ON Menu Mute Button Jump Jump Press the Solo button to enter Solo Mode You can now toggle solo on any path by pressing its button in the Pad Press the Mute button to enter Mute Mode You can now toggle mute on any path by pressing its button in the Pad Both the Solo and Mute buttons can operate in momentary mode hold down the button press keys in the Pad then release Double pressing the Solo button toggles all Soloed paths on and off Double pressing the Mute button toggles all Muted paths
296. oom Sending level to the Boom channel can be done pre or post fader Fairlight QUANTUM Page 211 MIXING November 13 2014 Equalisation Lo Pass Filter or Low Shelf Hi Shelf Parametric EQ bandpass Lo Shelf Hi Pass Filter or High Shelf EQ Type Gain Compensation EQ IN OUT The channel mixer provides four bands of parametric equalization and two filters Each parametric section can be switched in or out independently The Hi and Lo Pass filter sections can be switched to shelves using the mouse wheel The parametric bands can be switched between Bell Lo Shelf Hi Shelf and notch using the mouse wheel Their frequency ranges can also be switched between Low Low mid High mid and High EQ Type Clicking the or buttons changes the EQ display to show different types of controls There are four types available each with its own sound Fairlight QUANTUM Page 212 MIXING November 13 2014 Dynamics The Post V5 0 Dynamics comprises three sections compressor limiter and expander or gate In Make up gain Sidechain In Out Linking for Buses and Link Groups Compressor IN OUT Limiter IN OUT Gate Expander IN OUT Dynamics Toggle Expander or Each section has an independent IN OUT control All three may be ache the same time if required The transfer function of the dynamics is shown in the Mixer Screen channels the Xstream Pad and the Dynamics Zoom screen
297. opy and erase target the parts of clips that lie inside the range Some other commands like Nudge Fade and Clip Level target only whole clips that lie inside the range Pressing the range button toggles the range on and off Operation Hold down Mode and press the green Edit Basic Megamode button Press the cut erase button so that Cut is highlighted Press the range key to turn it OFF Locate the transport so that the cursor crosses the middle of at least one clip Identify the track containing that clip and double press its button to make it the only selected track If necessary use the Bank key Press from A range is begun at that point Now Jog to the right The range is extended and the clip goes red inside it Press to The range is now fixed Jump From key The From and To keys Investigate cut range cut head cut tail use undo in between From and To Menu Now hold down the BLUE key Fairlight QUANTUM Page 93 EDITING November 13 2014 The from button changes into the from gap button Press this and the range will expand to the left to reach the first moment of silence no clip in that direction Press it again to find the following gap in that direction Trimming clips Overview A clip is the visual representation of a real piece of recorded audio located on hard disk Editing a clip means changing which part of the recorded audio is played When cutting or erasing parts of a clip you a
298. or commands and parameter changes With audio tracks clips on the selected ones are targeted for clip based editing Using Pad Keys Channels are displayed in a sequence that includes all channel types A Link Groups is displayed as a single item This is a departure from previous Fairlight products Select oe ne nu Rec Dial Dial Dial WYO 1 Lett Fx 1 Fx 2 Fx 3 Tk 7 Tk 4 Tk 10 Tk 13 Tk 14 Tk 15 5 37 42 Tks 19 24 Tks 25 30 Tks 31 36 2 Ths 43 48 Tks 49 54 Tks 55 60 Tks 61 66 Tks 67 72 This cut down section of the Pad display shows Link Groups on the lower row This channel display allows large projects to be navigated with less need for bank switching Track Track Track Track Track Live Live Live Live gz ga g4 g5 g 1 3 5 m Tk 92 Tk 93 Tk 94 Tk 95 Tk 36 Live 1 Live 3 Live 5 Live amp Gro Main Sub Sub Sub Sub Sub ALIX ALIX i i J 4 il 2 Group 7 Main 1 Sub 1 Sub 2 Sub 3 Sub 4 Sub 5 Aux 1 Aus 2 Towards the end of the Banks of channels we see Live Feeds Groups and Buses Note these two pictures are cut down from their actual size The order of display is e Tracks e Live Feeds e Groups e Main e Sub Buses e Aux Buses Press any Pad button to toggle the associated channel in and out of the selection Double press any button to make its channel the sole selection To select a range of channels press and hold down the first channel select key and double click the last channel selection key you wish t
299. or timecode At the same time its transport controls are active Fairlight QUANTUM Page 343 SYNC AND MACHINE CONTROL November 13 2014 Select 9 pin ID Allows you to choose the type of machine being emulated by QUANTUM This allows for slight variations in the 9 pin protocol Status Sense Play Tally Controls an aspect of 9 pin performance This parameter controls the value of bitO 0 Byte 1 in the Sony Protocol command Ox7X 0x20 Status Data sent from QUANTUM system to the Sony master device in response to the 0x61 0x20 Status sense command If Play Only is set the value of this bit is 1 only when QUANTUM is in Play or Record modes If Play and varispeed is set the value of this bit is 1 when QUANTUM is in Play Record or varispeed modes Some equipment e g DspMedia postation requires this parameter to be set to Play only to work correctly Some equipment e g SoundMaster requires this parameter to be set to Play and Varispeed to work correctly LTC Chase When a machine M1 or M2 with this setting is placed on line it means that QUANTUM will chase Longitudinal Time Code entering the SMPTE In port on the SX 20 Play Tracking Determines how many incorrect frames the system must see before it jumps to be in sync with the incoming timecode or stops if no timecode is coming in This allows the system to keep playing over timecode that has gaps Record Tracking As with Play Tracking b
300. ormal parameters are continuous controls For continuous controls turn the encoder clockwise to increase the value or anti clockwise to decrease it For switched parameters touch or tap the encoder lightly but firmly to change the switch state Some switches have only two values like OFF or ON but others have many values such as the Shape parameter shown above With these parameters tapping the encoder causes them to cycle around all their possible values then start again Signal Processing Using the Quantum In Line Panel QILP Track 17 ah Track 18 gt p gt Vl e2e L lt T T Sra T v wy T i Fairlight QUANTUM Page 198 MIXING November 13 2014 Overview The Quantum In Line Panel provides a pair of rotary encoders for each fader channel Immediately above it a graphic panel shows what the encoders are controlling and provides additional Touch Switches a COCO ry Py ry gt gt l B gt F B F F 10 F 46 F 100 Trark 1 Track 7 Track 9 A nice name Tra 2 Track 13 Track 1 Track 15 EL 3 5 i i L R L R L R L R 24 20R C C 100L C E 2 Track Names Rotary Control Tallies Touch Switches Param Graph Channel Meters Strip Mode Selectors a dh EE ah aTi A fe 56 B 64 F 44 F 100F 100 F 24L F B F B e F E ack 1 Track 7 Track 9 A nice name Track 12 Normal and ALT Modes The button at the bottom of the column at the right of the faders switches be
301. osystems Inc has contractually obligated Fairlight AU s Software Suppliers to make this disclaimer e No Liability for Certain Damages EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW Fairlight AU S SOFT WARE SUPPLIERS SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT SPECIAL CONSE QUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE THIS LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE IN NO EVENT SHALL Fairlight AU S SOFTWARE SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNT IN EXCESS OF U S TWO HUNDRED FIFTY DOLLARS U S 250 00 e Limitations on Reverse Engineering Decompilation and Disassembly You may not reverse engineer decompile or disassemble the SOFTWARE except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation e SOFTWARE TRANSFER ALLOWED BUT WITH RESTRICTIONS You may permanently transfer rights under this EULA only as part of a permanent sale or transfer of the Device and only if the recipient agrees to this EULA If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade any transfer must also include all prior versions of the SOFTWARE Obtaining Technical Support Users requiring technical support should contact their local distributor Information can also be found at http www fairlightau com Manual Errors and Omission To help ensure that Fairlight provides the most accurate and comprehensive documentation please report any errors or omi
302. ou can choose whether to listen to its input signal its playback signal REPRO a switched combination or nothing Overview Press Mode and then Arm to access recording functions The mon soft key will now toggle between Input and Auto settings For more settings select Setup Record Settings and select a radio button in the Monitor group The Monitor settings work as follows Input always monitors the input to the track Fairlight QUANTUM Page 73 RECORDING November 13 2014 Auto monitors repro in Play or Jog otherwise input Record mutes the track when stopped otherwise as AUTO Mute mutes the track while in Record otherwise repro Repro always monitors recorded audio Tape Mode Overview When Tape Mode is selected you can punch in on existing Tape Mode clips and replace the audio media This can save filling up disks with unwanted material and results in a cleaner simpler project with fewer clips You can also create new Tape Mode clips by recording or using the Make Tape command Press Mode and then Arm to access recording functions Press the Record soft key so that Tape is displayed You can also select Tape Mode by selecting Process Tape Mode Tape Mode Process Erame Rate Convert Remove SRC Regenerate Profiles Remove Hidden Clips Gate Preview Gate Discard Unused Media Localize Audio Localize Yideo Tape Mode i Fi Normal Record Tape Mode Replace Mode Using Tape M
303. our Editing Screen but this can be inconvenient Be very careful not to choose the screen used by the QUANTUM Center Section this is awkward to reverse Use the Identify button to show the monitor numbers on the physical screens These may not be the same numbers shown in the Windows Screen Resolution dialog Now you may restart QUANTUM If you choose EVO Mixer Screen it will appear on the nominated monitor EVO Mixer Screen was originally designed to work on a 1600 x 900 monitor displaying 40 faders If your monitor is taller than 900 pixels the faders will be taller but everything else will look the same If it is narrower or wider than 1600 pixels it will display fewer or more faders Fairlight QUANTUM Page 200 MIXING November 13 2014 The EVO Mixer Screen 00 41 17 15 Automation section yzvxbx Track Track Track Track Track Track Track Track Track Track Track Track Track Track Track Track Track Track Track Track Track Track Track Track Track k3 3 9 20 2 22 2 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 i 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 Channel Scroll Bar The EVO Mixer Screen shows only those Live Feeds which have inputs patched plus one more ready to patch Similarly VCA Group faders are shown only for groups with members Scrolling Scrolling of the mixer screen can be done by e Dragging the Scroll Bar with the mouse e Inthe Mixer Megamode holding down Scroll Mixer and pressing the Scroll Left Or Scroll Right button Solo
304. owing ways e Hold down Mode and press Arm Or ADR then press a Track button e Hold down the Record button and press a Track button e Click the Arm button near a track number on the Edit screen The button should turn red Fairlight QUANTUM Page 71 RECORDING November 13 2014 Click to Arm You can click one Arm button thus toggling it and then drag up or down to toggle others to the same value armed or disarmed without being careful to drag exactly over the buttons only vertical mouse position is taken into account Click then drag to arm multiple tracks The illustrated move will cause tracks 5 to 14 to be armed as long as they have patched inputs Fairlight QUANTUM Page 72 Click to Arm RECORDING November 13 2014 e Click an Arm button on the QUANTUM Mixer Screen Track Track Track Track Track il T 4 5 T The same click and drag move can be used to arm or disarm multiple tracks but this time using horizontal dragging lf the track has no input the system will display the error message No input patched to Track To fix this go to the Patch page as described above in Patching Inputs and give it an input Once a track is armed use the Play and Record keys to punch into record Play Stop REW FF or Jog to punch out Arm or Disarm All Tracks To disarm all tracks Hold down the Record button and press the Disarm A11 button Record Monitoring When a track is armed y
305. ows Undo Zoom Level follows Undo Trakk display follows Undo Marks are undoable Restore Previous View on Project Load Audio Record Format WAV MT Options Default Fuf extension fut Stuff Fufs Bit Depth 16 or 24 Multiple Workspaces Maintain Project Sample Rate and Frame Rate 6 Switch Sample Rate and Frame Rate Media Scan Scan Media in background required restart In addition you can toggle the Follow Playhead option using the PlayheadFollows softkey in the Undo Menu Notes When recording multiple punch ins and outs in a single pass will produce multiple undoable events When you undo a recording the media you created is not destroyed by undo only the clips that reference the newly created media In fact you can access the media again using View Orphaned Media See how on page 327 Fairlight QUANTUM Page 140 EDITING November 13 2014 Undo Automation and Audio Automation changes can be undone with the same Undo button as Edit changes lt is also possible to perform audio and automation changes simultaneously To set this up Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Hold down Mode and press Mixer the Mixer Megamode Mix On must be ON if not toggle it on Select the Mix menu Toggle the Target soft key so that it reads BOTH When you perform an audio edit with the Target set to Both an audio edit and an automation edit occur at the same time In the Undo List this will be seen as a single aud
306. p or copied its tail etc You can edit notes inside and outside the area The notes outside the area cannot be heard in the MIDI Note Editor or the normal Track Display Notes can be dragged horizontally in time or vertically in pitch Ranges of notes can also be selected with a mouse lasso marquee and dragged horizontally or vertically Notes dragged outside the limits of the MIDI clip will not be heard after editing but they are not erased The Note Editor Smart Pane a PE PSERERED mE oa sam PSPS EEE m IHH afa a oe PEPEpNENpN EC Commands in the Note Editor Smart Pane are issued by clicking on the buttons Notes can be selected by moving the transport over them like audio clips In addition you can select a range of notes in time and in pitch with the mouse lasso The commands are described in detail below Fairlight QUANTUM Page 312 MIDI TRACKS November 13 2014 Quantises the selected note s to the current note value Shows Click to toggle Click one of these Set the These commands advanced the track three buttons to set current Note act on the selected quantise display the mouse click Value used note s They set options between the action It can be by Add Note duration to the Piano Roll used to select Duration and current note value and normal clicked notes add a Quantise or add subtract the tracks note where you Click note value s or delete notes duration where you click To se
307. p layer Step 3 On the Cut Menu Copy Menu or Erase Menu press the Paste Special Soft key Now choose from the alternatives shown on the other soft keys Pressing one of these executes the Paste immediately Step 3a Alternatively click and hold the screen command Edit Paste Special The system displays this dialog Paste Special Source Media Erase Delete Gain Erase Head Eq Erase Tail Name Restore Head Restore Tail Now choose which characteristic to paste Notes e The clip whose characteristics are copied is the earliest in timecode on the lowest numbered track copied to the clipboard e The special paste targets every clip that is wholly within the range on selected tracks Trim Trimming allows clips to be resized Trim commands are used to set the head and tail of clips to determine how much of the original recording is played by the clip Trimming may shorten a clip or extend a clip if it is playing less than all of the original recording This will be the case if the clip was imported with handles or if the original clip has been edited Head Trim Head and Trim Tail are the most common uses of Trim Step 1 Select a track and move a clip under the cursor step 2 Press the Trim key if not already on Step 3 Press and release the Head key Step 4 Move the transport forward a few frames jog or play Step 5 Press Enter Fairlight QUANTUM Page 111 EDITING November 13 2014 The head of the clip is placed
308. pasted on your selected tracks at the current timecode If you want to paste the mix data at a different timecode simply locate there Note Another great way to do this if you want to copy audio as well as mix data is to use the Copy Project Segment command which is described on page 255 This depends on having the correct automation file loaded into the Library project Automation on Screen Enables Automation The controls in the upper left of the screen correspond with controls in the menus and on the console surface Fairlight QUANTUM Page 256 AUTOMATION November 13 2014 On Screen Automation Controls Pan in TRIM Pan in READ Pan in WRITE Track Track Track Track Track Track Track a 5 J 10 11 L ia Fader in WRITE Fader in TRIM Fader in READ The controls in the lower right of the screen correspond with controls in the menus and on the QUANTUM picture keys The Mix On checkbox is equivalent to the Mix On button Automation Curves Automation data for Tracks Live Feeds Buses and VCA Groups can be shown on the Edit Screen using the following command sequence View gt Smart Pane Automation or by pressing the Auto Curves soft key in the Mix Menu Aux Level N t Mute Aux 1 Level Aux Level Click to toggle Click to remove Pull down menu Preset controls Edit Controls automation automation of automation graphs on or off display display parameter
309. pe The razor mode causes time to be manipulated as well as audio When you razor cut audio the time it occupied is removed from the track and everything afterwards moves earlier When you razor paste audio the time it occupies is inserted into the track and everything afterwards moves later Razor editing always uses a range Get Ready Hold down Mode and press the green Edit Basic Megamode button Press the cut erase button to access the Cut menu Fairlight QUANTUM Page 101 EDITING November 13 2014 Operation Locate the transport so that the cursor crosses the middle of at least one clip Identify the track containing that clip and double press its button to make it the only selected track If necessary use the Bank key Create a range within the clip using from and to Hold down BLUE and press the Razor button to highlight it Press cut range The width of the range is cut out of the track like a piece of tape and downstream clips move forwards The cursor splits into two pieces showing the range that will be added to the timeline on selected tracks if you paste the clipboard Move inside another clip and press Enter The clipboard is pasted and the time it occupies is inserted into the track like splicing tape Investigate cut head and cut tail use undo in between Acceleration Overview Normal cut and paste can go much faster using modifier keys The modifier keys are Blue Trackt and Zoom T
310. pressing Mix On will also load that mix To turn System Mix on step 1 Press Mix Config in the Mixer Megamode The system displays a large dialog box Step 2 Select the Save Automation with Project checkbox with the mouse Step 3 Click ox or press Enter on the keyboard The Mix Menu Press the Mix Menu key in the Mixer or Automation Megamode to display the Mix menu When the mix menu is active the feed and bus selection keys are used to enable specific paths for automation The From and To keys can be used to set the In and Out points for automation punch In and Out points Target Copy Mix Paste Mix On STOP Controls whether editing targets automation data When set to audio all clip editing functions affect only the audio When set to both clip editing functions like copy paste nudge and slip will affect the automation data as well as the audio clips See Automation follows editing later in this chapter Copies mix data in the range from the selected channels into a clipboard See details below Pastes the copied mix data from the clipboard to the selected channels See details below Determines what data is written after leaving automation record by pressing the stop key or pressing Mix ON Hold erases all events from the current position to the end of the project Return returns to the previously recorded value at the current location Event holds the current value until the next event is encountered Touch A
311. processing e Buses the destination for mixing Include Main Sub Buses and Aux Buses e Group Masters also known as VCAs Systems equipped with CC 2 have slightly different channel distinction They provide Full Tracks and Playback Tracks Full Tracks can be set up as Audio Tracks or as Live Feeds both mentioned above Playback Tracks have different capabilities as follows e Itcan play back audio files created in the Fairlight system or imported from any of the accessible file formats e t contributes to mixes in exactly the same way as an Audio Track or Live Feed with the same processing capability native EQ and Dynamics plus VST plug ins e tis not able to record or take a physical input It cannot have insert sends and returns that exit the physical system nor Direct Outputs Video and MIDI tracks are described in their own chapters This chapter describes the behaviour of the other channel types Set Number of Tracks in Project The number of tracks refers to both Audio and MIDI tracks For a New Project When a project is created you can specify the number of tracks To do this e Click the File gt New command in the menu above the Edit screen or e Press Mode gt Proj New Proj In either case you will see a dialog box where you can select the number of tracks With Open Project If you wish to change the number of tracks in your project e Click the Tracks Set Audio Track Count Comman
312. r 13 2014 Step 2 Locate the cursor over the source clip Step 3 Press the copy soft key or click the Copy button on the screen Step 4 The enable checkboxes allow you to choose which of the bands are pasted into your target clip s Step 5 Locate the cursor over the destination clip or define a Range of clips Step 6 Click the Apply button or press the apply soft key or press Enter EQ In Out Use the EQ In Out Soft key to toggle the EQ on or off at any time This action will affect the clip under the cursor or all clips in the Range if any The on off position of this switch is stored in the clip along with the settings of the EQ parameters Saving EQ Presets The system allows you to save the current EQ settings and later retrieve and apply them To save an EQ setting do the following Step 1 Step 2 Type a new name into the Presets field or use an old name if you want to change its settings Set the EQ values to the ones you want to save by editing or simply by picking up the values by touching an existing clip Click the Save button or press the save soft key To retrieve an EQ setting select it from the Preset drop list It can then be applied immediately to the currently selected clip or range of clips A saved EQ setting can be deleted by first selecting it from the drop list then clicking the Delete button A special preset can be created called default Whenever the Clip EQ display is opened for a cl
313. r Max button on the Master Screen Meters 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 The system offers a new compound stereo meter including PPM and Loudness metering as well as Phase indication To enable it click Setup Meters gt View Compound Stereo Meter Now you will see the new meters if you are using the new QUANTUM Mixer Screen Mixer Screen see above and on the ILP2 screen if you have one It will only be present if your Main bus has stereo format The Loudness metering has stereo LEQ meters and a mono LU meter Fairlight QUANTUM Page 291 METERS November 13 2014 The blue and white numbers give running reports on level according to ITU R BS 1770 standard known as LKFS They represent the subjective loudness of the audio program The right number gives a rolling average over 10 seconds and the left number gives an average over the entire length of program i e since you started playing The long term average level ignores anything below 18 dB so it won t go down when the system is in Stop You can reset the long term average by clicking the left number Note that readings amongst different brands of meters commonly differ because there are no agreed standards for some metering characteristics In particular the integration time of a meter which represents the length of time signal needs to be at a particular level before the meter reaches that level and the decay time when
314. r you reach will be added to the selection This does not affect selection of untouched tracks Fairlight QUANTUM Page 142 EDITING November 13 2014 Mouse Based Ranges A range is a time interval bounded by an In Time and an Out Time It can be used to edit multiple clips and parts of clips The mouse can be used at any time to create a range Simply click an empty space one where there is no Clip and drag an area on the Track display and a range will be created The tracks that you touch while dragging will be selected and all other tracks deselected If you need to make a range where clips are present hold down the ctrl and Shift buttons while dragging This will prevent clips being relocated To remove the current range click but don t drag empty space in the track area This will also make that track the sole selection You can also toggle the range using the keyboard shortcut x You can make or extend the range to exactly include a clip by holding down ctri and clicking the clip The Range Panel Sets the Range In point at the current Click here to enter the Range timecode position In timecode numerically Sets the Range Out point at the current Click here to enter the Range timecode position Out timecode numerically Toggles the range on and off The Range panel in the upper left of the Edit Screen can be used to set precise range in and out points Move the transport to a time where you want the Range
315. rces Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Press the Mon button System buses can be chosen for immediate listening on the Upper picture keys Existing defined External Sources can also be chosen for immediate listening on the picture keys To define or redefine External Sources press the Source Setup button and the define ExtSre soft key Define External Source Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Choose the external source you wish to define Choose the monitor set that will play it Control Room or Studio Monitor Choose Analog Inputs or Digital Inouts at lower left Choose the inputs you want to use at upper left and their destination Monitor Elements at the upper right Click Patch If desired click Rename to name the set Choose any other mode to exit Source Setup Fairlight QUANTUM Page 284 MONITORING AND TALKBACK November 13 2014 Talkback QUANTUM provides two talkback circuits which can take any signal in the system including physical inputs and the oscillator and route it to any number of system buses For slating buses can be routed back to tracks for recording Note that talkback buttons on the standard consoles access Talk 1 only but the second circuit can be activated on request to your Fairlight distributor Setting Talkback Source Setting a source for the Talkback circuits is a patching operation It can be done simply by accesssing the Patch I O page for information see page 55
316. re and record again These are explained in the next step Preroll and Postroll Many record menu commands use a Pre Roll and Pre Roll The length of these can be set in the ADR List the Edit Loop menu or the Sync Menu To do this in the ADR Menu hold down Mode then press ADR and use the on screen dialog The ADR List can also be displayed using the command ADR ADR List To do this in the Sync Menu hold down Mode then press Sync Setup then press the Pre Roll or Post Roll soft key and choose a number of seconds on the buttons that appear To do this in the Edit Loop menu hold down Mode then press Edit Loop then press the Pre Roll or Post Roll soft key and choose a number of seconds on the buttons that appear Using the Record Menu Hold down the Record button to display the following soft keys head prerolls then punches in at the nearest clip head on the selected track clip prerolls then records the length of the nearest clip on the currently selected track here prerolls then punches in at the current position range prerolls punches in at From and out at To This command is shown only when there is a range again prerolls then repeats the last recording you made Fairlight QUANTUM Page 77 RECORDING November 13 2014 Punch Into Tracks Independently Overview Using the Play and Record button punches all armed tracks into and out of record What if you want to punch individual tracks in and out without affecting others
317. re reducing the amount of accessed audio Trimming a clip also means changing which part is accessed but you can increase or decrease the length that is played This is done by relocating the clip s head and tail thereby exposing more or less of the stored audio Get Ready Hold down Mode and press the green Edit Basic Megamode buiton Operation Press the trim button lf the word slip is highlighted press it again so that trim is highlighted Locate the transport so that the cursor crosses the middle of at least one clip Identify the track containing that clip and double press its button to make it the only selected track If necessary use the Bank key Press and release trim head The head of the clip is trimmed back to the cursor location Jog backwards a bit and press Enter The head is extended to the new position You can do this as many times as you like This time press and hold trim head The system exposes the whole head of the original recording While holding down trim head Jog over the exposed audio and choose where to trim it Release trim head when ready The clip is trimmed to your current position Editing on Multiple Tracks Overview Most editing operations work on multiple tracks at the same time All the red clips or parts of clips are affected This guide will show you how to select tracks Get Ready Hold down Mode and press the green Edit Basic Megamode buiton Operation The Pad displays 24 or
318. rnal device Relative Link Groups Group control can be relative or absolute To select this option Step 1 Open the System Variables dialog by typing SHIFT CTRL u Step 2 Select or deselect the Relative Link Groups checkbox Automation Desk Functions Enable automation F Allow PFL reserve stereo buss 10 Glide in time Frames Single channel Solo InterLock 0 5 Talkback latch seconds 10 Glide out time Frames Allow Edit function on LCD Mix Follows Edit 0 Mix Edit Handles Frames Enable automation optimisation Save automation with project Target Both as Default Oscillator off Enable PC parallel port for GPIO off use LPTi 0x375 50 Oscillator level dB gt use LPT2 0x278 default 999 Oscillator frequency J user defined address White Pink Calibration Step 3 Close the System Variables dialog by typing Esc escape or by clicking the Close Box at upper right Relative If linking is relative moves made by the Master fader and knobs are reflected by relative moves in the slave members For example if the Master fader moves from 10 dB to 5 dB and a slave is set to 20 dB it will rise to 15 dB the relative difference is preserved Note Setting the Master fader to 0 dB by holding down the Blue key and touching a fader will set all slave faders to 0 dB as well Pressing a switch with a toggled value e g Mute On Off will toggle the master s value and set all other me
319. roup has been called the pan display shows a red circle for the pan position of each member and a yellow circle for the position of the virtual link group master When diverge is applied a white circle represents the perceived image size e When a bus is called the output box displays the output patching showing each bus element and the user and system names of the physical outputs to which they are connected Additional Mixer Screens Mouse Control Every switch and control in the Mixer Screen may be changed using mouse clicks For switches this is simply a case of clicking on them to toggle their values For faders the knob must be clicked and dragged up or down While you are doing this the current value is displayed For rotary knobs as in the EQ Zoom panel shown below first click and hold near the center then drag the mouse in a ring around the knob A tooltip shows you the current value Click the up down buttons for fine change Box shows the Click here current value Then drag the mouse around the knob Hover over any knob and use the mouse wheel to change its setting Double clicking on any fader gain or aux send knob sets its value to 0 dB Mouse Wheel Control The mouse wheel can be used to control knob and fader settings This behaviour must be enabled first Step 1 Access the System Variables display by holding down shift and ctri then typing vu Step 2 In the Mouse Control group right side of d
320. rrent Track This will cause it to be displayed on the Edit Screen e Use Track Up Down by holding it and typing a number above the number of tracks Presets Presets are used to quickly access a particular parameter The first six buttons are provided with factory presets but you can replace them with your own To apply a preset simply click on it when the Display button is selected To create a preset Step 1 Turn Display on if necessary Step 2 Select a parameter to be displayed using either the pull down menu Step 3 Click the Save button Step 4 Click a preset button Step 5 The system will request a name for the preset You may use the suggested name or choose your own Fairlight QUANTUM Page 258 AUTOMATION November 13 2014 The Curve Display Fader Level Automation data is shown as a green line with the name of the parameter to the right of the cursor For switched parameters like Mutes the line is shown high when the channel is on and low when it is muted as shown below 14 TRA Mute When writing automation the graph is shown in red Existing automation data is shown in green allowing you to target punch out points easily 04_TRACK IN 4_TRACK IN TO DI 16 bit Fairlight QUANTUM Page 259 AUTOMATION November 13 2014 Note that in this case the red line continues past the cursor This shows accurately what will happen when Write is exited because the system On Stop setting is EVENT meanin
321. ry provides storage for Equaliser Dynamics Plugins whole Channel presets or complete QUANTUM snap shots Up to 100 of each type of preset can be stored These presets can be recalled and applied to any signal path in any project To access the Library menu hold down Mode and press Lib Select the preset type by pressing the chan EQ chan dyn all chan Orall console soft key Select the library function by pressing the Save Load or Delete keys The presets and functions are described below all chan means all the parameters in the currently selected signal path Dynamics Plug in y The Library page is shown above with EQ selected The EQ presets are shown in the upper left section of the window Presets Equaliser A library of 100 equaliser settings is provided Each equaliser preset stores all the parameter settings of the equaliser section on the signal path currently called to the Master fader Press the Eo soft key in the Library menu to select equaliser presets Fairlight QUANTUM Page 233 MIXING November 13 2014 Dynamics A library of 100 dynamics settings is provided Each dynamics preset stores all the parameter settings of the dynamics section on the signal path currently called to the Master fader Press the DYN soft key in the Library menu to select dynamics presets Plug In A library of 100 Plug in settings is provided Each preset stores all the parameter settings of the Plug in section on the signal pa
322. s always heard on playback In Tape Mode existing audio can be destructively replaced See the section on Tape Mode below To record on a track it must be armed Before being armed a track must have a source or patched input Patching Inputs Before you can record on a track it needs an audio source called an Input This could be a physical input or an internal path in the system such as a Bus element or an insert send The next section Patch Inputs to Tracks ilustrates patching by example Display the Patch I O screen by doing one of the following e Press Mode and then Patch e Click the Patch icon in the toolbar Patch Button e Select Mixer Patching The Mixer Screen shows a Patching dialog We are going to patch connect a physical input to the track where it will be recorded Fairlight QUANTUM Page 70 RECORDING November 13 2014 Ensure Track Input Is selected at the lower right then select a track number to be recorded in the upper right Into Y Wi Liser Click Analog Inputs Of Digital Inputs at the lower left of the screen Select any Input in the upper left of the screen Click Patch to connect the physical input to the track Exit Patching by selecting another menu or by right clicking the Patch I O display Note Patching is used for all system connections between paths Please see Patching Signal Paths on page 55 for more details Arming Tracks Tracks can be armed in the foll
323. s for much older systems you ll know if you need to use it Choosing Format At the time of creating a project file the system offers the choice of project formats in the New Project dialog Fairlight QUANTUM Page 315 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT November 13 2014 There is no way to change project format after creation but you can save a copy of the current project in the other format using the File Save As command Note selecting the option Retain Attributes of Existing Project will mean the new project has the same track count rates and track names as the last project Ez FX CJJ I gt Computer gt Data D gt FairightAU gt Projects Jestreamvideo p v a Search estreamvideo HIE o 7 Date modified Type jE Computer E System C a Data D GA system SUPERNOVA P GP RandD fs04 R G2 This Year fs05 T GA JDs Audiobase V GP fairlightau wsdev web website wy Sa Storage X Ge cS gandalf GP fairlightau wsdev web website wy W My Web Sites on MSN 8 01 2013 8 18 AM File folder 6 12 2012 2 37 PM DDR2 File 34 090 KE 9 08 2012 5 47PM DR2 File 34 087 KE 30 10 2012 6 42PM DR2 File 34 087 KE Ci Network JE AB3 SERVER If you save a project into the MT format it will load and play on QDC systems If you save a project into the MT MFX3 format it will load and play on MFX3 systems Fairlight QUANTUM Page 316 PROJECT AND FI
324. s show only fader information Track Feed and Live Feed tiles display more information and provide control for a group of functions as shown below Fairlight QUANTUM Page 205 MIXING November 13 2014 Dynamics In indicator only appears Click here to iw when any dynamics present cycle the Ey display A Solo ON OFF between Pan EQ and Dyn Mute ON OFF Fader Control Click here to add this channel to the Multi Trin group the number goes red Insert IN OUT EQ IN OUT Called Channel One channel can be controlled in detail It is the Called channel In the picture above it is Track 6 To call a channel from the mixer screen simply click on its tile or operate any of the controls inside it You can also call a channel using the CALL menu Track Feed and Live Feed Channel Tiles Each Track and Live Feed is represented with the track name and fader level plus indicators for EQ dynamics insert solo solo defeat and mute The parameter window within each channel tile provides a condensed display of the current settings of the Channel Panel for EQ dynamics or pan Click in the window to cycle around these three display options e EQ a graph displays the EQ transfer response Track 29 N e Dynamics a simplified transfer function for compressor limiter expander gate and the various combinations of these can be displayed Live 22 HEM nE ey Fairlight QUANTUM Page 206
325. s the sync point for copying and pasting just as it is for clips e Plug in data may be copied If a plug in is pasted to a channel where it is not instantiated the software will do so automatically Jog Mix Allows automation to be read and written in transport modes other than play For example in Jog mode the system will update the numerical readouts of the automation data faders will move up and down and the audio levels mutes pans etc will update If you jog too fast the system will get behind but it catches up when you slow down or stop With Jog Mix OFF automation can only be written in Play Mode But turning it on allows writing in any forwards transport mode To do this toggle the Jog Mix button ON in the Mix Menu Any forwards movement can be used including Jog Shuttle Play FF Jump GoTo Locate or right button drag with the mouse Any speed is OK though of course the data resolution will be very low if you go fast Even if you press Stop the system stays in write this allows you to adjust control values before moving forward again As soon as you move more than one frame backwards the system will switch to Read Preview The Preview state is system wide When it is on parameters cannot be in Write or Trim but only Preview or Read or Isolate lts purpose is to free the faders and other controls from motor control and let you move them while finding a new balance Normally moving controls implies writing th
326. s using the Jog Wheel or the and buttons Pressing the pop soft key or clicking the on screen pop button brings the selected clip to the top of the stack making it audible Other soft key commands in the Takes menu Rotate sends the top clip to the bottom Reverse Rotate brings the bottom clip to the top On Off toggles Clip Layering on and off Note you can use all the Takes menu commands whether or not Clip Layering is displayed You can move a clip between layers by dragging it up or down with the mouse Hold down the shift button if necessary to prevent any horizontal movement ADR Automation Dialog Replacement is described in its own chapter on Page 83 Background Recording Background recording allows you to make continuous background recordings of the Main Bus and or the armed tracks independently of all other activity in the system The background recordings can be brought into the current project as clips at any time Fairlight QUANTUM Page 79 RECORDING November 13 2014 Uses Recording the Main Bus can be useful for creating sound effects using real time controls on the system For example you can jog or shuttle the transport to create a speeding up or slowing down effect and this will be captured into the background recorder Recording the armed tracks means that you will capture every sound made by artists in your studio even if they enter early play a miraculous phrase that could never happen while the red
327. se sources for the Meter Sets Using the Master Screen Meters Step 1 Click Meter Sets and choose a meter set you can change your choice later Step 2 Click the Define button The system displays the Patch I O page Fairlight QUANTUM Page 289 METERS November 13 2014 a Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Sub 1M Sub 2 M Sub 3 M Sub 4 M Multi Set 2 Set 2 Set 2 Set 2 Set 2 Set 2 Undefined Undefined Meter Meter Set 2 Set 2 Undefined Undefined Track Track Track Live Live Aux Bus View Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Repro Send Direct Send Direct Send User set 1 set 2 set 4 set 5 set 6 Aux Bus Aux Bus Sub Bus Sub Bus Sub Bus CR Mon View Meter Meter Meter Dir Out Send Dir Out Dir System set 7 set 8 set 9 CR Mon Main Main Main Osc Analoq Out Send Dir Out Inputs Digital MADI Solo Instrument Inputs Inputs Out Inputs Step 3 Select the source type you want in the lower left section Step 4 Select one or more signal paths to patch to the meters If you wish to display Tracks or Live Feeds choose their Insert Send which always sends even if Insert is not switched on it s the Return that is affected by the switch Note the position of the insert in the channel which can be controlled on the Path Menu Choosing Direct Out is also possible but is subject to the Direct Out on off switch pre post switch and level control Step 5 Select one or more individual meters to patch in the upper right of the screen Step 6 Click the Patch b
328. se the external process software to start come into focus and load a copy of the selected clip s media Saving Externally Processed Audio Back into QUANTUM The external process will have been working on a media copy of the clip you selected You now need to save the changes from your external process back to the media copy This may need a Save command from the external program or an Export command in which case you must make sure it targets the same piece of media Inside the QUANTUM software the selected clip will already have been re referenced to use the media copy so you should hear the processed audio as soon as it was saved in the external program Note there are no handles specified for external processing so if you think it might be necessary to trim the clip longer after processing it would be a good idea to do that before sending it to the external program Fairlight QUANTUM Page 279 MONITORING AND TALKBACK November 13 2014 Monitoring and Talkback The Monitor system provides summing and switching to handle speaker formats of up to 8 channels lt offers the flexibility of multiple soeaker sets of any format selectable sources amongst any system bus and up to 16 external sources and fold up fold down facilities to manage any combination of the above Set Monitor Levels Mute and Dim and level pots are available in the upper part of the Quantum Center Section together with buttons anda button for the Control
329. secure even if the project file is lost or never saved the WAV files are viable stand alone containers for audio media References to them can easily be imported Fairlight QUANTUM Page 318 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT November 13 2014 and re synchronised in a new project or in any other project This process is described below as Recovering Lost WAVs ox File Edit wiew Favorites Tools Help Beck b gt E papa L Search Folders Address E D Fairlight UiProjects New Projecti i EJ co File Folder 9 etaxz003 33 337 KB DRZ File _ etaxz004 C etaxz005 _ etaxz006 I Fairlight E 9 Fairlightau The picture above shows the typical file layout with a DR2 file The Media folder which is automatically created by the system contains the audio in the form of WAV files while the DR2 file contains the Edit list mix information and automation files XI View Favorites Tools Help ae re S _ Search E Folders 2 J Oi Fairlight AU Projects New Project9iMedia a 0 SFL Recorded Audio 13_al 1GC4Z6BC437X way FOO RE WAW TIT FL_ Recorded Audio 14_a2 1GC8426BC4S7 4 way 766 KB WAV Audio Ei FL_ Recorded Audio 15_a3 1GC8426BC43S42 way 766 KE WAV Audio Ei FL_ Recorded Audio 16 a4 1GC84766C454 way 706KB WAY Audio aj FL_ Recorded Audio 17_a5 1GC84276BC43S20 way 766 KB WY Audio Ei FL_ Recorded Audio 18 a6 1GC8426BC43521 way 766 KB WAV Audio E A isk free space 101 GB 4 48 ME
330. shown This is described in detail below Open Project Step 1 Hold down Mode Step 2 Press Proj Step 3 Release Mode Step 4 Press Open Proj soft key Alternatively click File Open The Open File dialog box is shown Browse select a project and click OK Save Project Step 1 Hold down Mode Step 2 Press Proj Step 3 Release Mode Step 4 Press Save Proj soft key Short cut BLUE Save Proj Alternatively click File Save or type ctrl s Save Project As Step 1 Hold down Mode Step 2 Press Proj Step 3 Release Mode Fairlight QUANTUM Page 314 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT November 13 2014 step 4 Press Save As soft key Alternatively click File Save As Close Project Step 1 Hold down Mode Step 2 Press Proj Step 3 Release Mode step 4 Press Close Proj soft key Alternatively click File Close Load Recent Projects Step 1 Hold down Mode Step 2 Press Proj Step 3 Release Mode Step 4 Press Proj 1 2 etc Alternatively click File File Name a list of recent projects Project Formats In QUANTUM three native project formats are supported The newer format has the extension DR2 It has the strongest feature set and is recommended for use where compatibility with older systems is not required The older formats are MT and MT MFX3 The MT format was introduced in the DREAM product series also known as QDC systems and is maintained with full backward compatibility by QUANTUM The MT MFX8 format i
331. so be scrolled using their scroll bar at the right If the Play Head is unlocked you can locate the transport just by right clicking anywhere in the track area or the timeline above it Note Unlocked Play Head means that the clips are stationary while the Play Head moves left to right To unlock the Play Head click Setup gt Locked Playhead until the tick is removed Mouse Jogging When the Jog button is toggled on you may move the transport as usual with the Jog Wheel or right click and drag it with the mouse in order to hear audio Zooming To Zoom the tracks horizontally turn the Mouse Wheel To Zoom the tracks vertically hold the ctr1 button down and turn the Mouse Wheel Track Selection There are two ways to select tracks with the mouse e Click anywhere in a track This will select that track and deselect all others e Click any track number to toggle its selection This does not affect the selection of other tracks Double click a track number to make it the sole selection There are also short cuts for selecting multiple tracks e Click empty space in a track not on a clip and drag upwards or downwards Every track you touch will be selected and all others will be deselected If you drag sideways as well you will make a range e Hold the ctrl key and click empty space on any number of tracks Each track you click is added to the selection e Click a track number and drag upwards or downwards Each track numbe
332. sport modes In this case the Config Window looks like this Fairlight QUANTUM Page 341 SYNC AND MACHINE CONTROL November 13 2014 Dw AS00 P 0000 30 00 Tracring algaritnim olay crass Poer 0 Standard amp tracks On 10 minutes Locate Method Select between Cue Only operates only in Cue mode or Unlace unlaces a tape machine and puts it in Fast Forward or Rewind when the locate distance more than the number in the Lace Window This allows for faster locates for video tape recorders Lace Window Causes the machine to unlace if it is given a locate command outside the range of this window Unlacing allows the machine to travel faster and reduces head wear Tracking Algorithm Determines how the machine performs when searching for timecode Each machine may perform better with either choice of algorithm Bi Directional Control When switched on allows either the Master or the Slave to instigate transport commands e g Play Stop etc Fairlight QUANTUM Page 342 SYNC AND MACHINE CONTROL November 13 2014 Edit Delay frames Each VTR has a built in delay between receiving the Edit command equivalent to a pre programmed Record command and actually entering the Edit mode If you the Edit Delay to match the machine s behaviour QUANTUM will issue the Edit command early so that the VTR enters Edit at the right time Confidence Head Switches the video machine s Confidence Head on or off
333. ssions to documentation fairlightau com Table of Contents INTRODUCTION cccceecceeceeeeeeeeneeees 1 About the Software Fairlight Post V5 1 About This Man Aal wccte 22 135 8cebezcsarrieeaciosvekecese 1 What Else You Need to Know 00 00eeeee 1 Some Important Terms ccccccssseeeeeeeeeseeeees 2 ANVNING MISSING asrni 3 QUANTUM OVERVIEW ccceeeeeee 4 Signal Flow Diagram cccccccesseeeeeeeeaseeeees 4 Hardware COMponents 0ccccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 6 GV AICS tiaraa a aA 7 Starting the System c cccsceceesssssseeeeeseseeeees 9 System ShutdoOWn ccccccseeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeeeaeeeeees 9 Graphic Themes ccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeees 10 SELECTION AND CALLING 11 Selection TYPES ccccccceseseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeaeeees 11 HOW tO SeICCtH ccccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeeas 11 HOw t0 Gall sisctoscsasdcex 2oenibeneisheqen adhe chedasabiaesdtat 11 CENTRAL TACTILE CONTROL 12 ITFOGUCTION eiea 12 TE RMINOIOGY aca eck itracene Rak eedias 12 FIXKES puscic tassel teal tetecs 13 Picture KGS cctsmnacatismictsancereded tummsttummesnen tumustes 13 ENG PAG srera 13 Pad ALT Bank and Macro keyS 00 14 The Bottom Row KeYS cccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 18 MegamodES sane 24 CUICK EdIIOT eien ene ante wneciindsad see aaudtaness 25 MIKO ectrciee Mea Sts eteden a en it cna
334. st part can be Track a recording track Live a Live Feed which is a full featured channel bringing audio directly to a bus Main the Main mix bus MT Bus a Multi track bus as used in traditional mixing systems Fairlight QUANTUM Page 59 PATCHING SIGNAL PATHS November 13 2014 Sub Bus a multi Element bus used for extra mixing functions Aux Bus a mono or stereo bus tied to the Auxiliary sends on the channels Mon shows the elements of the Control Room and Studio monitor paths Analog an analog physical input or output Digital an AES EBU physical input or output MADI a MADI physical input or output Osc the system oscillator and noise generator The second part can be In the input of a signal path not a physical input Out the output of a signal path not a physical output Direct each signal can have a Direct Output send Insert Send from a signal path Return Insert Return to a signal path Talkback the Talkback system shows Comm1 and Comm2 Inputs physical inputs analog or digital Outputs physical outputs analog or digital Meters the components of the current Meter Set see Meters page 286 So for example Analog Inputs means the physical analog input ports while Aux Bus Send means the Insert Sends from the Aux Buses Fairlight QUANTUM Page 60 TRANSPORT November 13 2014 Transport Basic Transport Controls The PLAY STOP FF and
335. ster Fader and Mute Groups e 32x Group Masters also known as VCAs after Voltage Controller Amplifiers from earlier analog consoles VST Plug ins e Up to 6 instantiations per channel e Total of 96 channels Hardware Components QUANTUM is made up of five interconnected hardware devices e PC containing CC 1 or CC 2 Engine which must run the 32 bit or 64 bit version of Windows 7 respectively e Audio Interface and Sync box SX 8 SX 12 or SX 20 SX 36 e QUANTUM console with Mouse e Recorder Editor Video Monitor e Optional Mixer Video Monitor Plus additional optional components Fairlight QUANTUM Page 6 QUANTUM OVERVIEW November 13 2014 e Extra audio I O boxes SX 48s loaded with analog and or digital I Os e MADI interface cards Graphics Recorder Editor Display Features The graphical display provides status information clip and waveform display and visual feedback for editing functions A number of optional windows can be selected displaying a small mixer the video playback Video Locators or a combination of these To select these use your mouse with the View Menu above the screen R Available ange display Pyxis Track Edit toolbar recording time Smart Pane Zoom range Timecode video on current drive position Kalimba flowers My garden 04 37 58 0909 E mmm EO r 04 37 00 4 33 0 00 04 39 00 00 4 35 30 ASC_6122 Kalimba 69dE Kalimba 10 0 dB Kalimba Kalimba Kalimba
336. system on a copy of the original media therefore applying an EQ change does not affect the audio data on disk The clip based EQ is independent of the track feed mixer EQ Note Clip EQ is a multi track operation Applying EQ Step 1 Press the clip EQ button Step 2 Locate the cursor over the clip or define a Range of clips Step 3 Press the edit soft key Step 3 Press the edit soft key The Pad now displays an EQ graph for the clip and parameter values at the ends Use the Encoders to change the parameter values dfgh FX ASLONGA TRACKS Track The id4th Track Track Track Track Track Sterea 1 poss 13 Ta 15 16 17 18 19 Tks 1 2 Tks 3 4 Tk 5 Tk amp Tk 13 Tk i4 Tk 15 Tk 16 Tk i Tk 18 Tk 14 bayx NMJjj 0 0 dB 10000 hz Band 1 2 Band 3 4 Page 1 Page 2 Page Selection Clip EQ Parameter The four bands of EQ are displayed on two pages Use the Pad buttons to choose a page 0 0 dB 10000 hz 1 0 Normal view ALT view Fairlight QUANTUM Page 124 EDITING November 13 2014 To gain access to the Shape parameter press or hold the ALT button and touch the Encoder to cycle through the possible shapes While changing EQ settings you can hear the changes by playing over the clip Hint while over the clip hold down BLUE and press the loop clip button At any time you may A B the changes you have made with the previous EQ setting for the clip being edited To do this press the 01d New soft
337. t If you want to transfer the MT project and all external audio files to QDC or to another QUANTUM system select Process Stuff Fufs All Clips or Process Stuff Fufs Selected Clips This will copy all external media into the Project s Fuf files Please note that this process can take some time depending on the quantity and size of external files that need to be stuffed Stuffing Fufs is a background task so you can keep working while Post V5 0 is processing However you cannot save your project until Fuf Stuffing is complete When dragging and dropping files onto the Post V5 0 timeline you may notice some files are Fuf Stuffed automatically Post V5 0 performs Fuf Stuffing automatically when it is required for QDC compatibility for example if you drag a file larger than 4 GB onto the timeline Post V5 0 users can also copy clips from one MT project to another In doing so the user creates a relationship between Fuf files belonging to one project and Fuf files belonging to another Using Save As with an MT file has the same effect and creates a Parent Child relationship between the original MT Project and the saved version To break any such inter Project dependencies select Process Detach from the Post V5 0 menus After detaching your MT Project you can select Process Stuff Fufs All Clips or Process Stuff Fufs Selected Clips to consolidate all audio into Fufs associated with your Current pro
338. t term and infinite integration RLB2 weighted meters These meters are referenced to a target LKFS value and offer either a standard 18 9 LU scale or an optional 36 18 LU scale for material with a wider dynamic range e g long form Settings for the loudness component include RMS Window The length of the momentary sliding window in ms Target Reference in LKFS Fairlight QUANTUM Page 292 METERS November 13 2014 Short Window The length of the short term sliding window meter integration time in seconds Integrated Gate An optional Gate can be applied to the Infinite programme integration The blue numbers give running reports on level according to ITU R BS 1770 1 standard as a referenced LKFS value LK They represent the subjective loudness of the audio program The right hand number gives a rolling average over the defined short term window length and the left hand number gives an average over the entire length of program i e since you last reset the meter You can reset the long term average infinite integration by clicking the number The long term average level can additionally have a gate applied in the meter preferences in order to allow it comply with the R128 EBU Standard Fairlight QUANTUM Page 293 Pyxis TRACK November 13 2014 Pyxis Track Introduction Pyxis Track is QUANTUM s built in video disk recorder and editor It can import files of many formats and export to many formats Some of
339. t the To Trim the To Trim the pitch To change the Control how Set a playback velocity of the velocity of the of the selected MIDI channel of many octaves loop and start selected selected note s note s move the selected are shown on it Only MIDI note s move move the slider the slider to note s move the piano events are the slider to to show a show a positive the slider to played not show the positive or or negative show a channel Toggle the audio required value negative value value then click number then metronome then click Set then click Trim Trim click Set on and oft Notes can be added To do this click the Select button in the Left Click group then click a note value from the array Now move the mouse cursor into the piano roll and you ll see the note length Click to create a note of any pitch at any position Deleting notes is done by selecting the Delete tool then clicking on individual notes Fairlight QUANTUM Page 313 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT November 13 2014 Project and File Management Introduction File handling in QUANTUM supports legacy formats from previous products but also introduces powerful modern Project and File management capabilities This chapter details the way the system looks after files Basic File Commands New Project Step 1 Hold down Mode Step 2 Press Proj Step 3 Release Mode step 4 Press New Proj soft key Alternatively click File New The New File dialog box is
340. t the appropriate track s Step 3 Press the var var 1 fror 1 fr soft keys to slip the clip s by the selected amount When there is no Range only the top layer of clips highlighted under the cursor is nudged The var and var keys move selected clips by an amount controlled by the var button Setting the Variable Nudge To set the amount that var and var will nudge the clips simply press the var button until the displayed value is suitable Nudge with A Range Follow these steps to perform a Nudge with a range selected Step 1 Press the nudge key to select Nudge mode Step 2 Use the from and to keys to select a Range that includes all clips to be nudged Step 3 Press the var var 1 fror 1 fr soft keys to slip the clip s by the selected amount When a Range is selected all layers of clips within the Range are nudged including those which are completely buried NOTES Nudging is possible while the transport is in play When nudging a Range clips not wholly within the Range are not affected However the Range itself is also nudged so it is possible to keep nudging the Range without resetting the From and To points This can be used for example to phase the audio with a guide track using Variable nudge with a small value Fairlight QUANTUM Page 113 EDITING November 13 2014 Nudge Sync It is possible to nudge the audio inside a clip without moving the clip itself This is called Nudge Sync
341. t to render You can choose multiple buses by holding down the ctr1 key while clicking on more buses Step 5 Click Go The render takes place as fast as possible using as many tracks as it needs to place each Bus Element on a separate track If you choose more than one bus the extra tracks will be placed below The render process takes into account all clip based processing e g Clip EQ and Clip Level plus all channel setups and processing bus allocation EQ Dynamics Plug ins etc and automation that would be heard if you played this segment of the project Note automation is only heard and rendered when Mix ON is selected If you run the render a second time there is a risk that your first render will be added to the mix To prevent this either delete the first render or make sure that the render tracks are not assigned to any of the mix buses you are rendering Fairlight QUANTUM Page 263 PLUG INS REWIRE AND EXTERNAL PROCESSING November 13 2014 Plug ins ReWire and External Processing Introduction QUANTUM provides powerful support for 3 party hardware and software plug ins via the industry standard VST VSTi and ReWire protocols General Capabilities Plug ins can be instantiated placed in Track Feeds and Live Feeds This is done as an Insert to the feed See Inserting a Plug in below You can instantiate up to 6 plug ins per feed A total of 96 channels of plug ins can be instantiated These are mono equivalents e
342. tata baetn 27 AVlOM AVS oros a 29 CHANNELS sisinieinnnan iris 31 tFOCUCTION s2s hernte sects ccashetasedatenccatbhatetadasedse ase 31 Set Number of Tracks in Project 31 Displaying Channels ccccsssseeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 32 Pyxis Track Displaying Video 00008 33 TACK Colu S anena a eee 33 Track TICIGING cenn en senndnnin 36 PIIGING Track wna tiiscwacnasy ata tanmandiauncatiomatabent 36 A a rera aa om oe 37 Selecting Channels cccccccsssseseeeeeeeeeeees 41 Solo Mute and AfM cceeceeececceceeeceeeeeeeeeees 43 ZLOOMMMG urnen a neds 44 Timescale display cccccccssssseeeeeeeaeeeeeees 45 Serole oie nn eee ee eee 46 Solo ANd MUteC ccccccecssseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeees 48 NAMING siiri Aari 52 PATCHING SIGNAL PATHG 55 QV EINIOW osaisia a 55 The Patch I O Page cccccccsssseeeeeseeeeeeeeeens 55 The Multi Button ce ccecceceseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 59 The IMO BUN OM cena a leis 59 TRANSPORT ccsssssscssesesensesesensenssusens 61 Basic Transport Controls ccssseeeeeeeeeees 61 JOG COMMANASS cccseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeas 61 SNUG aieea tel coer eeeet Getete ar eeedes 61 FOORI sarga a wer metahiveumaveretdiass 62 Special Transport Commands 0000008 63 UOC orsono e a 63 GOTO a aa a 66 RECORDING ccsccsscesecnscesscnsensenseenss 70 BaSS arenes EE aE EN 70 Recording and
343. te Clips on multiple tracks can be level adjusted at the same time If a range is present all clips wholly inside the range will be affected Copy Head Tail copy These keys copy the head or tail of the currently selected clip s The method for copy tail is listed below Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Start with the cursor touching a clip whose tail you wish to copy and paste Press and hold the copy tail button This will cause the tail of the selected clip to display a ghost Use the Jog Wheel or any transport control to locate to the point where you want to paste the tail If desired select another track to be the paste target but keep holding the copy tail button down Release the copy tail button to make the edit Fairlight QUANTUM Page 133 EDITING November 13 2014 Note Clips on multiple tracks can be copied and pasted at the same time Cut Head Tail These keys cut the head or tail of the currently selected clip s The method for cut tail is listed below Step 1 Start with the cursor touching a clip whose tail you wish to cut and paste Step 2 Press and hold the cut tail button This will cause the cut of the selected clip to display a ghost Step 3 Use the Jog Wheel or any transport control to locate to the point where you want to paste the tail If desired select another track to be the paste target but keep holding the cut tail button down Step 4 Release the cut tail bu
344. tep 2 Press the Zoom soft key until its label reads ON Step 3 Select your Zoom hold time using the Hold soft key The Pad controls determine which Zoom control is displayed Touching one of them will display the Zoom panel for the length of time set in the Hold soft key The Equalizer Panel EQUALIZER Library Fairlight QUANTUM Page 216 MIXING November 13 2014 The Dynamics Panel DYNAMICS Track 15 Library The Pan Panel Track 19 Library Use the mouse to move the red dot around the pan field Fairlight QUANTUM Page 217 MIXING November 13 2014 The 3D Panner There is also a 3D display for pan as shown below Serena O Track 14 The yellow ball is used when a Link Group is displayed It can be moved with the mouse The third dimension controls D U and Distance have no effect on the audio in this version of software To enable the 3D panner open the System Variables dialog Step 1 Type ctrl Shift U The System Variables dialog box is displayed Meters Permanent Peak hold mode Main VU Follows 5 0 Peak display limit dB 20 0 VU reference level dB 10 0 Seconds to retain overload 0 0 VU Trim left dB Clear Peakon Record Play 0 0 VU Trim right dB All Meters use same meter point M Digital VU meters iw Stereo on screen meters Launch on screen meters at Bootup aeee Mixer Requires Restart r EQ On Busses MADI Channels 56 64 Step 2 Se
345. th currently called to the Master fader Press the Plug In soft key in the Library menu to select dynamics presets Channel A library of 100 channel settings is provided Each channel preset stores all the parameter settings on the signal path currently called to the Master fader excluding I O patching ALL Console A library of 100 Console settings is provided Each Console preset stores all mixer parameters for all feeds and buses All patching routing and name settings are also stored Default Console Template A special Console library file named default is used to store the default setup of the QUANTUM on power up You may overwrite this file with any setup that suits your requirements Saving a Preset Follow these steps to save a preset Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 6 Press the Lib key to display the library menu and screen page Click the chan EQ chan dyn all chan Or all console button to select the type of preset you wish to save Click the Save screen button and type a new name for the library preset The previously entered name is displayed by default To remove it press the DEL button Click ox to save the preset or Cancel to cancel the operation Loading a Preset Follow these steps to load a preset Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Press the Lib key to display the library menu and screen page Click the chan EQ chan dyn all chan Orall console button to select the type of preset you wis
346. the QWERTY keyboard Step 2 Turn the mouse wheel Step 3 Release the ctrl button Pyxis Track Toggles the video track display on and off the Edit Screen Before this can be done the video track must have been created See page 294 for details Pyxis View Toggles display of the video picture at the right of the Edit Screen Pyxis Full Displays the Pyxis Track full screen over the Edit Screen Sel Video Selects the video track for editing and other purposes Macro This part of the software has not been completed The Bottom Row Keys The Bottom Row keys are fundamental to the operation of the system Learning them will increase your speed and productivity Fairlight QUANTUM Page 18 CENTRAL TACTILE CONTROL November 13 2014 E D siy gt r Eus til 4 x B vets Tae of d te RATAN SAN A s te q ete a ees EA ga a f MoS pene 4 d y 7 T D Era ROAD a 7 WOA f vos ie See pers Late LA ELAN X eee Sit 3 F i oe 4 yin er ete Pi oe 1 Siir i UYA io 2 fe LGE i Say A ut 2 Rete are gin 4 a A a A is i ERIE hea Pay C r F ae 5 4 z FALA y Brest 3 Dri 7 RSS A E VS CAN N 73h mres t b s we eis J SS Cs 4 ERAR es tai y pu i ASAA lt sete An bess I E aaah els lt 4 H Prin bo vis arr SE Blue a Mode shows a Enter Zoom Controls Mon displays GoTo used modifier and large selection completes many how many tracks monitoring for
347. the Wave Menu press the WAVE key Step 2 Press the Pitch n Time soft key The Pitch n Time FE popup appears x Algorithm Polyphonic w Input 8437760 Samples v Units Output 6328616 Capture 100 000 Pitch n Time FE 1 0 2006 Serato Audio Research Preview Process Close Use the keyboard and mouse to adjust parameters e Select an Algorithm o Polyphonic best suited for music o Vocal best suited for voice o Varispeed varispeed mode e Press the preview soft key or Preview button to audition your settings in real time e Tempo changes speed without changing pitch Use the tempo slider to set the desired tempo or press the fit range soft key to capture the current range length or press the edit soft key to edit the output duration or type a value in the Output box e Pitch changes pitch without changing tempo Use the pitch slider to set the desired pitch e Press the process soft key or Process button to render your changes back to the timeline A new clip will be created and the original clip will be muted and preserved in the layer underneath Fairlight QUANTUM Page 168 TIME DOMAIN PROCESSING November 13 2014 Fairlight QUANTUM Page 169 AUDIOBASE CLIP SEARCH CLIPSTORES QTUBE November 13 2014 AudioBase Clip Search ClipStores QTube AudioBase and Clip Search provide different ways of managing sound effects and clips AudioBase has database capabilities
348. the bottom of the second page They are grayed out unless Main is the selected destination Assigning Subs to Main this picture is distorted to save space Signal Processing Using the Pad Overview The Pad can be used to set signal processing parameters In this guide you will see its general workings using the EQ control as an example Note Extensive mouse based control of signal processing is also available For details please see Screen Mix Controls on page 198 The Quantum In Line Panel ILP panel is another very efficient way of controlling signal path parameters For details please see the section starting on page 198 The Pad rotary controls are always available To choose what type of controls are active Press the Pad button FALR LIGETI This key is used to display the selection bank for mix parameters in the Pad Fairlight QUANTUM Page 196 MIXING November 13 2014 It can be used in latched or momentary style Latched example Step 1 Press and release the Pad button quickly The Pad enters Edit Mode and the following display Track Track Track Track Track Track 6 r g q 10 11 Tk amp appears Tk amp Tk Tk 3 Tk i0 Tk ii Band 1 2 Band 3 4 Filters Plug ins Page 1 Page 2 Page 3 Control Parameter Sub Groups Pages The five buttons at the lower right are used to choose the parameter group for the encoders The buttons at the lower left choose pages of controls for the par
349. the dialog without locating anywhere Go To Timecode Step 1 Press the button Fairlight QUANTUM Page 66 TRANSPORT November 13 2014 Step 2 Type a timecode address using the Numpad keys The number you are typing is shown on the Edit Screen If subframes are displayed type ten digits otherwise type 8 digits Numbers wrap around if you keep adding them Press Clear to reset all numbers to zero Press or to add or subtract what you have typed from the existing number Step 3 Press the Go To button again or ENTER to locate to the displayed timecode or Play to locate and go into play immediately or press Esc upper left key to close the dialog without locating anywhere Capture Timecode Sometimes you need to capture the current timecode and then do something with it For example you might want to move the transport exactly 2 seconds and 3 frames backwards To capture timecode Press the Grab Time button You may now continue with the Go To Timecode procedure To complete our example of going back by 2 seconds and 3 frames continue like this Step 4 Type the button Step 5 Type the numbers 203 if subframes are not being displayed otherwise 20300 Step 6 Press the Go button again Or ENTER Play Or Esc You might press the Esc key if you simply wanted to capture the current timecode for another purpose such as setting an Edit Range Go To Mark A Mark is a stored timecode Marks are created by pressing the Mark key w
350. the level drops are not defined as standards For this reason the Fairlight meters may not match the levels shown by other meters Parameter Setup General Preferences Options Audiobase Playback Video Capture Projects _ Sorollers_ Metes Themes Watermark Audio Plugins _ Compound Meter Source Control Room Bar Graph Loudness Enabled v RMS Window 400 ms Scale Peak Target Reference 23 LKFS Short Window 3 Sec Integrated Gate 31 LKFS Seale 18 9 The Compound meters are controlled by accessing Setup gt General Preferences Meters The compound meter contains 2 individual components a BarGraph and a Loudness meter The compound meters source can be selected as either the Control room source pre volume control or fixed to the main meter from the Source selection in the meter preferences The Width of the individual components is defined by the source and so if for example you have the control room selected as the source and change the monitoring source between a 5 1 main and a stereo sub bus the compound meter source and format will follow The Bargraph can be chosen from several scales Peak PPM BBC PPM DIN RMS The Bargraph can also be individually disabled if this component is not required The Loudness meter component offers BS1770 1 compliant loudness metering consisting of simultaneous momentary shor
351. the link group master pan control With the spread control less than full the pan control enables the sound field to be moved to favour the location of the pan target As the spread control approaches POINT the panning of each member becomes closer to the pan location of the link group master This has the effect of mixing the signals of each link group member so that they all emerge from the same loudspeakers as determined by the link group master pan When a link group is created with default pans spread is set to maximum divergence is set to minimum and rotation is set to zero The spread control can be used to great effect when it is desired to collapse the surround sound field to a point source This may occur for instance where the camera moves continuously from an interior shot to an exterior or visa versa The surround field can be established for the interior and then as the camera moves through the door or window the surround field collapses and pans and fades down to the location of the window As this is occurring a pre mixed surround field for the exterior can be growing from the rear speakers and spread out to the entire soeaker system as the exterior shot is established Fader Groups VCAs There are 32 VCA style Fader groups on QUANTUM Members of a Fader Group have their fader levels controlled by a Master and can also be accessed individually to set relative levels within the group Control Faders in a group are controlled r
352. thout notice Fairlight AU reserves the right to change any part of this document without notice The warranties remedies and disclaimers above are exclusive and take precedence over all others oral or written express or implied to the extent permitted by law in the geographical area of the product s use No employee of Fairlight AU agent distributor or employee of an agent or distributor is authorised to offer any variation from this policy Copyright 2014 Fairlight AU Pty Ltd Unit 3 15 Rodborough Rd Frenchs Forest NSW 2086 AUSTRALIA Telephone 61 2 9975 1777 Fax 61 2 9975 1999 END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT You have acquired a device DEVICE which includes software licensed by Fairlight AU from one or more software licensors Fairlight AU s Software Suppliers Such software products as well as associated media printed materials and online or electronic documentation SOFTWARE are protected by international intellectual property laws and treaties The SOFTWARE is licensed not sold All rights reserved IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT EULA DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR COPY THE SOFTWARE INSTEAD PROMPTLY CONTACT Fairlight AU FOR INSTRUC TIONS ON RETURN OF THE UNUSED DEVICE S FOR A REFUND ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICE WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TO THIS EULA OR RATIFICATION OF ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT GRANT OF SOFTWARE LIC
353. to the Head Duration field in the Smart Panel From there you can Jog the value before pressing Enter to apply it to the selected clip s Dur Tail Moves focus into the Tail Duration field in the Smart Panel From there you can Jog the value before pressing Enter to apply it to the selected clip s Range Head The idea is to take a range full of edited clips and make a single Fade In across all of them This works by first rendering the range into a single clip then applying the Fade Head values shown in the Smart Pane Range Tail As for Range Head but with the Tail of the rendered range Make Xfade Opens the Make Xfade dialog described below at page 119 Presets Presets are used to save fade shapes only not lengths The system provides a number of Fade Presets and you can also save your own Custom presets To recall a system preset Step 1 Press the Preset soft key then press keys 1 9 on the numeric keypad to choose one of the 9 factory fade presets Step 2 To apply the recalled shape to a clip click the Length check box in the Smart Pane to deselect it then press the fade head fade tail or fade clip key depending which part s you wish Fairlight QUANTUM Page 115 EDITING November 13 2014 to apply To recall a custom preset Step 1 Click the triangle in the Preset drop menu select one from the the list of custom presets To save the current shape to a new custom preset Step 1 Click in the Preset name field Step 2 Type a
354. top it manually To enter record implicitly Step 1 Move the transport to a location before the In point and press PLAY The automation system will enter WRITE Or TRIM when the transport moves past the In point if active and return to READ when the transport moves past the Out point if active To exit record implicitly Step 1 Move the transport to a location before the Out point and press PLAY Enter Automation WRITE or TRIM Manually when you are ready The automation system will return to READ when the transport moves past the Out point if active Once the transport has moved over the In or Out point they are made inactive This means you can quickly audition the changes you have just recorded using the Play Again command without having to first disable automation To perform another automation pass the In and Out points must be made active again by pressing Active In and or Active Out Link Audio and Mix Recording with PRIME The PRIME function links the automation to the audio recording controls This means that whenever you enter normal recording on the transport controls the automation system also enters recording This is particularly useful if your working method is to record your mix progressively as you go through a project because you will automatically be recording the automation moves at the same time It s also useful if you gain some facility with the recording controls including the ADR menu which offers some ver
355. track is record enabled in order to hear your Rewire device see the chapter Recording on page 70 External Processing Individual clips can be sent to other programs that provide specific kinds of processing This can happen while QUANTUM is running with the export and re import journeys handled smoothly in the software Registering an External Process Audio programs installed on your PC must be registered in the QUANTUM software before being used To do this Step 2 Click Add A dialog box appears showing any external processes programs already registered Step 2 Click Add Step 3 Browse to find the executable file exe that is invoked when you start the program If you are not sure what that is you can find out from the Properties of the icon that launches your external program Step 4 Select the executable file and click Open Fairlight QUANTUM Page 278 PLUG INS REWIRE AND EXTERNAL PROCESSING November 13 2014 Launching External Process from Within QUANTUM Software While QUANTUM is running you can select a clip and send it to your external process as follows Step 1 Select a clip by selecting its track and placing it across the Play Head it should be red Note this command is available on whole clips only Step 2 Open the Wave menu by pressing the wave button in the Editor Megamode Step 3 Press the Ext Process soft key Step 4 Press the soft key labelled with your desired external process This should cau
356. tri and pressing or clicking a path button This will use the path you pressed and the following ones until the set is filled It will take Link Groups into account using one fader for each group When you have mapped the whole fader set the mapping layout in QUANTUM will exit Mapping Link Groups If a member of a link group is selected to map to a fader only the link group master is assigned If a link group Is included in a range the group takes up only one fader Short Cut for Mapping a Sequence You can map a sequence of channels as follows Step 1 Step 2 Press the Map key Hold down the ctrl button and click the first Track Live Or Bus button that you want to map on the Channel Select Window Alternatively press the corresponding Path button in the Xstream Pad The system automatically maps the following sequence of channels to your entire current fader set Any Link Groups that it finds are mapped as single items Inserting and Deleting Faders While mapping a menu is displayed Press the Insert key to insert a path at the current fader position Press the Delete key to delete the current path from the fader set Press the Blank key to leave the current fader un mapped Mixer Set Mixer Set is an option that takes over some of your faders and automatically places the selected channels on them As you select and de select channels they dynamically come and go from the faders This makes it very easy to mix a large
357. tton to make the edit Note Clips on multiple tracks can be cut and pasted at the same time Gee TAIL Erase Head Tail a These keys erase the head or tail of the currently selected clip s The method for erase tail is listed below Step 1 Start with the cursor touching a clip whose tail you wish to cut and paste Step 2 Press the erase tail button This will erase the tail of the selected clip Note Clips on multiple tracks can be erased at the same time Mute Clip This button toggles the Mute state of individual clips When a clip is muted it is not heard Name Clip Press this button to name one or more clips A dialog will appear allowing you to enter the new name for the selected clip s Press Enter or click ox to adopt the new name Press esc or click Cancel to leave the dialog without changing the name Save Project This button saves the project under its existing name Importing from Other Projects The Import Menu allows you to copy clips from other projects into the current one Mixing data can also be brought in A project that is open for import is called a Library file The clips continue to reference the same media files as they did in their original project Fairlight QUANTUM Page 134 EDITING November 13 2014 Import Clips To import clips from another project do the following Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Hold Mode and select Basic Edit Open the I
358. tween two sets of controls for the Quantum In Line Panel QILP The button operates in momentary hold down mode as well as latched press and release Strip and Channel Modes In Strip mode the display shows 12 channel strips corresponding with the 12 faders below In Channel mode the display shows all mixing parameters for one channel the Current Channel To switch between Strip and Channel modes press the button at the right of the faders To choose the type of Strip being shown click or touch one of the above the QILP display To operate the on screen switches included in each strip or the channel display simply click or touch them Note calibrating your touch screen is essential for good operation Fairlight QUANTUM Page 199 MIXING November 13 2014 Screen Mix Controls Choosing Your Mixer Screen In V3 0 software Fairlight software gained a new mixer screen By default it is displayed in preference to the old one but you have a choice The old screen is called FMC and the new one is called EVO Mixer Screen V4 0 software enables this new mixer screen by default however it can be specifically enabled or disabled from within the Themes setup dialog in Setup gt General Preferences Themes EVO Miker Screen W Monitor Index 2 To enable the Evo Mixer Screen ensure that its checkbox is selected and choose the desired monitor using the Monitor Index drop list The monitor can be the same as y
359. ur low frequency higher than your high frequency if you want When you are using a Range it is possible to change one or more bands for the entire Range while leaving other bands as they were So for example the clips might have different settings for LOW EQ but the same setting for HIGH EQ Applying the Changes To apply your changes click the Apply button Only the bands whose Enable checkboxes are selected will be applied To escape without applying your changes click the Esc button New or Old Whilst adjusting an EQ parameter it is possible to toggle between the new and old settings using the New or Old radio buttons until you apply the changes In or Out Toggle the EQ on and off with the In and out radio buttons Copying an EQ The EQ parameters of a clip can be copied to another clip or Range of clips Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 5 Step 6 Locate the cursor over the source clip Click the Copy button on the screen The enable checkboxes allow you to choose which of the bands are pasted into your target clip s Locate the cursor over the destination clip or define a Range of clips Click the Apply button Fairlight QUANTUM Page 156 EDITING November 13 2014 EQ In Out Use the EQ In Out Soft key to toggle the EQ on or off at any time This action will affect the clip under the cursor or all clips in the Range if any The on off position of this switch is stored in the clip along with the settings o
360. us the timecode you typed You can capture the current timecode before using or by pressing the Grab Time soft key Go to Mark Press GoTo then press the GoTo Mark soft key Then use the Jog Wheel or mouse to select the mark you want and press Go to go there or Play to go there and start playing Go to Clip Press GoTo then press the GoTo Clip soft key You will see a list of the clip names in the project This will be covered in more detail later Fairlight QUANTUM Page 23 CENTRAL TACTILE CONTROL November 13 2014 Megamodes Edit Basic Megamode This is designed to access all the Editing functions Soft key Split aft Cvrlap Paste Split Mute Cleave Range 2 fr Special Clip Clip Clip Bounce Ghost Mudge B Clip PE Range Trim Lenz lt on Common Editing Menus RANGE HEAD Track Ranae Clip Head Tail Keys Up Down On o Add Mark Editing Menu Keys Each Menu provides a group of related functions displayed on the Soft Keys and the Clip Head Tail keys The common editing Menus are always displayed on the Basic Edit Megamode Other Menus can be accessed by holding down the Mode button Soft Keys There are 10 soft keys They display functions related to the current Menu Some Menus have banks of soft keys which are accessed by other soft keys For example pressing the Paste Special button causes a row of pasting options to be displayed Soft keys may also change their function according to wh
361. use View Orphaned Media Fairlight QUANTUM Page 327 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT November 13 2014 fe Orphaned Media File Record Track Record Time Duration Path FL_ Reccord E E 1 00 05 30 26 00 00 07 1868 D Fairlight AL FL_ Reccord Test 5_a5 GLTOSONY ODO _ C waw 5 00 05 27 26 00 00 01 29 PYF airlightALt FL_ Reccord Test 4 44 GLTOSDL ODO B wav 4 00 05 27 26 00 00 01 2939 OD FairlightALt FL_ Reccord Test 3 a3 GLTOSDLYDOO 9 waw 3 00 05 27 26 00 00 41 293 D Fairlight AL FL_ Reccord Test 2 a GLTOSDLYDOW 8 wav z 00 05 27 26 00 00 01 2939 D Fairlight AL FL_ Reccord Test 1 a1 GLTOSDLYDDO way 1 00 05 27 26 00 00 01 29 D Fairlight AL FL_ Reccord Test 7_az GLTOSDLYOLO _Awaw 2 00 05 30 26 O0 00 02 168 Di FairlightALt FL_ Reccord Test 9 44 GLTOSOLYDLO_H Nay 4 00 05 30 26 00 00 02 18 D Fairlight AL FL_ Reccord Test 6 a3 GLTOSDLYDLO Gay 3 00 05 30 26 00 00 02 15 D Fairlight AL FL_ Reccord Test 10_a5 GLTOSDLYDLO J wa 5 00 05 30 26 00 00 02 Va D Fairlight AL Click to sort the list by this parameter Drag headings left or right to re order the display Type a text string here to only files whose names contain that string Type Guid audio g ht UiFrojectsiNew Projacte MediaiFl_ Reccord Test 6 4a1 GLTOS0LYDLO_Dvway IQhtALW Projects ew Project2 Media FL_ Reccord Test 5 a5 GLTO9DLYDO0O Ciway audio O0000000_00000000_F9640 iGhtAUW Projects Wew Project Media FL_ Reccor
362. used to increment or decrement the displayed number Step 3 When you have the desired number displayed press the Freq button again Level Sets the volume level for the Tone and Noise channels as follows Step 1 Press the Level button The number pad will appear Step 2 Type the number of the level you require This is always negative but there is no need to use the minus key The numbers will append to the existing number until it goes below 99 and then it starts again with the most recently typed digit Step 2A The and buttons can be used to increment or decrement the displayed number Step 3 When you have the desired number displayed press the Level button again Patch Osc Sets the destination signal paths for the oscillator channels Step 1 Press Patch Osc to access the Patch I O page Step 2 Select the Osc button at lower left then the desired channel at upper left Fairlight QUANTUM Page 223 MIXING November 13 2014 Step 3 Use the Category buttons at lower right to select a type of destination channel step 4 Select one of the channels in the chosen category at upper right Step 5 Click the Patch button To unpatch any connection select it in the upper right area and click Remove Noise Type Toggles between White and Pink Noise types for the noise channel Using Quantum Fader Packs Introduction The Quantum Fader Pack has 12 faders for individual feeds buses or groups You can use up to two of these units
363. using the Value Grid see below or by dragging the curve points in the display Step 5 Apply the changes by clicking the Apply button Each equalisation band has three parameters you can change They are centre frequency of the band gain cut or boost at that frequency and Q factor sharpness of the band or whether it is a high or low shelf EQ display BESS Left side of display When a clip s EQ is being edited the dots change from black to red as shown here They can be moved with the mouse changing frequency and gain values These values are updated in the value grid as you move the mouse You can also hear the changes in the audio if it is playing after a short delay Fairlight QUANTUM Page 154 EDITING November 13 2014 3 Range Filter Type Frequency Gain Q Factor Enables Right side of display The value grid shows the parameters of the EQ being applied to the clip or range of clips At any time you may A B the changes you have made with the previous EQ setting for the clip being edited To do this click the ola or New button For any clip whether or not it is being edited you can click the In or Out button to toggle its Clip EQ on and off If you want to escape without changing the Clip EQ settings click Cancel Clip EQ Parameters Band There are four EQ bands that you can apply They are given the names commonly used on mixing consoles but actually they are not in fixed ranges you have t
364. using the channel buttons in the XCS panel when a Mixer menu is current e g mix menu Of pad lock The Touch Auto Enable button is found in the Mixer Megamode Touch must be set to Snap or Latch Press Auto Setup layout in the Automation Megamode then press the Touch button Alternatively click Snap Or Latch on the Mixer screen Latch and Snap Latch means that once you touch the control it stays in Write or Trim until the system goes back into Read Snap means that the parameter enters Write or Trim when you touch it and returns to Read when you release it using the Glide Out time See page 244 Programmed Automation The entire automation system can be punched into record at which time all enabled mix items will start to write automation data This can be done manually or automatically The Punch Menu All the commands described in this section can be found on the Punch Menu This is found in the Automation Megamode Fairlight QUANTUM Page 246 AUTOMATION November 13 2014 active Jama Menu Suto Purch Manual Punch In The In and out keys can be used to enter and leave automation record The keys can be pressed while the transport is in STOP or PLAY to manually drop in or out of Write or Trim if selected on the enabled mix items Automatic Punch In Summary You can punch in and out of automation record at pre defined In and Out points The basic steps are Step 1 Set the In and Out points Step 2 Mak
365. ut recording uses a different number This is because recording sometimes needs to be more tolerant Note that if timecode sync is lost during recording then re established the transport will go back into Play but not into Record Fairlight QUANTUM Page 344 SYNC AND MACHINE CONTROL November 13 2014 Run Lock If the Play Run Lock checkbox is ticked the system will continue to play after first achieving lock to timecode no matter what the timecode does The lower Run Lock checkbox provides the same option when recording MTC Chase When a machine M1 or M2 with this setting is placed on line it means that QUANTUM will chase MIDI Time Code entering the MIDI In port on the SX 20 The settings are identical to those for LTC Chase Machine Control Indicators Name Name of the 9 Pin Device Servo LEDs The left Servo LED is green when the 9 Pin device has servo lock The right Servo LED is green when the 9 Pin device has sync lock For correct operation with 9 Pin devices both LEDs should be green Timecode Displays the current timecode position of the external device Status Displays the device status Offset Displays the device offset Asm Indicates the 9 Pin device is in Assembly Edit Mode Inh Indicates the 9 Pin device is in Record Inhibit mode Ref Indicates the 9 Pin device is receiving a valid external sync reference Timecode Generator The LTC and MTC generators are independent of the machi
366. ut use the command Process Change Media All Related Clips Undo and Redo Post V5 0 has a powerful undo system that allows you to go back over your work in multiple steps Every time you record audio perform an edit or make a change to the automation data in your project the system captures an Undo File This is a file representing the project as it was before you changed it These files are written to disk and can be accessed at any time while the project remains open With some clever manipulation you can even access them later for information about this please see Undo Files on page 322 Undo The simplest way to undo a change is to press the UNDo button located to the right of the Jog Wheel Redo Reversing an undo can be done with the REDO button To access this Step 1 Hold down the ctrl button and press the uNDo button How many steps are available ALL of them since you opened the project The Undo Menu and List You can see which edits are available to undo and redo by inspecting the Undo Menu and List To do this do ONE of the following Fairlight QUANTUM Page 138 EDITING Step 1 Hold down the undo button for a couple of seconds PlayHead Time Automation Pass 0000 57 15 13 13 54 Faste 0000 4r 02 13 13 l2 Automation Pass 00004309 13 12 38 Automation Pass OO 00 35 12 14 46 Paste OO 003 34 20 RGH Ho Fi Faste 0000 31 19 130435 00 00 25 07 13 04 29 0000 zr 068 ESHISH
367. uto Enable ON When a Touch mode is engaged SNAP or LATCH any enabled parameters that are touched are automatically put into Write or Trim It is not necessary to first enable the feed or Fairlight QUANTUM Page 250 Join Jog Mix AUTOMATION November 13 2014 bus OFF When a Touch mode is engaged SNAP or LATCH only feeds or buses that have been enabled in the mix menu will be put into Write or Trim when their enabled parameters are touched Note Touch Auto Enable is selective by parameter For example if the EQ section is enabled and you touch only one control only it will go into Write or Trim The other EQ controls will remain in Read until you touch them Allows you to carry written values from one place to another Each time the system comes out of Write mode it remembers the values of all parameters that were enabled Now if you locate to any other time and press Join the system will immediately go back into Write with the remembered values set This is useful for setting a scene or section balance as follows Starting writing automation anywhere in a scene or section Adjust parameters until you are happy with the sound Now go back to the head of the scene and press Join then Play Allows automation to be read and written in transport modes other than play As long as the transport moves forward the system will continue to write See more below Auto Curves Hold down this soft key and touch a p
368. uts muted Use variable speed to reduce the error between the QUANTUM position and the Position Reference until it is very small 3 Switch to the Motion Reference for continued playback The system is said to be locked once this switch is made and the audio is unmuted 4 Warn of error status if the sync error increases if a reference signal is lost etc Fairlight QUANTUM Page 348 SYNC AND MACHINE CONTROL November 13 2014 Synchronization Conflicts When you are recording a digital source it must be synchronised to the same Master Clock Reference as QUANTUM or an overflow too many samples or underflow too few samples may occur at the input This causes a characteristic periodic form of digital distortion called a whisper A whisper sounds like a brief glassy or metallic buzz and occurs about once every few seconds depending how fast the samples are overflowing or underflowing The best solution to digital sync conflicts is to drive all digital devices from a single studio wide word clock signal Then all devices will have identical word rates so whispers never occur and digital interconnections may made with ease In this instance the sync HOUSE option is always used Pull Up and Pull Down The normal sample rates used by the digital audio industry are 32 000 44 056 44 100 48 000 and 96 000 samples per second The normal frame rates are 24 25 29 97 and 30 These last two may cause confusion when used together QUANTUM
369. utton This patches the sources to the selected meters and saves the Meter Set Whole Bus Patching Expandable If you patch a whole bus to the meters in one gesture it becomes resizable One gesture means that you selected all the bus elements and the same number of consecutive meters and clicked Patch Resizable means that if you change the bus format it will grab as many meters as it needs pushing the next signals to the right when it expands potentially off the end and pulling them to the left when it contracts Fairlight QUANTUM Page 290 METERS November 13 2014 If you leave blanks to the right of a resizable bus it will consume the blanks before starting to push other channels to the right Peaks The numeric peak levels displayed on the mixer display bus meters have a variable threshold The level at which these values are displayed can be set in the C Program Files Fairligh F MC Data System_Variables txt file Edit the following line in the file PEAK_DISPLAY_LIMIT 950 The value is from 0 to 1000 in 0 1dB steps where 1000 full scale level In the example above the value of 950 will cause the numeric display to first be shown when the signal level reaches 5dB below full scale 970 will set the threshold to 3dB 990 will set the threshold to 1dB and so on Clear Peak Signal levels in excess of OdB full scale are indicated by a fixed orange peak hold display You can clear peaks using the Clea
370. utton again to stop playback ReSync Creates a clip using the selected media at the original recording timecode and on the original track Close Closes this dialog box The Escape button can also be used Importing Files QUANTUM has a number of features to allow the import and export of audio clips and Projects File Types POST V5 0 can import the following file types Individual sound files see section below Video Files these can be displayed on the Pyxis track Pyxis Projects these are projects created using the program Pyxis OMF Files these are files from other manufacturers ML Files these are files from older Fairlight products AES 31 Files these are files from other manufacturers AAF Files these are files from other manufacturers MXF Files these are files from other manufacturers Importing Video Files See Pyxis Track on page 294 Importing an OMF Step 1 Click on File then choose import OMF Step 2 Browse to the location of the omf and select it Press OK Step 3 The following dialog box is displayed Fairlight QUANTUM Page 329 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT November 13 2014 Clip naming Nuendo 4dyvanced Standard a Remap Stereo Source Clips Fully Import Media Sub Composition Audio Data Mode Offset Timecode 00 00 00 00 EQ Plugins PreRendered iF Available f Embeded Media All Media is in One File Try to Locate External Files Track jo
371. ve and set the interval you would like in the box that appears to the right The ADR Display The cat sat on the mat The ADR Display is a band across the screen which displays the ADR text and also gives an indication of the start point for the cue An example of the streamer is shown below The text is shown and the indicators converge on the centre of the screen arriving at precisely the In time of the cue To turn it on use the toggle ADR gt ADR Display Fairlight QUANTUM Page 87 ADR November 13 2014 Cycle The Cycle command is used to initiate ADR actions It will execute rehearsal recording and playback depending on the mode of the ADR system See below for details Preroll and Postroll It s usually necessary to set a preroll for recording This allows the recording artist to get ready for the Start Postroll is useful for hearing how the new recording fits into the track Set preroll and postroll using the appropriate fields in the ADR List Rehearsing a cue You may rehearse cues before recording them Is this needed in a system where all recording is non destructive Your call Step 1 Click the Rehearse button or press the REHEARSE soft key This puts the ADR system in Rehearse mode Step 2 Select a cue The transport will locate to its In Time Step 3 Click Cycle or press the cycle soft key This will cause the transport to drive through the In and Out points once switching the track from repr
372. ving between tracks is the track up down button If you hold it down and turn the Jog Wheel the whole track selection will move up or down You can also use the or keys and the Numpad with the track up down button Two Handed Editing Using two hands for cut and paste can save a lot of time The key is to hold down the action key cut head trim tail copy clip erase range etc then select the destination timecode and tracks then release the action key to paste the clipboard Example 1 Press down the cut clip key don t release it yet With your other hand jog the transport forward Release the cut clip key the clip you cut is now pasted where you jogged Example 2 Press down the cut clip key With the same hand press down the track up down button With your other hand turn the jogger wheel to change the track selection Release the cut clip key the clip you cut is now pasted on a different track With practice two handed editing can substantially increase your efficiency at repetitive editing tasks Copy Copy works exactly the same way as Cut except that the audio is not removed to place it on the clipboard only copied Pasting after copy is the same as after cut Erase Erase works exactly the same way as Cut except that the audio is not placed on the clipboard The clipboard remains unchanged so its previous contents are ready to paste at any time Edit Soft Key Commands The following soft
373. w media file ajx Look ir Media de My Recent Documents Deskto m My Documents gr My Computer E My Network Places Fi FL _al 4PHS6NY Z487 IM way Al FL_ _a1 4PHS6NV 247 1P way A FL_ _al 4PHS6NYZ47 1R way A FL_ _al 4PHS6NYZ447 15 way A FL_ _al 4PHS6NY24271T wav A FL_ _al 4PHS6NYZ4X7 LY way A FL_ _al 4PHS6NYZ4271_ way A FL_ _al 4PHS6NYZ427 1x wav A FL_ _al 4PHS6NYZ427 LY wav A FL_ _al 4PHS6NY Z4271Z wav A FL_ _al 4PHS6NvZ42720 way A FL_ _al 4PHS6NyZ5B730 way File name Files of type FL_ _al 4PHS6Ny 24a 1M way A FL_ _al 4PHSENYZ4 710 way A FL_ _al 4PHSONYZ47 LW wav o E FL_ _al 4PHS6NYZ5673F way A FL_ _al 4PHS6NYZ5B736 way A FL_ _al 4PHS6NyYZ5B73H way A FL_ _al 4PHS6NYZ5B73I wav A FL_ _al 4PHS6N Z52726 way FL_ _al 4PHS6NYZ5272C way A FL_ _al 4PHS6NyZ52720 way A FL_ _al 4PHS6Nv Z5272F way A FL_ _al 4PHS6NYZ52726 way A FL_ _al 4PHS6NYZ5272H way a FL_ _al 4PHS6NY25472 wav A FL_ _al 4PHS6NvZ5472K way A FL_ _al 4PHS6N Z5472L wav A FL_ _al 4PHS6NvZ5472M way A FL_ _al 4PHS6NyZ5472N way FL_ Ay FL AN FL Ay FL Ay FL Ay FL A FL AN FL A FL Ay FL AN FL Ay FL Ay FL A FL A FL Cancel Browse to find the media you want and click the Open button The system replaces the media in the selected clips To replace the media of clips using that media file do the same as above b
374. ware launched and a Project with Pyxis track open navigate to Setup General Preferences Video Capture This window configures the Post V5 0 part of the video capture system Fairlight QUANTUM Page 300 Pyxis TRACK November 13 2014 General Preferences x Projects Scrollers Watermark Audio Plugins Options Audiobase Playback Video Capture Device Decklink Video Capture Capture Settings Standard E Capture Size 720x5768bt2500fps v Input Source oO Record Format Dv25 Capture Format MEDIASUBTYPE_UYWY x Frame Offset o 25 FPS cancel w _ Capture Size is a default value based on whether Post V5 0 is launched in Standard or High Definition mode and the current project sync settings See View gt Smart Pane gt Sync If this setting is not the format you are wishing to capture it is recommended you consider exactly what format you wish your project to be and configure it in consequence The Device value tells Post V5 0 which video hardware capture unit will provide the incoming video signal Under normal conditions this will be Decklink Video Capture Input Source is currently not activated Setting the correct Video Input must be performed within the Decklink Control Panel See above Record Format is the video file and codec format for capturing the incoming video signal The options available are e DV25 DV Codec 3 5Mb sec SD NTSC or PAL ONLY e
375. which make it suitable for large scale and shared sound library capability Clip Search is more suited to fast storage of clips and groups and provides searching within the current project and attached library projects AudioBase AudioBase is a library database which allows you to search for WAV files on your Medialink2 server via a standard Windows network Once a WAV file has been found it may be auditioned and then imported into the current open Project Creating and Maintaining Databases Refer to the AudioBase3 User Guide for details on creating and maintaining clip databases Searching for Sounds AudioBase uses a simple search interface to find clips Step 1 Hold down Mode and press Audio Base Alternatively click the Audio Base button in the Toolbar Audio Base Button Alternatively click view gt Smart Pane Audio Base The search field becomes active Step 2 Enter the text you wish to find and click the search soft key or click the on screen seach button All relevant database fields will be searched Use quotes to find whole phrases An AudioBase search can be stopped by pressing the search soft key again or by clicking the screen Search button again Fairlight QUANTUM Page 170 AUDIOBASE CLIP SEARCH CLIPSTORES QTUBE November 13 2014 Placing Sounds In A Project Dream II v0 0a35 Beta ali_48tk le lt 48 tracks gt MFX Project File ix Search For car Clip Name T283 Category 60
376. which numbered tracks are displayed To select this option select View Show Pyxis Track Lock e t may be placed above the audio tracks only when Track 1 is displayed To select this option deselect view gt Show Pyxis Track Lock Centered Track Display A further option for track display automatically places the current track most recently selected in the vertical center of the Edit screen with the chosen number of tracks distributed above and below Fairlight QUANTUM Page 32 CHANNELS November 13 2014 To adopt this option select the checkbox at Setup gt General Preferences Display gt Display Centers on current track Automatic View of Selected Tracks Edit Set Choosing Edit Set causes the Edit Screen to display only selected tracks and this updates dynamically as you select and deselect them To turn on Edit Set Hold down the BLUE key and press the Edit Set button To exit Edit Set do the same again The track display reverts to its previous fixed number of tracks i e set using the view buttons not the Jog Wheel or mouse Pyxis Track Displaying Video Full details about Pyxis Track are given in the chapter Pyxis Track on page 294 Track Colours Background Colour Each track has a colour that you can choose Selected tracks are shown in a lighter version of their base colour as shown below for track 143 which would be the same colour as 142 if not selected Fairlight QUANTUM Page 33 CHANNELS Novem
377. with groups of feeds carrying audio in a multi channel format such as stereo or 5 1 See Grouping on page 179 for an overview of link groups Link groups should be established before any automation is written If members are added to a group when automation data is present on either the master or the members the data on the members is erased If the link group is destroyed or unlinked after automation is recorded for the group the au tomation data remains on the group master but not the slaves Only the parameters on the link group master can be automated the slave member s parameters follow the master Mix Editing Mix Copy Mix Copy allows a selection of automated mix parameters to be copied from one time location and channel selection to another Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Press the MIX ON key to enable mix automation Select the mix items you wish to copy by selecting parameters and signal paths in the usual way Use the From and To keys to select the range from which you want to copy The IN and ouT points are displayed on the LCD Press the Copy Mix soft key in the Mix menu Locate the cursor to the destination where you want to paste the mix automation data Press the Paste Mix soft key to complete the operation The rules are detailed above in the section about the Mix Menu Automation follows Clip Editing In addition to the Mix Copy functions it is also possible to edit autom
378. ws you to define many speaker sets There is always a Main set usually your large Control Room monitors You may also create many other sets and choose them whenever you like The system remembers the last non Main one you chose and calls it the Alternative ALT Speaker Set Fairlight QUANTUM Page 282 MONITORING AND TALKBACK November 13 2014 Step 1 Press the Mon button Step 2 Choose one of the alternative speaker sets Shortcut Mon This will toggle between Main and ALT If you have not chosen an Alt Speaker since starting the system it will toggle to Alt 1 Configure Monitor Speaker Sets The system allows you to define many speaker sets There is always a MAIN set usually your large Control Room monitors You may also create many other sets and choose them whenever you like This guide will show you how to set up the formats outputs and names of your speaker sets Step 1 Press the Mon button Step 2 Press the Mon Setup button g l cR monr ECR Mon Ls ECR mon rs fcr Mon B CR Mon L CR Mon C CR Mon R CR Mon Ls CR Mon Rs CR Mon B 5X20 A01 5X20 A02 5X20 A011 SX20 a012 MM Sx20 403 5x20 404 sx20 a05 Sx20 aos oo aot aesaad as a Puke cee ST MON 1L STMON1R za ed Gd Ge ss Ee Control Studio Analog Digital MADI co ao MAIN SpkSet2 SpkSet3 SpkSet4 SpkSet5 Rename SpkSet6 SpkSet SpkSet8 Configuring Speaker Sets Step 1 Choose a Speaker set at the lower left Step 2 Click the Increase Format button until you se
379. y during the recording and editing process Fairlight QUANTUM Page 349 HUI SLAVE MODE November 13 2014 HUI Slave Mode Introduction HUI is a protocol invented by Mackie Corporation which allows different audio systems to control each other Many consoles and other devices now incorporate aspects of the HUI protocol and QUANTUM has implemented the full specification as a slave including the Universal Pro Extensions This allows the following functions to be controlled remotely e Transport states including Jog and Shuttle e Jog Frames i e the system can be jogged remotely e Fader levels bidirectional for motor control e Mutes Solos Track Arms Channel Selects note Channel Select will arm a track if the Arm or ADR menu is current e Channel names the first 4 characters to be displayed on the controller e Buttons on the controller can be mapped to Post V5 0 functions Setup Install HUI device Your HUI device will come with its own installer cables and instructions Follow these and make sure the HUI device is working correctly INI File The file C Program Files Fairlight FMC FMC ini must contain the line HUI n Where n is the number of faders on the HUI device default 8 Just doing this will result in faders mutes pans solos and selects from your HUI device working correctly on the QUANTUM system That is to say they will act and will also tally the changes MIDI Devices For HUI to work the QUA
380. y preset press the Preset soft key then press keys 1 9 on the numeric keypad to choose one of the 9 factory fade presets The preset is loaded into the Shape graphs and can be applied to clips in the usual way Alternatively click a number in the preset pad at the left of the display 0 di 20 30 GB Click to load a factory preset Fade Presets To load a custom preset Step 1 Press the preset soft key Step 2 Press custom preset Step 3 Turn the Jogger Wheel and as each custom preset is displayed it is also loaded Stop when you have loaded the one you want Fairlight QUANTUM Page 117 EDITING November 13 2014 Alternatively use the custom presets pulldown menu in the Fades display Presets Tail BE Click to load a custom preset ination Trim Capture Click to type a new name for a M Shape custom preset then click Gava To save a custom preset Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Set up the fade shapes you want to save Press the preset soft key Press save preset Type a name for the new custom preset and press the Enter key Alternatively use the custom presets pulldown menu in the Fades display as shown above Capturing Shapes To capture a fade means to extract all of its parameters making them available to apply to other clips Step 1 Step 2 Click the capture button This will cause it to flash Click the Clip Head or Tail button to capture the fade length and shape from the curr
381. y repeating entry of the password Step 3 Capture a video file Fairlight QUANTUM Page 302 Pyxis TRACK November 13 2014 The same password must be entered to unlock encrypted video media each time the project is opened Once you have entered the password you can open any files encrypted with that password The Pyxis Window To show a window displaying your video use the command Hold down Bank and press Pyxis View Alternatively use the menu command view Pyxis Display Layering Smart Pane Show Pyxis Track Playback Video Source Edit Workspace Locators Sort Video Locators Tracks Clip Search TimeScale Statistics Performance Background Tasks This window is resizeable as shown below Ce LLL LE 169 170 171172 173 174175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 Drag here to resize Pyxis i window Click here to scroll video locators list HH HHE Haf H F Pi DONT S Video locators Full Screen Pyxis To make Pyxis go full screen covering the Edit Screen use the command Fairlight QUANTUM Page 303 Pyxis TRACK November 13 2014 Hold down Bank and press Pyxis Full Alternatively double click anywhere in the Pyxis window Video Locators While the Pyxis window is displayed you may click on an empty marker at any time This will capture the current video frame and display it with a timecode number To locate to any video locator simply click it T
382. y sophisticated rehearsal and automatic recording features To use the PRIME function press the Prime key While it is on Press the PLAY and REC transport keys to drop in to record Note that the enabled Mix Items enter Write and armed tracks enter record Press STOP or PLAy to drop out of record The enabled tracks return to Read NOTE It is not necessary to have any tracks armed for recording in order to use PRIME It also allows you to use Record Again and other automated record functions as triggers for Automation Record Saving and Loading Mixes Up to 256 complete mixes may be saved in each project and recalled later MIXES MUST BE SAVED BEFORE CLOSING A PROJECT or any unsaved mix data will be lost It is not enough to simply save the project See System Mix below for a useful safety measure The available space left in the project file for new mixes or mix data is displayed in the Mix menu When the space left falls below 2 the Save soft key becomes disabled Saving a Mix Step 1 Hold down Mode and press the File button Step 2 Press the Save soft key in the LCD menu Step 3 Type a unique name for the mix on the PC keyboard and press Enter Alternatively type a name with a numeric suffix e g Demo Mix 1 The next time you press Save anew name will automatically be generated with an incremented suffix e g Demo Mix 2 Press Enter to save the mix with the new name Fairlight QUANTUM Page 248 AUTOMATION November 13
383. y to tell which because they are always red Fairlight QUANTUM Page 107 EDITING November 13 2014 When there is a range the target is all the clips and parts of clips on selected tracks that are inside the range Again the target clips are always red An exception with a range you can use the mouse to deselect a clip To do this hold down the ctrl key and click with the mouse The clip will turn blue showing that it is no longer selected You can also extend the selection using Ctrl mouse click on a clip This will cause the range to expand so that it includes the newly selected clip and it will preserve the existing selection as well Pasting Pasting the clipboard use the Enter key means putting a copy of it at the current position on whatever tracks are selected You can paste the clipboard contents at any time not just after a cut operation and as often as you like lf there are already clips at the place where you paste the clipboard is placed on top of the existing clips Only the top layer is heard unless there is a crossfade between layers more about that later The shape of the clipboard s track selection is preserved when pasting regardless of track selection at that time For example if you copy clips on tracks 1 and 3 then select only track 8 and press Enter the clipboard will be pasted on tracks 8 and 10 The first track on the clipboard is always pasted on the lowest numbered track in th
384. yboard The audio from all tracks will be copied whether selected or not plus the automation from all signal paths and all parameters whether enabled or not You can also use this command to copy a project segment from an import project and paste it into the main workspace Import Automation from Another Project The Import Menu can be used to bring audio clips in from another project This is described in the section Importing Clips from Other Projects on page 134 lt can also be used to import mix automation The procedure is as follows Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Hold down Mode and press Import Press the open soft key choose a file from the Open dialog and click OK This opens the Import File i e the one from which you will import Press the Mix soft key This will cause a new menu to be displayed in the Pad Press the Select Mix soft key This will cause the names of the available Mix files to be displayed in the Pad Fairlight QUANTUM Page 255 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 AUTOMATION November 13 2014 Spin the Jog Wheel until the mix you want is displayed in the Pad Press Enter to load the displayed mix Select the tracks and the range that will be the source of your Mix copy Press the Copy Mix soft key The system will now return to your original project Select the tracks where you want to paste the imported mix data Press the Paste Mix soft key The mix data will be
385. ys in Trim Mode Pressing the Trim Sync soft key creates a sync marker within the selected clip s at the cursor position This is shown as a yellow mark in the clip and can be used to visually locate an important moment To change the sync point press sync point at the new location There is only one sync point per clip Trim Edit Options Trim is usually applied to a single clip or selections across tracks range is not supported in Trim Mode Fairlight QUANTUM Page 112 Slip EDITING November 13 2014 all layers is not supported in Trim Mode razor Is not supported in Trim Mode Slip sync Pressing the Slip Sync soft key allows the audio within the clip to be slipped without changing the positions of the head and tail To do this press the Slip Sync soft key move the transport and press ENTER The audio within the clip will move by the amount you just moved the transport There are limits to slipping sync Eventually the end of the recorded audio reaches the end of the clip and after that it can go no further Nudge The nudge function slips clips by a predetermined amount of time nudge can operate on one or many tracks affecting clips that lie under the cursor or within a Range nudge can operate in fixed steps of plus or minus one frame or in Variable steps of 5 10 20 or 40 sub frames a sub frame is 1 80th of a frame Using Nudge Step 1 Press the nudge button Step 2 Locate the cursor over the clips and selec
386. yxis Track if enabled the timecode generator if enabled and any machines that are being controlled by the system Transport commands include Play Stop Record Jog Rewind Shuttle and FF The timeline is shown at the top of the Edit Screen 133 134135 4136 laf 13 139 140 141 142 143 144 140 141 143 143 144 145 1 147 146 149 4150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 O00 0016 i m a 4 HAD 1 H 00 01 00 Play Head The line in the center of the Edit Screen is called the Play Head This is the current point where the system plays audio and video It is also the point where most edits occur The timecode display shows the position of the Play Head Project The file created by Fairlight software containing the stored audio and its editing and mixing instructions Physical Input Output An analog or digital audio input or output Track Feed A signal path channel feeding to or from the disk recorder which can be processed and routed to mix buses and monitoring COND CC1 Systems equipped with CC 2 have two types of track Playback Tracks and Full Tracks e A Playback Track is not able to record or take a physical input It cannot have insert sends and returns that exit the physical system nor Direct Outputs e A Full Track can record and can also take a physical input and if desired deliver it directly to mix buses and monitoring this is called Thru mode Fairlight QUANTUM Page 2 INTRODUCTION November 13 2014 e Bot
387. ze the dialog by dragging with the mouse on any of its sides Change the order of displayed fields by dragging the field names horizontally with the mouse Paste the selected clip s at the current time by clicking the Paste button or by dragging one or more clips from the window to the Track display if multiple clips are selected they will be placed end to end at the destination What is Displayed el Track Layer Ste Video 2 O0 Video 3 od Video 3 00 Video 3 00 Widen 4 nine By default the window displays clips from the current workspace By clicking the various tabs you can access your choice of All sources The current project workspace Other workspaces i e attached Library projects for information about libraries see Import on Page 134 Your project Bin described in the next section Your Clipstores described in the next section Clip Selection While a list of clips is shown in the window you can use the mouse to select one or more of them Fairlight QUANTUM Page 174 AUDIOBASE CLIP SEARCH CLIPSTORES QTUBE November 13 2014 z Reveal File es EEEE telae Pop f cose After that you can click the Select button to select those clips in the Edit Screen This is very useful for applying the same Clip EQ or Level to a bunch of clips with similar names Clip Bins Every project has a Clip Bin This is a place to store clips not being used at the moment They are copied directly to th

QUANTUM User Manual V5.0

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents